Home

Hydro GeoAnalyst User`s Manual - swstechnology.com archive

1. Based on the nature of environmental data and the purpose for which the data is collected there are generally eight table types as shown in the following table 2 Global Time Monitoring Date and Time Events Depth Interval Sample Start Depth End Depth collection Depth Point Sample collection Depth Interval Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Interval Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time 438 Chapter 5 Template Manager Depth Point Time Monitoring Monitoring Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time Depth Point Time Exploration Examination Point ID events Start Depth End Depth Date Time NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark The Table Types are listed on the right side of the Table Settings window When the desired Table type is selected from this frame Hydro GeoAnalyst lists some of the most commonly used tables wherever applicable as Example tables For example if a depth interval data type is selected tables such as Lithology well drilling well casing etc will be listed in the Example tables Select a sample table to view the struct
2. Select a Query VCE xceeds20 y Expression station id id soil_samples a s Soil Chemistry Bere Se sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date am from P x J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system to chemical_name Conditions result_value Expression result unit soil_chemistry chemical_name T soil_chemistry result_value conc_ppm m m soil_chemistry sample_date fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment Trichloroethane 2003 11 28 bd rdl_ppm sample_matrix_code x sample_type_code M Group By List sampling_reason Field Having fal Rack Corina El Function Operator Value Operator Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry sample_date Type DATESTAMP Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under Group by List any field may be added for additional grouping options For example if the Query Results are to be grouped by County or City simply select this field and drag and drop the field into the Group By List Additional rows may be added to the Group options by right clicking and selecting Add Row Group By List Having Function Field Operator Value Operator Add Row Delete Row Add Station ID field Once the Group By conditional options have been specified an aggregate function must be
3. Template Manager Demo olx Environmental y T ES Fm Use as project default Database structure Table Settings Descriptions H Description i E Database Settings H V Geologic Description rau Well Construction Table name screen P Drilling Protocol E Global W Casing cames Global Time Screen from_ to_ Param 3 Param 4 Param 5 Parar Depth Interval M screen_id 1 1 0 1 Examination Event IV from 140 105 105 0 Monitoring Point MV to Depth Point Y diameter desciiplion Monitoring Point V screen_type Examination Event V slot_number i H V Annular Fill Table relationships 4 Monitoring Points Table is parent to H Soil Testing Primary key Table Foreign key H Soil Sampling screen_id gw_level Screen_ID H V Monitoring Event z 4 Mining Exploration 4 Geophysics ne 6 4 Well History Table is child to User Category Primary key View settings Name Screen Fx 3 6 49 Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM EE Help r The number of fields that need to be selected as a foreign key depends on the number of fields making up the primary key in the current table In tables where the primary key consists of only one field the cell where foreign keys are to be entered displays a combo box with the list of all fields in the selected table that have similar properties to the primary key in the current table Only one field from the list can be selected as a foreign k
4. Visible Test size 0 015 Text color x Frame Frame line color Frame fill color Li lt i o E The Name option controls the display name for the plume in the tree view The Palette option controls the color scale used on all Plume display elements A description of the Palette options is available below see The Color Palette on page 418 The Color legend settings are used to modify the appearance of the color legend as it applies to all color map display elements A description of the Color legend options is available below see The Color Legend on page 420 Isosurfaces An isosurface is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space Isosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for representing the spatial distribution of concentrations HGA 3D Explorer allows you to create and simultaneously display multiple isosurfaces for the one or more plumes in your project Creating Isosurfaces To create an isosurface click on the desired plume data set in the Model tree to highlight 1t then right click on the element and select Add Isosurface from the pop up menu Alternately isosurfaces may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create isosurface icon located above the Model tree This will open the Isosurface properties
5. X pixels 751 Y pixels 652 In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known coordinates These georeference points can be defined using the procedure described below Note The real world georeference points must have coordinates that are in the same projection system as the Map Project Map Manager will not make adjustments or conversions for georeference coordinates that are in a different projection system To set a georeference point e Click on the first map location where the X and Y world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y 1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point s1 535122 v1 4812839 xp 220 Yp 293 OF Cancel e Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK e Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known e Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK A box will appear around the map region similar to the window shown below 308 Chapter 8 Map Manager A Select Map Region File view Edt Options E H 5251 24 445 m Y 461 2030 44 m UF l Lance The Georeference utility will convert the Raster Image to project coordinates in the top right corner of the window the two Georeference Points will be displayed These values cannot be modified unless one o
6. Click on the Add button to add a standard value and select a field that contains the standard value Click on the Delete button to remove existing list items from the list When you are finished click on the Close button The new standards will appear as a plot series under the Plots node in the tree You can then modify the line symbol and label properties as shown below Settings Mapping Name Ef Line Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid E Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serif Spt Font color Wl Black Symbol Triangle Color Gi Blue Size 4 4 Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Visible show hide the markers Chapter 7 Plotting Adding Plots Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line Multiplier select a field that contains a multiplier value use this to apply a multiplier factor to all result values on the plot Bar Color Schema This option allows you to define advanced bar color settings for bar chart plots When this option is loaded the Bar Chart Color Settings dialog will display shown below NOTE This dialog will only be available after you have specified Bar as the Series Type in the Settings tab S Bar Chart Color Settings A a k x Define Color Setti
7. 1536997 287974739 4013771 400509556 535061 246412517 4014493 14014607 537074 361637415 4013506 30015671 536355 327178395 4012577 93076004 535631 637094599 4813653 15720517 537571 759289336 4012201 09712205 534812 301152791 4015042 0023390236 538122 215810651 40132723201155 Here you can review all of the control points To delete a control point simply click the appropriate row in the table and click the Delete Row button Click Ok to close the table If there is a significant difference between the georeferenced coordinates and real world coordinates check the precision of the georeference points and reassign 1f necessary Once the georeferencing is completed click OK in the Georeference window A confirmation dialog will appear as shown below ad File attributes Source file name Wayne DAVB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_img bmp Name in the project Wayne D VB Projects Demo_Project temp temp_geo BMP i Cancel Click OK to continue The Raster Image will then appear as a new Map Layer in the Map Project CAD The Map Manager also allows you to import CAD files into a map project file Supported formats include AutoCAD files DXF DWG and MicroStation files DGN CAD layers may be built in a Projection that is different from that used for the current map project therefore when a CAD file is selected the projection system and units may need to be co
8. Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A color map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Color map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Color Map Display Settings Once the Color map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below 414 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Setting E Name Colormap_2 Visible W Max value 39999 9793 Min value 0 0 Upper limit 40000 Lower limit 0 0 Clip at limits P Semitransparent lt 1 Slice e Name is the name for the color map e Visible shows or hides the color map e Max value is the calculated maximum value for the plume e Min value is the calculated minimum value for the plume e Upper limit is the data value above which the color map may be clipped out not displayed e Lower limit is the data value below which the color map may be clipped out not displayed e Clip at limits indicates whether the color map will clipped above the Upper limit and below the Lower limit e Semitransparent sets the color map as semi transparent e Slice field contains a link to the Slice options see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 422 below for more details Isoline Maps Isoline Contour maps are a set of lines plotted o
9. Locate the DataField entry in the Property Toolbox this 1s circled in the image above Expand the combo box beside DataField and select Name from the list If there are no fields available in the list type Name in this field By specifying this option the Report Editor will group the data by the station Name field The chart can now be added to the report GroupFooter1 in the report design window and enlarge the space allocated to this component see the design below The GroupFooter will contain the time series chart and as such there must be adequate space allocated Creating Reports with Charts 241 New Report 2181 x egale J EM EA E ie PA EA aaa E H MainReport H PageHeader A a Bannan Bane E GroupHeader Ro eo e e pere gae H E il ae HT a ad E e 4 E Name GroupHeader H PageFooter 3 AAA BackColor El GroupHeader BackStyle 0 ddBKTrar ba ae i CanGrow True A EEEE are EERE Fete pert E eE e a reo ren ea E CanShrink False ARRIA fos ssccs PARRER HERAA PARERS RRA eel eee PA RE Ge PARERA oe PI True HA E CTS SP A A A DataField GrpKeepT 0 None Chines RE ere ee Reed AS DESEO eae E height 360 a E KeepToge False A NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None Underlayh False Visible True Adobe FrameMaker 2 Manuals Yersion 11EndlishivBoreHole_chi 1 pur The chart should be a
10. 44 Boreholes an GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 M Soil Borinas ny WO_Stations Location description_addins a cent dl Description By Boreho es_with_plot_data Station Name GB 01 MA clay thicker than 2 m X 536212 69 ai soil_borings_with_tce_exceeding_10_mg_kg Y 4814030 00 E Station Data Elevation EA Queries TOC H E Crosstab Total Depth En Maps Station Type Depth to Bedrock Cross Sections a Reports i Borehole Logs Plots H A M Loading options Load All C Incremental x done r Existing station data from other databases or files can also be imported through the use of the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS supports importing from text files spreadsheets XLS and databases e g MS Access Database One or more stations can be selected from the Stations list and grouped into logical groupings called Station Groups This feature is explained in the following section Station Groups Most operations in HGA require the selection of one or more stations in the Station List tab An example of such an operation is data entry One or more stations for which you would like to add view and or modify data need to be selected so that the Station Data tab is accessible activated The complete list of stations that comprise a project can be viewed in the Station List tab by selecting the Project item under the Station Group node in the project tree
11. Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station x m Y m GB 01 Elevation m TOC m 324 5 m i y 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 ES Design IV Live update Close Export y Print y Help 9 3 1 Adding Lithology Column To add a column to the BHLP right click on the Design node in the tree view and select the Add column menu option or click the Add button in the toolbar Designing a Borehole Log Plot 279 Borehole Log Designer Sample oj x Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 Save As Add Column Add Plot Series Delete Show Settings JV Live update Close Export y Print y Help Select Column Type Select the desired column type from the pop up menu and press OK button Choose Column Type q xj Flease Choose a Column Type lot Well Construction Interval Depth Picture A node identifying the column will be added to the tree view under the Design node For some columns such as Lithology and Well Construction the BHLP attempts to obtain data for the borehole that is currently selected in the combo box and displays a preview in the viewer An example is shown below for a new Lithology column 280 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log Designer Sample E oj xf Select Station lt m Y m
12. Define A New Lab Quality Template 169 Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than z0 E Coefficient of variation less than Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Relative percent difference less than This criteria is used to compare how close the result from a duplicate sample D is to the true original field sample O It is expressed as either a positive difference the sample result is higher than the true value or negative difference the sample result is lower than the true value When used with duplicate samples the Relative Percent Difference measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results must be to be considered acceptable It can also measure accuracy when one of your results is the true value such as the quality control lab results for a split sample or the actual concentration of a known or unknown sample Coefficient of Variation CV less than The standard deviation as a percentage of the average The CV is a unitless quantity indicating the variability around the mean in relation to the size of the mean When used with duplicate samples the CV measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results Highlighting If a record is identified as not meeting the Template criteria specified above it will be highlighted according to the settings entered in this frame By default the record s Background Color will be change
13. ES ScaleEntities E ES Depth ES DepthEntities E ES Interval DataTable E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField Select the data table or query and the fields for the top and bottom entity In this column the data table or query is any data source that contains from to interval data and the top and bottom entities are mapped to these from and to fields As in the Depth column once the intervals have been established the value field has to be defined To do so right click anywhere in the Settings frame and select Add Entity Lap I Op Hewa Description DataField from E BottomE nity a Caption Bottom el E Description Delete Entity D ataField to Select Text Entity or Image Entity from the combo box depending on the type of data you wish to display 260 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter A new entity will be added to the Settings frame Using the combo box provided select the field that contains the value or image you wish to display DataT able Moisture Content E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField From E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField extE ntity Caption Description DataF eld Settings The Depth Interval based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking
14. e Spreadsheets e g Excel e Delimited Text files e g Comma separated text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database 2 Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in an MS Access database 3 Export one or more HGA tables to an external database MS Access SQL Server This chapter describes in detail the Data Transfer System DTS provided with HGA Note Depending on the performance capabilities of your computer importing large quantities of data points can take a very long time and may cause HGA to become unresponsive As such SWS does not recommend importing more than 20 000 data points at one time Starting the DTS The DTS can be used for both importing and exporting data In HGA the DTS may be 109 launched as follows Project Import Data from the main menu or click on the Data Import button Hon the main toolbar Project Export Data from the main menu or click on the Data Export button 1 on the main toolbar The DTS Export Process 1s explained in Exporting Data using the DTS on page 125 The first window in the DTS Import Process is shown in the figure below Data Transfer System Import 0 l eS oj x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v Xx Description J Save changes to this DTS package Select da
15. Copy Copies the selected object only available 1f an object polygon rectangle circle line or text 1s selected Paste Pastes the clipboard item onto the current layer Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all objects from the current map layer Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex e Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make 1t editable e Select an object on this layer e Click on the i Add Vertex button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex e Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable e Select an object on this layer all 1ts vertices will be highlighted Description of Menu Items 335 e Click on the 4 Delete vertex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be removed the mouse cursor will change to an X e Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object This menu item is only available when an
16. List Editor The List Editor can also be launched from the Template Manager The Template Manager allows you to link a selected field to a list of distinct values that may be used as values for the field To link a list to a selected field e Select Settings Template Manager or click the Ex button from the toolbar The Template Manager window will load e From the tree view on the left side select the appropriate Data Category and select the appropriate table and the desired field e Locate the View Settings options in the lower half of the window as indicated in the figure below Template Editor Demo_VGW xX Ta A 7 Use as project default Field Settings Description E M Descri pion Database Settings E Location V name Field name Mx driling_method M Donot allow duplicate values Z an Data ype Unit M TOC STRING a Unit category V depth V region H description_addins Yiew Settings E M Geologic Descript PAAPA H V Lithology H Hydrogeology driling_method I Read only K M Modeling Default value Unit H V features EM Well Construct E J4 Drilling Protocol Format Depth rules IV from V to IV diameter ME drilling method Y inclination V azimute H V Casing H V Screen H Annular Fill H Monitoring Point H V Soil Testing H Soil Sampling H V Monitoring Event E 4 Mining Explorat 4 Geophysics IV Well History D User Category
17. Setting Background color EIT itle Test color Text size Line color Text color E E E Hi Text color E LA E e Live Update Apply NOTE For printing it may be helpful to change the background color to white and the axis color to black Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Legends e Text color sets the color of the Legend text Resetting Options The currently viewed scene position can be reset to the Default Setting by selecting Edit Reset scene position from the top menu bar or by clicking on the NE Reset Scene Configuration button in the toolbar NOTE The Reset options remove all display objects except the axes the axes labels and the project title 12 3 2 Project Display Settings The HG Analyst Project element consists of general project settings as shown in the figure below By default the project Title is the same as the project name and it appears at the top of the Display Window This can be moved to any location within the Display Window by clicking on the Title and dragging it to a new location Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Vertical Exaggeration sets vertical exaggeration factor for the project Extend model to plume region When you load plume Setting Background color Vertical Exaggeration Factor Interpretation type ElStati
18. dgn Each format is explained below Raster Image A critical element of any Map Project is registering the image map with the correct real world coordinates This procedure is called Georeferencing Since raster images do not contain information on the site s projection system or length units these details must be manually added using Georeferencing Georeferencing assigns points with known coordinates to the image the image is then scaled and the map extents are calculated NOTE The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid georeferencing points Georeferencing Raster Images If a Raster image is selected from the Layer Import menu a message will appear stating that the image must be georeferenced Click Yes to continue and you will be prompted to save the georeferenced image as a new file Save in 3 Map Data FA wapne new bmp Selection Station _ Wayne y temp Bmp y test3 bmp Y Test Site Map bmp Save as type EMP Cancel Enter a name for the new image The file will be converted and saved as a bitmap BMP This new name will be used as the map layer name in the Map Manager Click Save to continue and the Georeference window will appear as shown in the following figure Description of Menu Items 307 5 x File View Edit Options 2 00 OBR S 0 Georeference Point 2points 3 points Ss SE Ti
19. B Required Mappings 1 You must map a field in the source with the Station name field in the Station table 2 You could not mapp screen_id Save mapping to database E lt Back Hest gt Cancel ES Help The next step in the MON data import operation 1s to map the MON file fields source with the appropriate database fields destination To map a source field with a destination field Select a source field from the MON file in the Select Section Field frame Select the matching HGA destination field from the Select Table Field frame Click the Map button Rules for Mapping e The Station Name field of the Location table must be mapped e All destination tables and fields must already exist in the HGA database e All channel tables e g Level Temperature Conductivity Oxygen in the database must include a Screen ID e All mapped tables in the database must have primary key s mapped e Data type of mapped fields must be compatible The mapped fields will now display in the table at the bottom of the Make Mapping dialog Repeat this process for additional fields 44 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst To remove mapping Select the appropriate row in the preview grid Click the Delete button X Select the Save mapping to database checkbox to retain the mapping for future MON file import operations Click Next gt to proceed to Step 3 Importing Data into the Database
20. Cancel Databases you may assign rights for Manage which allows deleting databases and projects Project you may assign rights for Creating Projects User Access Level you may assign rights for Managing user access levels Users with this privilege will be able to modify the Project Level objects when a project is opened Project Level Objects Settings for Project Level objects can only be defined when the project is opened The Group Properties for Project Level Objects are shown below 88 Chapter 3 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges ouens Jere vie ete Rese aon fe E 30 View D Backup Database F Borehole Logs Charts Cross Sechons Crozstab Data Export Data Import List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificat Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte np 0 Ap 00 O nn HA O Restore Database Template Manager ar i The administrator may control user access to the following application level objects User Access Level Management 89 Backup Database Allow Yes or No Restore Database User Access Level settings Manually Add Remove data DTS Import Data Import Station Data LAS Import Diver Data MON DTS Export data Template Manager Database views Templates e g Environmental template Pumping Test Analysis User Preferences Map Manager Water Quality Analysi
21. Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 The remaining options are similar to those for Graduated Renderers Add Value Delete Value Ascend Descent Change Color see Graduated Renderer on page 317 for more details When you are finished click OK to return to the Contours screen Create Gridded Data This feature allows you to interpolate data for the current layer and create a grid file GRD for use in HGA 3D Explorer or other applications For example if you have a station layer selected you can create a grid file based on station elevations or TOC top of casing elevations Select this menu item and the following dialog will appear 326 Chapter 8 Map Manager Create Gridded Data E x Name ElevationGrid Calculating Fiel Choose Field Elevation Min 111 Max 111 Interpolato Chooze Interpolator Natural Neighbours ka Advanced Settings Create Cancel H Help m Enter a name for the grid file and select a field containing the source d
22. Fx24QE J gt Last Change 06 22 2004 9 56 50 4M mas B Help e Select a General List from the Get Values from List combo box e If the field should be fixed to contain only values from the list enable the option Allow Values only from List by placing a check mark in the check box e If the list items should be read only in the field then place a check mark in the box beside Read Only e If necessary press the Edit List button to load the List Editor to edit the list 73 e Press the 4 Save button to save the changes to the template and close The list items should now show up for the selected field column in HGA Fields that contain a linked list will contain an arrow with a combo box on the right side of the field Simply click on this arrow to see the list items available for the field NOTE If you want to re use these lists in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the lists will be included For details on saving database templates see Chapter 13 Exporting the current template as a Database template 2 5 Material Specifications Editor 74 The Material Specifications Editor provides options for editing material specifications specifically creating editing soil classifications for your project This Editor displays a list of standard soil specifications shipped with HGA and allows the display o
23. GRD files to be used as surfaces in the 3D project Common surfaces may be a contour map of ground surface elevations or a water table contour map Once a surface is loaded there is an option to drape a site map to the surface for a truly 3D perspective 408 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer E E YBH Project The Surfaces category contains a list of the surfaces i i used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings ia VEXEDA for each individual surface Sie Cross Sections Data To load a surface into the project select File Import H AA Surface from the main menu The following settings a are available for surfaces ee OO e Name sets the surface name e Visible shows hides the surface i ee u u e Color selects a color for the surface a e View selects a style for the surface choose 2 a sold A from wire or solid Color from palette rg e Semitransparent sets the surface image as semi transparent e Color from palette assigns colors from a palette based on the surface value e g elevation gw elevation etc Isolines For surfaces you may also display isolines These settings are displayed below Surfaces Cross Sections Data _Name SS VIBE Iv Max value 340 9045 Min value 321 0938 ElLine properties Color from palette Iv Color Width 11 _ Style Solid v El uto intervals A S AMES y
24. Help A table can be created based on any one of the provided data table types depending on the nature of the data to be stored in the table Working With the Template Manager 437 Template Editor Demo a E 10 x environmental _june30c y T y m I Use as project default M Database structure Table Settings Descriptions MV Description aeae D 4 Geologic Description AS IM Table name jitholoy Table type IV from Global F to Example Global Time Depth Interval from_ to_ Param 3 Param 4 Param 5 Pararr Y Description Examination Event Y soil_type 2 0 0 JV Pattern 0 70 35 210 Monitoring Point IV Consistency Depth Point l IV Structure l description Monitoring Point M ASTM Descriptor Examination Event 4 Color z Y Odor CT able relationships IV formation_name Table is parent to 4 formation_unit Primary key Table Foreign key V moisture from_ 5 Y comment to_ V Hydrogeology 4 Modelling IV features Well Construction Primary key Soil Testing Soil Sampling IV Monitoring Event IV Mining Exploration V Geophysics M Well History View settings MT User Category sl N lithology tX AVES ame gy Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM fe Help Table is child to KIKI KI H E Fe
25. Help e Specify Intervals you may select to define the Contour Interval e g 0 5 1 0 5 etc or the Number of Intervals 5 10 20 50 etc You may also define Custom Contour Lines in the grid in the lower corner Use the and X buttons to add remove contours respectively e Under Contour Line Settings specify the line color thickness style and label settings Label Renderer will add a label to the lines Color Shading Zebra Map Settings Click on the Settings button beside Color Shading or Zebra and the following dialog will appear Color Settings x Color Palette A x FOE Transparency o E OK Cancel Help The Color Settings Renderer allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of values e The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Description of Menu Items 325 e The Ramp option loads the following dialog Ramp Color Ramp z kd Start Color End Color a Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box
26. No portion of the contents of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the express written permission of Schlumberger Water Services Printed in Canada 2010 Table of Contents 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst csscccccsssccccsssccccssscoeeees L Sample APPO o What s New in Hydro GeoAnNalysSt cccsssssscccscsssssscccccsssssscccccsssssssccccssscsssccsessscssscoes 2 New Features an 2010 La aa 2 ADOUU HY GTO GOOATAILYSE sunie a E 2 DAT a CUTS TIO O 3 DEED sal gq O E 3 Importing and Exporting Dita a ia 3 Data Manageme nte id o iio 3 Template Mina oer aio nates caus ooete oad uonecwae uae uateanennstaleeanusudddssteasantaaanehentes uaimoled medio 4 Customizable Lists and Standards oooonnnnnnnncnncccnononononnonononnnnnnnnnnononononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 4 Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder oooooocnonoconocoooaaonananonanonano non nn nncnnncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnos 4 Data VISTAZO os 4 Map MAA e oa 5 CLOS S CCION E OOE A a 5 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer ccccccccccscctsccccsuedsececesncdassteossscosstandencegeienceulssaiversbonats 6 Reportine and Ernst N T E E T eens 6 Report DOSI SAGE ariadna ld 6 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other SWS Software ooocccncncocccnnnnnoccnnnnnononnnnonoconnncnanononos 7 Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst sissicsscccctccassscicessconcstanesssonssccncsennsoovedesuecageenneusetadness
27. Querying Cross Section Interpretations 389 The Interpretation Results table is read only and stores data from the cross section interpretations By default the following fields are included e Station ID e Station Name e X using project coordinates e Y using project coordinates e Slice Name e Layer Description e Top Elevation e Thickness Below Slice e Interpretation type Simply select the desired fields from the tree view and move these into the Display Fields or Conditions as required When you are finished Generate and Execute the query An example of the results is shown in the screenshot below all xi y Wira Phire AT Deion SOL E ars a on AS or rar AS r Pheprelitor Aena leper AS Lier Hine pr ji Aaa Pop sensan rimpen Poegi dra AG Thakre irbrpestaton Pienti nio de pe aa Cies i_pecbor phar r FADH Snaten FAGHT ADH Sonate DH Sato iD Er GO LEFT AOR riigita ii 0H Ear P speetabon_ resulta Enator HEF bcn Is Decowpion Decks D pier il Corminac Lal leirg Sal spin Moraboerig vent la F ra tn Theresia Lara ice 28 CEB UE A AS ae ON Hada lieophpuez E TA AA E hotel EN Sono ea Model ta alo 28 CTA a AN EA aM AA A AA Hada oa LAA AA AN Dori a 1 FERRERA Made 28 CEB UE A Heim Sond Mk TEFEFEENEITI TSS EEEFECA LAA Leos A LAA AA AN Lun A asa O PEPPPEN SIOD Lcdo 28 CIA NOM A AN Cowes Lupe AO sae ESOT CE Lede 4 CEMA NM AA AN rana 2M AA pl H Gega 5 An Di JSA REEERE UG DOTEE Geci 5
28. Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Cene Geophysics Well History Source Condition Project Design SOL View Preview SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y t0 name as name tO toc as toc FROM Station as t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE tO toc gt 320 AND PStation ID 1 10 00 Y MOM qn 80 5575956823942 80 5658716930292 80 5481372487996 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5496881 242797 80 5691857577891 80 5575320604261 80 5616076993997 80 550964509041 80 5613306964768 80 557669897809 80 5672792095427 80 554 7642005826 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4749200273619 GB01 43 4744943279344 GB02 43 4770413777749 GB03 43 4777916718678 GBO4 43 4753708962492 GBO5 43 4816548678084 GB06 43 4750729468892 GBO 43 4751443684377 GB08 43 4821142327003 GB09 43 4751191676957 GB10 43 4824596079935 GB11 43 4812779610372 GB12 43 4781366586241 GB13 43 4803200569183 GB14 43 4840015977549 GB15 43 4834671503069 GB16 43 478726238141 GB17 43 486065023726 GB18 43 4770928697195 GB19 43 4826569874823 GB20 43 4770928697195 GB21 Close EJ Help Rows 68 e Press Close to return to the main HGA window e Click Yes when a prompt to save the query appears Time
29. Te J ea e The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table You may map the entire LAS file including the Well Section or just downhole parameters 1f you do not include the well section you must have the appropriate station already created in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current project If one is found you may proceed Otherwise you must include the well section or terminate the import routine and return to HGA and create the appropriate station using the same station name as found in the LAS source If duplicate station names are found in the database there will be a prompt to select the appropriate station Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 37 38 The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames e The Source well section found on left side of the window and e The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Source frame which contains the data to be imported can be expanded on the left side of the window If the field names in the source are identical to those in the destination then the fields will be matched automatically For all others you must map the fields using the procedure below The Destination frame contains the database schema all tables and fields under their appropriate data categories From this frame select a Category then a Table from this c
30. controls the distance between the station and where the screen is placed The larger this Gap value the further away the screen will be from its respective station Intersecting Layers During a cross section interpretation knowledge of other interpretations 1s essential In this dialog you can define display options for intersecting cross sections 370 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag ScreentalLewel Intersecting Grid View intersecting While E ditin Interzecting Layer Symbo Outline Color Outline Style ___ width in Pixels 6 H e Model Layer I Geology Layer e HudroGeology Layer El Help Specify the color and line style under the Intersecting Layer Symbol frame In the View Intersecting While Editing frame specify the view options for different interpretation types By default all modules will be active The intersecting cross sections will be visible when you set one of the interpretation types to visible and editable In the example screen shot below you can see that cross sections EE and BB along with their interval locations are visible while interpreting cross section ZZ Description of Menu Items 371 372 Map Project Site map File Edit view Tools Help aa ams AXA A 98 o Pramac OCR E E E uolgas sso15 340 330 BE E amp E 320 i aM E Model
31. e Plot e Depth dependent plots data measured as depth value e g Geophysical investigation results Neutron Resistivity Gamma Chemistry results etc e Interval dependent plots data measured as from to value e g core recovery sample technique e Well construction casing screen annular filling etc e Interval based data e g well screen indicators text etc e With text entity e g comments on well drilling observations e With image entity e g photos of soil or split spoon samples Depth based data e g symbols for water level indicator etc e With text entity text label showing water level values e With image entity e Picture e g any image that should be applied to the entire BHLP column The column type may be selected from a pick list as shown below Choose Column Type xx Please Choose a Column Type One or more instances of these column types can be displayed on a borehole log plot in any sequence Each column can have its own header BHLP Columns 251 292 BHLP Default Settings There are several default view settings and properties that can be defined for the BHLP To load the BHLP Settings e Right mouse click anywhere in the BHLP Viewer window and select Properties or e Right click on Design in the Designer tree and select Show Settings The BHLP Settings window will appear similar to the following figure ES Scale m ES Scale ft E5 Plot E ES Plot Area ES res
32. srtm csi cglar org Data Shuttle radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Geotiff or Arcinfo Geographic Coverage Global 90M Datum WGS84 EGM96 Layer DEM Appendices Global Land Cover Facility http glcfapp umiacs umd edu S080 esdi index jsp Data Land Sat TM Images Format GeoTiff Geographic Coverage Global Up to 30m Datum WGS84 Layer Landover Images Land Information Ontario http lioapp rc gov on ca lids welcome asp Data NRVIS Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage Ontario Canada Datum NAD83 CNT Layer Airport Annotation Building To Scale Building As Symbol Conces sion Contour Crown Game Preserve Drainage Line Drainage Point MNR District MNR Region Municipal Park National Wildlife Area OBM DTM Park Zone Reg Pit or Quarry Provincial Park Zone Regulated Railway Seg ment Spot Height Tank Tower Transport Line Transport Point Utility Line Utility Site Water Edge Water Structure Waterboy Segment Wooded Area GeoCommunity http data geocomm com catalog Data GIS Data Depot Format e00 format coverage Geographic Coverage Each Country USA each State and County Layer DEM NWI DLG LU LC and TIGER are available for free United States Geological Survey http seamless usgs gov Data GIS Data Warehouse Format Geographic Coverage World each country USA any scale and seamless Datum NAD83 Layer US National Elevation Dataset up to 10 M National
33. 51 Hide selected COMIS an since sncataeed upon aneou munca duos E EET 51 Snow ANCONS era ana e iria 52 Collapse illa tai oc S 32 A a A E A OA 52 Reres iA asana OOO E E saahacsauniancates 32 A PP E reer aren Mere eter cere Tener err tree ert 52 GCG Cn LEO 52 PLA EE E a A 53 A A a a A EA 53 EE SANIE E FA EA A NA O E A re Ree ee E E A A E R T 53 A N A AE 53 Hide Selected ROWS unicornio ion 54 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Mi o A A A A a O N 54 A A haces 54 y A a iach hag actin ee a E O 54 DOCS TN E ash cer Scr e a O Stic une dui waits Deca eects 54 SOM DES CoM Sas o los 54 Display Ona VI A noi licitar 54 SE A COPE DEERE EE IE EE E T E aan EAA EEI ESEE AE EE SE tana gaa 55 Template Manaser aa SS E pias 55 SP E E E E T T E E E E N 55 Material SpeciicaAi oN S asa a a aad caeciaaaenhanc tone eervanuatedad 55 Manage User Access Level boieri A O nda aamaiontisie 55 Change PassWord easier is uo e cin 56 User Prote e NOES ido N A E E 56 A Un a a atu aetnineiao Mea gialntat 57 A 57 Map ANA a A E E cts 57 VIEW GLOSS CCU enii E ld 31 DIMAS loo 58 LOSA REP A tid naaitii td uas 61 HANEY CONTO lo ie ia 61 E ONY CEUCl seise Sau iassescsoatasoeeepocres AE seveson te AEE E A AE 62 BackUp Database merian E E 62 Restore Database rita isla 62 Manase DataDase Sites acia dali coll cis bea eo ini 62 Pump Teor Analys S ao RI ARONA 63 Water Quality Analysis a Aa E iia 67 A 67 COMES aida 67 IS O AN 67 Template Ma
34. 6 4 2 Apply Close The following settings are available Line Width specify the line width Line Style select the line style Labels Visible show hide the data marker labels Markers Visible show hide the data markers Color specify the color for the line As you define the series options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series will appear using the selected settings If you have selected Bar as the series type the following dialog will appear General Bar Series Settings Label 7 Visible Fort a Bar Color C m Preview 10 4 2 D Apply Close In this dialog you can modify the following settings Font Specify the label font style size and effects Visible Show Hide labels Font Color Specify the color of the label text Bar Color Specify the color of the bars 187 7 3 2 Style and Display Settings Settings such as Axis Line and Legend can be modified in the Settings tab as shown below Data Filter Title Background Color C White Legend Vertical Asis Horizontal Axis Senet Type Line The following settings are available Common Name Enter the Plot name and optionally specify a Background color Size Specify the Height and Width for the plot Location Origin Specify the X Y origin for the plot The origin 0 0 is located in the upper left corner of the pl
35. About Displays the HGA Info dialog This contains the HGA version number and information on how to contact Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 67 Hydro GeoAnalyst Components 2 3 Template Manager 2 3 1 Purpose The Template Manager provides the tools to modify the HGA database structure and define user level views 2 3 2 General Description The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and user settings The following features are available to all users Adding and deleting tables fields Altering the properties of each table and field Grouping tables under logical data categories Defining visibility of tables and or fields Defining user level table and or field names units and data formats where applicable Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HGA These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables Save user templates as a new database schema structure Export user templates to a stand alone XML file Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats All features t
36. Add EVOL eirese o a A A A N 181 Field Mapp eani a ada 182 O 186 General Seres SENOS dada 186 Steand Display Sets 3 i22sciek eee tcadeiemasent E niente oases 188 A area tiara ananesate A marinat satis anit ateee al A T 188 SCOT esi cer a RT AS A T E S E E 188 E A A O a N O RIN RnR NP En 189 Hon zoOntalACL ASAS a A A AO site 190 A A oc rer Tere were her tc etre tren ere Te 190 Data Series Snes a E 191 Addins Lines to PIOU coc ccasesiicescceesicacesaiedsssoceicacesisezessecastadceussacacoueacecasessesacvoteessceuseecass 193 Eine SCENE S bd Sted atcieetied gal be sive a te cdaun das yaigad aa tnadieadtadeaneniniecacceuins 194 SAVING ANC TX POEUN AAA E nn A E 194 Savio Porra Desi tite ei aaa ati ia ee 195 Savane PIO AS Template io 195 Deletins Blot Templates oner inne a EEO O EANO ANANN 195 Export Plot Pace to Graphics Bile srl a a TE 196 COP PIOC C IDHOA nacos lie sacii 196 Export Plot Pace to Document nai 196 A o r N 196 5 Le Report Editor sesceseteciesssacescseweadaseossetewcussusbbecsevscsessiveeeecscusees LOD A Dout he nieriact cuidados 199 Report DESIGNEE WiINdOW iia 200 Report DESI SME Toolbar oscar eacgan oat nan eptdiantenctdcctioe seaaasaadecamncidaae cassie suns scesusgouesnsoaeaeenecn ue 201 Main Toc Dar A o 201 Display Setines Tools ma tds sto Na wakes Gas Sauer Lolo E 202 Formats TOOLS esmeril 203 General DO is N 204 IS O O va uaa dha ET 206 Toolbox options tor General Tools adi 207 A A LP O nen sree eerie mnie
37. Displays hides the control that displays a list of fields available for the report Chapter 8 The Report Editor Properties Displays hides the properties control for the report e Toolbox Displays hides the toolbar hosting the toolbox icons E Grid Displays hides grid lines on the Designer 5 Script Editor Launches the VBScript editor that may be used to enhance report automation Formatting Tools Normal Text Style Selects a format style Arial Font Selects a font for the selected object Font Size Sets the font size for the selected object E Bold Sets the bold status of the selected text I ltalics Sets the italics status of the selected text Underline Sets the underline status for the selected text A Detailed Font Launches a dialog that allows setting font details Left Align Aligns selected text on the left margin Center Align Centers selected text Right Align Aligns selected text on the right margin Report Designer Window 203 204 a il Bulleted List Formats the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list ity tf Outdent Outdents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list IF tf Indent Indents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list aa Background color Sets the background color of the selected control ES Text Color Sets the forecolor of the selected text i Line Color Sets the line color of the selected co
38. ES Well Construction BHLP Settings l x Default for All Columns Column Properties Header Properties Height Auto 41 Alignment Center y Angle Q Color El Font al Width 75 Color EN gt Depth J Auto Fired Depth Ie General Fit width to page J Print scale factor 1 o 0 fit to report template Apply OK Cancel The Header Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance of the column header for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified Height Set the default height of the header space Select the Auto checkbox to ensure that the header text remains visible within the header space Alignment Set the default header alignment to Center Near left or Far right Angle Specify the default text angle You may choose from 0 45 and 90 Color Specify the default text color Font Specify the default font style The Column Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance for all BHLP columns Here you can modify the following settings Column Width e Column Color The Depth frame allows you to set a fixed column depth If you select the Auto checkbox the depth will automatically be adjusted to the depth of the deepest BHLP column The General frame allows you to adjust the default general display settings for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modifie
39. However for some of the tasks commonly performed in HGA retrieving the complete list of stations in the project may not be necessary Moreover retrieving all the stations Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst when only few of them are needed may be a time consuming process especially for large databases containing hundreds or thousands of stations The solution 1s to create Station Groups Grouping stations into their logical groups allows efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database For instance all stations which contain groundwater chemistry sampling data can be grouped together under a group named as GW Sample Locations Whenever these stations need to be updated with a new groundwater sampling round selecting the GW Sample Locations group displays only those stations that belong to this group Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e Locations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc or e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring There are two ways of creating Station Groups in HGA e Directly Select two or more stations directly in the Station List tab right mouse Click and select the Add to Station Group option from the pop up menu e Indirectly Using the query builder define a more advanced search criteria and build a station group with those stations that sat
40. Note To export a BHLP report to a file please see below 288 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter 9 5 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 9 5 1 Generating a borehole log report A BHLP report may be generated from within the BHLP designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Borehole Log Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of thee window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screenshot Print current borehole Print all boreholes NOTE If you select Print all boreholes a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a BHLP for just the selected station use the Print current borehole option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template yourself Select Template X Hame bhip_ landscape bhip_ portrait OF Cancel H Help An example report loaded with the bhlp portrait template is shown in the following figure Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting 289 290 ES EBREN aoa J MA A PO o O Contents x 1 1 er fsa Toe eo eee FA T ay a Company Mame Borehole Log Report 1 Address Brqqeel Waterloo rrestuaton es Contact Imbo Localia Wittrlog
41. Object Linking and Embedding object such as a picture to the report Bar Code Insert a bar code into the report ADO Control Click on it to add a ADO ActiveX Data Object datasource control on the report Chart Object Drag it to the designer to add a chart to the report Charts Manager Set the properties of the selected chart Well Profile Add a borehole log plot to the report Report Designer Window 205 i ActiveX Controls Add any ActiveX control that is registered on the current computer to your report For more information on the available options see Toolbox options for General Tools on page 207 Alignment Tools Li Bring To Front Move the selected item to the front of the overlay view a Send to Back Move the selected item to the back of the overlay E Align Left Aligns selected controls to the same left coordinate of the last selected control Center Align Aligns selected controls to the same center coordinate of the last selected control Right Align Aligns selected controls to the same right coordinate of the last selected control igt Align Top Aligns selected controls to the same top coordinate of the last selected control Align Middle Aligns selected controls to the same middle coordinate of the last selected control aut Align Bottom Aligns selected controls to the bottom coordinate of the last selected control Hr Align to Grid Aligns the selected controls to
42. Rows DIS Time 0 0 0 15 Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the ll Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with 143 several options will appear gt gt lt lt LIKE IS IS NOT etc For this example select gt e Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 325 e Repeat this step for additional conditions Link multiple conditions by specifying an additional Operator choose from AND OR e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to generate the SQL string If the Query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Ef Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the Query The results of this query are shown in the window below Query Builder xaue Station Group Quey Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 325m y E Description E Location Station Name x Y Elevation TOC tag total depth type description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Sail Testing Soil
43. Weather Station 25 Stations List Tab 15 String 443 SummaryDistinctField 209 SummaryFunction 209 SummaryGroup 209 SummaryRunning 209 SummaryType 209 Surface Import 302 Symbols 268 System Requirements 7 T Template Manager Copy Template 445 General 429 New Template 445 Text Entity 257 Thematic Map 320 Tic 347 Tic Numbers 369 Time Animation 398 Time Animation Options 398 Time Axis 183 Time Series Plots Field Mappings 182 Legend 188 Line Settings 194 Print 196 Series Settings 186 Settings 184 Style Settings 188 TimeStamp 443 Transparency 277 326 U Uncertainty 184 Uninstallation 9 Unit Converter 62 76 Updating Old Projects 11 USCS 104 USDA 104 Use Font 269 Use Marker 269 Use numeric format 261 User Access Level Management General 83 Group Properties 85 Privileges 87 User Properties 90 User Preferences 56 V Value Axis 183 Value Renderer 316 318 Vertex Snapping Buffer 368 Vertical Allignment 208 Vertical Exaggeration 3D Explorer 395 Vertical slices 422 Volume Estimation 412 W Water Quality Analysis 67 Well Construction Casing 265 Drilling 264 Lithology 268 Reducer 270 Scale 271 Screen 267 Water Level 268 Well Profile 51 Well Snapping Buffer 368 Width 263 Z Zebra Map 325 Index
44. appear as Display Fields in the layout table as well as define the Display settings Select the desired fields from the left panel under Layer Fields then move fields to the Display Fields under the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the Description of Menu Items 329 330 gt gt button To remove fields from the Display Fields click on the lt or lt lt buttons respectively Use the 1 button to move the selected field up Use the JL button to move the selected field down Click on the Condition tab and you will see options for defining validation rules for one of the selected fields along with display settings for the table Data Settings l x Fields Condition Choose Data Fant Header Row Color Grid Line Color NH Violation Aow Color ea Violation Fiel Field Condition Compare To ELEVATION gt Value 5o0d Field s DK Cancel Help The Header Row Color controls the color of the first row in the layout table The Violation Row Color allows you to assign a color to values in the table that exceed the violation conditions explained below This 1s useful for quickly identifying exceedences on the map The Grid Line Color controls the color of the gridlines in the table Under the Violation Field frame you may specify a condition for one of the display fields Select a Field from the combo box then a Condition lt gt etc and define
45. button beside the AVI File name field The Frame size setting has a selection of four options Full window size 640x480 e 320x240 e Custom If the Custom option is chosen the Custom frame size fields Width and Height will be activated and a frame size can be defined The Compression setting lists the various video compression techniques available A higher compression setting will reduce the AVI file size but it will also reduce the quality of the image The Frames per second setting defines the number of frames time steps that will be displayed each second in the AVI file This setting has no effect on the recording speed After specifying the settings click OK and the recording will begin To stop the recording click the Stop button NOTE Recording AVI files will require significant system resources both RAM and Hard disk space It is recommended to close all non essential programs while recording the AVI file and ensure the destination folder has adequate free space Working with 3D Explorer 401 12 2 4 OpenGL Settings By default the 3D Explorer will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with graphics acceleration hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers display performance inadequate then 3D loj x OpenGL drivers Use hardware accelerator Explorer provides the option to use the Mos Microsoft Driver for Open GL The OpenGL settings
46. current model layer line Linked vertices will move together and can be separated if needed The following figure depicts an example of a model layer pinching out around the middle of the cross section Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor i EEEE i i kk map Project demo project map A Ss File Edit View Tools A 2 a rrvtas 108 Topography ooon Overburden quife Aquitard Main Aquifer 330 Geology Clay Sand Gravel Bedrock 320 310 HydroGeology adsfsadf Snapping between two vertices 300 Elevation m Snapping to end of cross section 290 Mike test33 260 270 280 250 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 Distance m 1373 17 328 91 Snapping to the end of the cross section line If the model layer pinches out from any given point on the cross section to the end of the cross section line the cross section editor can draw the model line from that given point on for you To do this double click on the first vertex The model line will automatically be created for you See the bottom most layer in the figure above In this example the model layer pinches out at the right side of the cross section Editing Model Layers Once the model interpretation layer lines are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more
47. e Style Sheet Specify the style settings for the crosstab report Each tab is described in detail below 152 Chapter 5 Queries Layout The layout tab consists of a Source field list which contains all the fields from your data query There are also four DataCube fields Inactive Fields X dimension Fields rows Y dimension fields columns and Facts fields X Dimension Fields are the fields selected from a data source or created by a user for column dimension formation Y Dimension Fields are the fields selected from the source field list or created by the user for row dimension formation Facts fields are those fields that will be used to produce the values in the pivot table cells Fact fields can be selected from the source field list or created by the user Note Only numeric fields can be displayed in the facts fields of the cross tab query Inactive fields will appear as headers in your crosstab report but will not affect pivot table formation Use these headers to apply filters to your crosstab data You can organize the crosstab report by dragging fields from the Source field list and dropping them into the DataCube fields where they will appear in the view at runtime Multiple source fields can be added to any frame You can modify each field list using the following buttons Move a field up one position in the list Move a field down one position in the list Add a field to the list Delete a field from the list X
48. edit users in existing user groups e Assign access rights to User Groups for each object Data Management Maps Cross Sections etc e Set user ID names description and access passwords for users e Enforce access levels for each user group as per the specified security document e Store Users and User Groups in database templates for re use in future projects HGA has two levels of user access management e Application Level used to control high level features such as creating new projects and managing databases and e Project level used to control access to individual modules within a project e g User Access Level Management 83 Data access maps queries BHLP etc NOTE HGA enforces user access to HGA projects only The SQL Server database that stores the data can be accessed by any user using Enterprise Manager provided they have the permissions SQL Server Enterprise Manager provides similar tools that allows for user access management and should be utilized as needed 3 1 2 Security Document The user access management settings are stored in a Security Document This 1s a document that contains user groups users system security policies access rights to application and project level objects This document is created using the User Access Level Management component and is managed by HGA In HGA there are two types of security documents e Application Level Security Document ALSD used to control access
49. expandable collapsible tree Closed book icons represent Table of Contents headings that have sub headings Index The Index tab displays the list of Help topics You can scroll to find the index entry you want or you can type in the first few letters of the keyword in the text box and the index will scroll automatically as you type Double click an index entry to display the corresponding Help topic Alternately you may select an index entry and then click the Display button to open the Help topic Search The Search tab is used to search the On Line Help documents for a word or phrase of interest Simply type the search word s or phrase s then press lt Enter gt or click the Display button Favorites You can add frequently accessed Help topics to a personal list of favorites which is displayed in the Favorites tab Once you have added a topic to your list of favorites you can access the topic by double clicking 1t Click Add to add the currently displayed topic to your favorites list Select a favorite and then click Remove to delete a topic from your favorites list 1 6 About the Interface When HGA is first loaded a blank window will appear indicating no project is loaded To create a new project select Project gt New to open an existing project select Project gt Open Once a project is loaded the main window will appear the HGA demo project is displayed below with the well profile view activated About the Inter
50. ie i ae Description Tex DataField Reducer BHLP Settings i x E ES BHLP Well Constructio e Visible Column Options Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearanc f Use Casings Color Angle 45 5 89 Use Default Color E Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Reducer tab the appearance frame allows you to modify the display settings for pipe fittings that connect casings of different diameters shown below Select Use Casing Color to use the predefined casing color or select Use Default Color and specify a different color Use the Angle vertical scroll bars to change the reducer angle Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter NOTE The reducer angle must be within the range of 5 89 The reducer is not drawn to scale and is intended for visualization purposes only Scale BHLP Settings xj Well Constructia e visible Column Options Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearanc Display Unit rn Major ticks interval 10 Label Position Left r Color Font Minor tick interval 5 E Background El Color J Help Apply OF Cancel The Scale tab allows you to modify the scale within the Well Construction column The settings for this scale are identical to those described in Vertical Scale Column on page 254 9 2 6 Depth Dependent Plots The Plot column is designed to display various typ
51. is typically the first field in the destination table The primary key is the Station ID ID Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS Some of the additional features and options available in the Data Mapping window are explained below Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System Unit Conversion The DTS allows conversion of data from source units to the unit specified for each corresponding destination field If a destination field with a matching source field has a unit the DTS requires that a unit be selected for the source field before proceeding with the data import operation unit can be selected from the list of units available for the specific unit category Importing Criteria The DTS allows specifying a simple criteria condition for each field that 1s selected to be imported The criteria will be used to filter the source data For example you can import data only for a specified station 1 e Elevation gt 300 or Name OW 1 and so forth If a criterion 1s specified based on a field with numeric data types 1t should be compared against values that have been converted to the destination field s unit This version of the DTS supports only one condition per field The condition should be provided through an operator lt gt or lt gt followed by the value for the condition For instance in the above example if importing data only for the station OW 1 is desired the condition should simply be s
52. or move fields from rows into columns or from columns into rows Right click on a field header to access additional options These options are contextual and affect only the field that was selected e Accent Sort results in ascending order e Decent Sort results in descending order e Collapse All Collapse the view e Expand All Expand the view Align Field Width Automatically align a field width to the widest display value within the field e Move to facts Move a field into facts e Move to rows Move a field into the rows dimension e Move to columns Move a field into columns dimension e Move to ignore Ungroup a field from pivot table calculation e Group settings Open the Groups Editor widow see below Chapter 5 Queries Groups Editor The Groups Editor window shown below allows you to combine multiple field items and display them as a single field item in the cross tab report For example if your crosstab report contains a countries field you may wish to group its field items by continent e g North America Europe South America etc E Groups editor l x Group settings lema El Europe France gt Germany United Kingdom E North America Camada south merica United States i Brazil Add Edit Delete Clear To create a group e Click the Add button to insert a new group item The group item will appear as a tree node under the Groups frame Here you can specify a group
53. the Compare To settings There are two options available e Compare to a Value simply type the value in the provided text box OR e Compare to a Field select another field from the data query to compare against The possibilities are limitless but here are some examples e concentration gt 5000 ug l a government guideline or MCL as shown in the screenshot above e depth to bedrock gt 40 feet e overburden thickness lt 50 feet e concentration of a chemical exceeds the criteria limit where the criteria limit is available in another field in the selected data query Chapter 8 Map Manager In the Choose Data tab you can specify which stations should display the data table This is useful if you have a station group with numerous stations and are interested in displaying the data summary table only for a few stations Data Settings xX Display Fields Condition Choose Data Select one or more stations for which data will be displayed e e e e e e Get Selection from Map Cancel H Help Simply place a check box beside the stations that should display the data summary table If you click on the Get Selection Map button then the Map Manager will get only those stations that are selected on the map layer on the map project and use only those for the Display Data This button is enabled only if you have at least one station selected in the map layer Once you are finished click OK to
54. 0 0 0 70 The new data query will now appear as a new node under the Queries node in the Project Browser If additional Conditions are required for a more advanced query follow the steps below e Create a new Query e Under Conditions press the op Add button Using the same procedure described above select a field from the tree and drag and drop this into the new Expression field e Select an Operator and Expression value for the Condition e Repeat this step until all Conditions have been specified e The Conditions must now be linked with an additional operator On the right side of the window the Operator column can be expanded and one of the following options may be selected AND OR e If itis necessary to enclose one or more conditions double click in the outer fields surrounding the query condition and parentheses will be added to the query condition An example is shown below Chapter 5 Queries 7 Query Builder E 4 10l x XaHAA a Design i i Station Group Quen Data Query jon SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Bedrock30 y Function Expression Alias station id id Description coat S Geologic Description A e a in lithology soil_type soil_type X rom to soil_type picid oP si J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Consistency Structure ASTM Descriptor Color Conditions Expression lithology from
55. 165 Blanks Settings 171 Export 175 Results 173 Spiked Settings 170 Lab Quality Control 165 Lab Quality Template 168 Mapping Fields 173 Label Direction 275 Label Properties 363 Label Renderer 316 319 Layer Manager 293 Linked Fields 434 444 List Editor 68 Add Manually 70 Import 71 LithologyEntities 262 Live Update 249 Load HGA Data 305 Loading Options 16 Long 443 M Main Toolbar 17 Manage Databases 62 Map Color Settings Transparency 304 Zebra 304 Map Layers Create 302 Export 299 Intersection 314 Properties 314 Statistics 315 Map Manager Index General 291 Interface 292 Toolbar 295 Map Project Properties 300 Map Renderer 316 Mark Text 347 Marker Width 369 Material Specfications Editor 74 Material Specification Editor 104 MaxLength 210 Microsoft Access 233 MicroStation files 311 Min Tic Pixels 369 Minimal Percent Recovery 171 Mirror Margins 220 Miscellaneous Settings 48 Model Layers Export 358 MON Data 41 Import 41 Multiplier 185 N Ncols 305 ND _Factor 183 NRows 305 O On Line Help 12 Open from Backup 34 OpenGL 402 Orientation 221 P Paddings 347 Page Setup 220 PageFooter 212 PageHeader 212 Palette 300 360 Paper Size 221 PaperBin 221 Parameter Query Reports 226 Parent ID 433 ParentID 266 267 Pattern Symbol 261 Plot Designer Delete Plots 195 Interface 178 Save as template 195 Toolbar 179 Zoom 180 Plot Grouping 183 Plume Browser 399 Plume Browser Options 400 Plume
56. 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password l Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use OO O O O O OOOO O O Tcen Test Connection OF Cancel Help e Next you must select the initial catalog to use from the bottom of the Connection tab as shown in the figure below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 457 E Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name E E Betesh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Pragram FilesHHydroGeoBasetSam Build 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password IT Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use D Program Files HydroG eoB ase 4nnular fill nevy final D Program Files HydroG eoB ase Annular fill new niulti D Program Files HydroG eoB ase 4nnular fill nevy riult cr D Program Files HydroGeoB ase drilling type D Program Files HydroGeoB ase open list D Program Files HudroGeoB ase ample_Stations E Help Cancel e Select the Excel file once more e Click OK to complete the procedure e The file will then be loaded into the appropriate module in Hydro GeoAnalyst 458 Appendices 14 4 Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 14 4 1 In
57. 30 Plots E 535677 10 4814416 20 330 50 535584 50 4814300 00 329 90 535599 70 4914371 80 330 20 535492 90 4814477 20 331 10 535635 20 4814503 80 330 90 535588 40 4914667 30 331 10 Loading options Load All Incremental fi 000 al X Station Groups Total 23 selected 0 r If desired selected stations can be removed from a Station group or the Station group can be deleted as a whole Once the stations in a group are displayed a number of operations can be applied based on the selection For example loading a station group and then selecting the Display on Map option from the Record menu activates the Map Manager component and automatically creates a GIS layer containing all stations from this group Data Categories The tables in a HGA database can be organized into a logical grouping by linking them to any one of the provided data categories HGA provides nine data categories eight of which reflect the most common data categories found for environmental data A ninth category User Defined Category can be renamed as appropriate and used accordingly The Station Data categories can be accessed from two locations e From the Project Browser expand the Station Data node OR e From the main window select the Station Data tab and expand the Data Category combo box ensure that one or more stations are selected in the Station List tab Each of these o
58. 310 Topography a y o wv Geology Seosees OM C HydroGeology 300 290 _ E 2 T gt D iw 230 240 250 260 270 280 220 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Distance m 535 872 4 814 505 29 91 226 30 0 50 100 535 137 4 814 510 Grid Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Grid Line Color Line Style _ Width in Pixels i E e Visible for Vertical Lines e Visible for Horizontal Lines Show on Load In the Grid Lines frame set the line style color and width and also set visibility settings for the horizontal and vertical grid lines The Show on Load option will result in the grid being displayed each time the cross section is loaded Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Interpretation Define the data storage options for cross section interpretations Options ee xl Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag ScreentwLevel Intersecting Grid Interpretation W Store Soft Data Points e Save All Contacts EJ Help The cross section editor now saves the cross section interpretations to the project database The interpretations are also linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section and these stations along with their interval data are also saved to the database The interpretations and the wells and corresponding interval data can be retrieved later using the
59. 461465509 Gee O6V21 2000 BTEX 14 ugi rap aes SISSA 14 AREER COAG EANN BTEX 19 gil eter i la SRY 485558 Gear DEZA 200L ETEX Z2 uy A PANG A 51 535702019 401452055 G 10022000 BTEX db ugi lena ener chal _ dala RRP RTS Ge 1202001 ETE Fill ugi Pacs aserrada 1000 ugl 51535782919 49145099 GB 05752001 ETEX E bros exceeds S000 ug perl 51 55702019 4014520 G2 0542142000 BTEX Guat we enoeeds 1 ma per kg 51 55782819 481452899 GB 28 06252000 ETE 43 ul hand chaarvai 51 55702019 4014520 Go 06202000 BTEX 45 ug Neue ee REE 48a AGRA TANAAN ETE 20000 191 pot ee as SORE 4874501 79 68 29 WAAL TCE 2000 ag atid E 5255926 414501 7 Gi 121042000 BTEX 30000 uyi wa dala PRSE ASA TARBJA 1AN TCE 2200 114 E 7 Cresstab SOE 4814501 73 68 23 OSIA TEX SOUU ag H Maps 5253059263 4014501 79 60 24 05 15 200 TCE 143505059 yA BD Greet Sodas RRSP SA PAGS DALAN ETEX 12000 1194 a Reports SPOS 4874501 9 Geaa 05212000 TCE BUU ug mn ayie 5257559263 4014501 79 60 29 0625 2000 BTEX 10000 ug A de 0 ioari RSS ASA PGR ESOO TE 1200 14 Y iy e SEES 4314501 GE ZA ETEN 25000 E fe Pints 52555926 414501 7 60 24 064242000 TCE TENGS ugi RSM A A AAN ETEA 38000 114 SSO ASS Gea WAAL TUE ZUTS ug a E 53 535504 700 4014554 19 G0 30 1210 2000 BTEX 40000 yA Loading apli RISA PE GR 1241002000 TCE 2200 ugi SSM 730 4874554 33 68 30 05152001 ETEX BUUU ugi E Lor l 53 535504 700 4014554 Go 0541542000 TCE 400 ug RSM PE GS DALAN TEX 14000 ug i Incremental SSM ASS Gea 05212000 TCE 31238881 yt 53 535
60. 7 Help Apply OF Cancel The Using subtab allows you to specify the display settings for numeric description data If you choose to include numeric data in your water level description select the Using as Numeric Data checkbox and specify the display format of the data using the Format dropdown list box You may choose from the following formats e General use this format to display numeric data as whole numbers e g 1 e Fixed use this format to display numeric data with a specified number of decimal places e g 1 000 e Scientific use this format to display numeric data in standard scientific notation e g 1 000E 0 For both the fixed and scientific formats you can specify the number of decimal places by using the Decimal places vertical scroll box BHLP Columns 259 9 2 3 Depth Interval based Column The Depth Interval based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various intervals As in the case of the Depth Point based column the data can be displayed using graphics text or both Examples of data that could be displayed using a Depth Interval based column include screen locations interval based samples and their descriptions etc To create a Depth Interval based column click on the Add button to add a new column and select Interval from the combo box that appears A new Interval column will be added to the designer window Expand the Interval node and select IntervalEntities
61. Acrobat 3 JPG Quality 75 ka Mo Embedding Fonts Select the desired export format provide a file name and path specify settings relevant to the format as desired and click on the OK button Reports that are saved or exported from the report viewer are not directly managed by HGA and as such will not be listed in the project browser 8 3 Creating and Managing Report Templates The Report Editor contains pre defined templates which allow users to quickly and easily create professional reports Report templates can be edited saved and managed in the Report Editor and new templates may be created and saved for future use This feature allows users to have different report layout options for headers and footers and to share them between two or more reports This allows users to have as many report designs as desired For example one or more report templates can be prepared for each client with the specific header and footer Another advantage of having a report template is that if the header information using a certain template changes the change will automatically be applied to all reports that use the template without the need to reopen the report For example if the client company s telephone number changes the user needs to change only the template instead of changing each report Each time a new report 1s created previewed or printed it will use the active report s Creating and Managing Report Templates 231 layout
62. Add Data Source Data Source Name result_value r result_value Date Field Date Granularity none static distribution Day Static Plume A x poetae ata sete Date Field F result_value result value none static distributior H Help OR Cancel AA In the 3D Interpolation window specify the various settings related to the grid size Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst extents and data mappings 3D Plume Project Name Define the plume project name One plume project can contain multiple plumes e g for one or more contaminants Grid Region Define the various properties relating to the grid size e X Value select a field to be used for the X axis e of nodes define the number of grid nodes in the X direction e X min X max define the minimum and maximum X values for the interpolated grid by default these will be read from the data source however you may modify these values if necessary Similar parameters exist in the Y and Z directions The Z value should be a field that represents the depth or elevation at which the data value sample was observed If you want to display the plume on the same elevation scale as your cross sections where data is displayed as above mean sea level you may need to convert your sample depths to sample elevations This can be done in the query builder by adding a calculated display field as shown below Design SOL View Preview Display Fiel
63. Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files f Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server User name Password Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection OF Cancel Help e From the top of this dialog click on the Provider tab as shown below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 451 452 Under the Specify the source of data E Data Link Properties Ed Prowider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DE Provider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Ie OLE LE iS for Intenet ES Micros OLE DE zE for OLA qna Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Excel Files F Beesh Use connection string Connection string 2 Enter information to log on to the server Uzer name Password Blank password D Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test C
64. Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box provides all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports You also can open this dialog box by double clicking a universal data link udl file in Windows Explorer The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three tabs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access NOTE HGA currently supports only a Microsoft OLE DB provider for MS SQL Server as specified in the Provider tab Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to it using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be entered In the Connection tab there will be options to specify the server and database settings 1 Select or enter a server name Choose a se
65. Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 3 6 Design Lithology Coarse Gravel Medium Sand IV Live update Apply Close Export y Print y Help Edit Column Properties Column properties Entities can be set by expanding the Design node and clicking on the sub node to be updated For example to modify a Lithology column expand the Design node and the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities from the tree as shown in the following screenshot Designing a Borehole Log Plot 281 Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station 1 m Y m E 10 x Elevation m TOC m GB 01 E3 Design 53621269 3 6 Lithology E LithologyEntities Name Value DataT able TopEntity Caption Description DataField E BottomEntity Caption Description DataField ImageEntity Caption Description DataField TextEntity Caption Description DataField IV Live update Lithology Top elevation from Bottom elevation o Image Image soll_type_image Text Text soil_type 4814030 00 323 50 Coarse Gravel Medium Sand 324 50 Close Export y Print y Help In some cases the BHLP may not be able to identify the default data source for the selected column type and as a result there may not be a preview
66. Expression Use this button to Save an expression in text file format FieldType Assign a field type to a field Choose from Fact Only Dimension only and Both SortOrder Assign a field data sorting order Choose from Ascending or Descending Crosstab Queries 155 Style Sheet The Style Sheet tab in the DataCube wizard allows you to define the appearance properties for the crosstab report Layout Style sheet Inactive fields DimensionB order EvenRowFactS Repo FactBorder fGroupl 7 Group2 om atta a BackColor Hi Maroon Content lignment MiddleCenter Arial Spt style B old ForeColor L White y Gradient None Style Preview GradientBackColor MN Black ProgressB arColor ES DarkOrange Properties BackColor Determines the cell text background color OK Cancel The Report Elements list contains all the report elements that can be customized The Properties dialog is context sensitive and allows you to change the appearance properties for the selected report element The changes made will then be shown in the Style Preview frame Click Ok to accept the style settings Auto Format The crosstab component contains a variety of color scheme templates that can be applied to your crosstab report To access the color scheme templates open the Auto Format dialog shown below by clicking on the Auto Format button located above the Layout tab Here you can select a color scheme template fro
67. Fe Border FP Sample x OF Cancel To show the intersections on the Cross Section e Click on the Cross Section tab e From the top Menu Bar click Tools and then Update Cross Section The following image shows the intersections between the cross sections f Map Project Site map A O 10 x File Edit View Tools Help Melk GNI A jx amp 3 5 Fanes ORE C Model uopas s 043 Topography BottLayer2 Geology Medium Sand Gravel Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Silt 280 HydroGeology Elevation m upper aquifer lower aquifer 600 800 300 536 211 4 813 946 0 100 200 400 500 536 195 4 814 914 Distance m NOTE In order to see intersecting cross sections in the cross section editor the corresponding Map Manager project must be open For more details on managing intersecting layers in the cross section editor please see Intersecting Layers on page 370 Chapter 8 Map Manager Graticule Provides settings for the graticule also referred to as gridlines on the map The following dialog will appear Graticule Settings JN UE Ti Appearance Foreground Color ia Line Color z Line Style E Font Sample Text e Show Thousand Separator Minor Tic Numbers b Mirian Pixels between Minor Tics 20 5 Minor Tic Width ja Major Tic Width B Intervals en jo 13 Auto f Manual Right 50 Bottom 20 e f
68. G8 6 1 01 ica 377 Creating the Cross SECO iii 377 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations sccccccccssssssssssssscccccssssssssssscccssssessssseecs 378 Loadino Uta LS cdi 378 Geolosic Layer Interpretation aia 379 Ed LATE o 381 Hydrosecoloste Layer Inierpretations ai a a tewenGie ia teiaaeads 382 Translating Geologic Interpretations into Hydrogeologic Interpretations ccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnononnns 382 Model Layer Interpretations coca octets as ats ed stalondsba ib vested A Si 383 Metin Model LaS os 383 Drawing Model Interpretation Layers cur ridad 384 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines oooooooonconnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononononnnn non nnnnnnrnnarnrnnno 386 Edite Model Layer sa ios 387 Addins Multiple CTLICES soseri Stace atiaadaee salssaeaiaancesae etn udsnsatiua ad aboadass bine Bisa iS 388 Linkima Vertices Between Model Layers pianos 388 Remove Stations front Cross SECUONS an dial 389 Querying Cross Section Interpretations sccccccccccsssssssssssccccccccssssssssccccssssssees 389 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section ssccccscscsssssssssssssccccccccsssssssssssccccsssseeess 390 A iu g ant atid na tre ean pte sah sebrcalndea harks dtla dbus Racial oa Ue ein a amuden uanilee 39 PROC MES isis 391 Add POS O enter inn 392 SA a A e a O II T 392 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 393 Aboutthe Interface coa 393 WOEKING with 3D Explorer scscccsdsss
69. Geographic Coverage Price Edward Island Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries Road Forest Hydrology Department of Natural Resources Nova Scotia http www gov ns ca natr meb DOWNLOAD UTMNADS83 htm Data Natural Resources Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Nova Scotia Datum NAD83 Layer Natural Resources New York State GIS Clearinghouse http www nysgls state ny us Data New York State GIS Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage New York State Datum NAD83 Layer Provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations census consolidated subdivi sions census subdivisions Ontario Geological Survey http www mndm gov on ca mndm mines ogs draftbedrock_e asp Data Digital version of the Paleozoic bedrock of Southern Ontario compilation map Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage Ontario Layer Geology Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 473 474 Statistics Canada http wwwl12 statcan ca english census06 geo index cfm Data Road Network file Boundary files for provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Road and Administrative Boundary Appendices 14 7 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s Schlumberger Water Services maintains an online FAQ at the following internet
70. Import from current database button at the bottom of the window The List Editor extracts all unique entries that have already been entered if any into the current database under the selected field Once this is completed a verification dialog will appear displaying the number of entries returned for this field e Click Yes to import these values to the list e Edit the list as desired by adding or removing items e Click the button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 for more details Importing Lists The list items may also be imported from an external data source To do so e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for which a list is to be imported e Click on the 4 Import from external database button at the bottom of the window The following dialog will appear List Editor 71 Import List from External DB ES Data Source Connection String fimport udi 2 a Table Field Description cYalues __ Description Total Items e Click the Data source button in the upper right corner of the dialog e The Data Link Properties dialog will appear Select the desired data source For help using the Data Link Properties please refer
71. In HGA an object is any item that requires access control An object could be a dialog a database a table in a database a file a template etc An object may be classified into a group based on common properties such as a number of access levels e g a database and a dialog may have different levels Objects that have the same list of access levels may be grouped together For instance all objects that require only two levels of control e g Full or Read only access may be grouped together In HGA objects are sorted in two groups e Application Level e Project Level Simply place a check mark in the appropriate access levels for each object or use the Select All option to enable full privileges for all objects By default the Administrator User Group will have full access to all objects and the ALSD NOTE The level of access to an object are defined on a user group level and not for each individual user User Access Level Management 87 Application Level Objects The Administrator may control user access to the following application level objects e Databases e Projects e User Access Level Application Level Objects can only be modified when HGA is running and NO project is opened The Group Properties for Application Level Objects are shown below Group Properties Marne Test Description Enter description here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 48 37 Privileges Database i a Project User Access Level OF
72. Min radius defines the search distances in user specified units in the maximum horizontal direction and the minimum horizontal direction for determining the neighborhood of points for interpolation For isotropic data the two radii are the same Enter the Vertical Radius value if 3D Kriging is to be performed If the total number of points in the data is large gt 200 computation time for Kriging may be reduced by specifying a smaller radius for the search The Anglel Angle2 and Angle3 parameters define the search ellipsoid for situations in which anisotropy is present in the data The Kriging type options are e Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean e Ordinary Kriging e Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file e Kriging with external drift The following guidelines are recommended for selecting the type of Kriging Choose Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean if the mean value is known and is constant throughout the area Select Ordinary Kriging if the mean is not constant everywhere and needs to be recalculated dependent on the location of the neighborhood Choose Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file if the mean is not constant and has to be read from an external file Select Kriging with an external drift when only the trend component needs to be estimated and not the residual component where the variable is assumed to be the sum of the trend and the residual component This
73. On H Borehole 4 Date May 6 2009 Description e If you have set a Print Scale factor please see BHLP Default Settings on page 252 for more information by default the scale will appear in the lower left corner of the BHLP report Alternately you can use the Report Designer please see Chapter 8 The Report Editor to add a label named Scale in your header footer information The default label will automatically be removed if a label named Scale is added The BHLP Report may be printed directly by clicking on the 4 Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the J Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the ela Export button 7 If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designing and modifying a report please see Chapter 8 The Report Editor Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter 10 Map Manager The GIS Map Manager is built on ESRUM Map Objects technology and is packed with an abundance of GIS mapping features that seamlessly connect your project maps with the Hydro GeoAnalyst database However the GIS Map Manager goes far beyond simple mapping it also acts as a fundamental source for producing cross sections accessing borehole logs and well construct
74. Query button saves the query Save As button saves the query under a new name Generate SQL Statement button generates the SQL statement and tests the query Execute SQL Statement button executes the selected query string 5 2 Query Types 5 2 1 Data Queries Data Queries can provide a more detailed look at the data and can be used for quantifying and qualifying any field in the database Query Types In addition many of the visualization and data analysis components require data sources as data inputs Using the Query Builder you can generate Data Queries that provide the data sources for Map Layers Cross section interpretation results Quality Control Analysis see Chapter 6 Applying a Lab Quality Template for more details BHLP columns in Borehole Log Plots Crosstab reports see Chapter 5 Crosstab Queries for more details 3D plume projects see Chapter 2 3D Interpolation for more details 131 e Charts see Chapter 7 Adding Plots for more details e Customized Reports see Chapter 8 Creating Reports based on a Data Query for more details To create a Data Query select the Data Query radio button from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Queries node For more information on how to build a Data
75. Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History H A H H MSource Condition Project baj Design SQL View Preview SELECT t0 id t0 name t0 x t0 y tO elevation t0 toc FROM Station 45 t0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID WHERE t0 toc gt 325 AND PStation ID 1 1 GB01 2 GB02 3 GBO3 4 GBO4 5 GB05 6 GB06 7 GB07 8 GBOS 9 GB09 10 GB10 11 GB11 12 GB12 13 GB13 14 GB14 15 GB15 16 GB16 17 GB17 18 GB18 19 GB19 20 GB20 21 GB21 ly 80 5575956823942 80 5658716930292 80 5481372487996 80 5689553863083 80 5596308869504 80 5537873728565 80 5496881242797 80 5691857577891 80 5575320604261 80 5616076993997 80 550964509041 80 5613306964768 80 557669897809 80 5672792095427 80 554 7642005826 80 5574207847192 80 5459026865231 80 5595532076244 80 5613609731897 80 559577967353 80 5613609731897 43 4749200273619 43 4744943279344 43 47 70413777749 43 4777916718678 43 4753708962492 43 4816548678084 43 4750729468892 43 4751 443684377 43 4821142327003 43 4751191676957 43 4824596079935 43 4812779610372 43 4781366586241 43 48032005691 83 43 4840015977549 43 4834671503069 43 4787262381 41 43 486065023726 43 4770928697195 43 4826569874823 43 4770928697195 Close Help Rows 65 Time 0 0 0 80 e Press the a Save button to save the query e Press Close to return to
76. Station EA Interpretations Label Properties options under the Project node He BB Ea cc H DD AS EEES PRATS Layer Interpretation Settings Under the Interpretations folder there will be three separate sub folders one for each of the interpretation types e Model e Geology e Hydrogeology Display Settings 421 Under each individual Interpretation Layer there 1s a list of the E soil types belonging to this layer Each soil type has its own Cross Sections Data a 3 AA settings as shown here aoe ee 3 8 Interpretations The soil Name may not be modified this name will appear in E Model Layers A 4 E a Geology Layers the Legend contents Each individual soil type may be set to Visible or hidden from view a ace a A Fine Sand E Silt a Hydrogeology Layers E Pl Name acne Layer Mame Coarse Grav 12 4 Creating Slices and Cross Sections A slice is defined as a 3D planar surface extending horizontally or vertically through the project There are three types of slice objects available e Vertical slices along the XZ or YZ plane extending through the entire depth of the domain e Horizontal slices along the XY plane of the project domain e Cross section slices along a straight line or an irregular polyline through the entire depth of the domain these are based on cross sections available in the 3D project These slice
77. The Display Settings Default Settings include e Background Color e Title Color and Size e Axis Text Color and Size and Line Color 403 404 e Legends Text Color The modified Default Settings can be saved by selecting either File Save scene configuration from the main menu bar or clicking the eS Save Scene Configuration button in the toolbar The following Save scene configuration dialog will appear A iG Configuration Mame Delete Cancel na Save scene configuration for HGA3D Ioj x Using this window the most recently viewed scene configuration can be saved by entering a name for it When you close 3D Explorer the scene configuration you have at that moment will be automatically saved as Default When HGA 3D Explorer re opens this project it is opened with the Default scene configuration Any other user defined configuration can be loaded by pressing the Load Scene Configuration button and selecting it from the presented list Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Title e Text color sets the color of the Project title text e Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size Axis e Text color sets the color of the Title text e Text size sets the size of the Axes labels as a fraction of the total screen size e Line color sets the color of the axes lines
78. Topography Layer S Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer a Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer x 7 Save Cancel E Help o o o In this dialog you can specify the total number of model layers and set properties for each layer In addition the layers can be numbered in a particular order Layers will be numbered starting with 1 for the top most layer and increase with depth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer 1 e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer Once the layers have been defined additional layers may be inserted at any location at any time Please refer to the section Model Layers section on page 374 for more details Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 383 384 Drawing Model Interpretation Layers Before starting to draw model interpretation layers please ensure that you have defined the model layer settings explained in the previous section You will see that the top of layer 1 ground surface 1s drawn in automatically for each new cross section This layer can be modified by moving it through its existing vertices adding new vertices at desired locations or deleting existing vertices To draw model layers follow the directions below Activate the Model Interpretation Layer in the Layer Manager Sel
79. Y f e Visible Rotation eal e Visible Rotation 0 nal e Visible Rotation E Bottom e Visible Ratation 0 E OK Cancel H Help Appearance In the appearance frame you can edit the line color style font Tic Allows defining the number of minor and major tics Paddings Controls the amount of buffer space between the edge of Map Manager window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y co ordinates contain many digits Intervals Controls the space between the major graticule lines You can accept the system calculated Auto values or enter Manual values Mark Text Controls the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label Description of Menu Items 347 and control the gap between the label and the axis itself Code Page Use these settings to convert accented characters into a shapefile format that can be recognized by the Map Manager The following options are available Choose Code Page x Please choose the 150 code page for the shape files Memo r Central Europe Latin 2 OF Cancel From the combo box select the Code Page that should be used for the shapefiles in your map project The Map Manager provides several ISO standards For a complete list of which standard you should select based on your language and regional settings please see Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes on page 466 NOT
80. a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager Es Show Create Cross Section button allows a cross section corresponding to a selected cross section line on the map to be created or viewed This feature is active only after a cross section line has been selected or drawn in the map window a BHLP button loads a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for the selected station 10 2 Description of Menu Items 10 2 1 Project New The New item provides options for creating a new map project file Map projects are saved with the extension VMP in the project sub directory Map The new map project will use the same projection system and extents as defined in the current Hydro GeoAnalyst project NOTE Each Map Project has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 13 Profile Settings Open Provides options for opening an existing Map Project only files with the VMP extension can be opened using the Map Manager Save Provides an option to save the current map project file All current Map Layers that are displayed will be saved to the current Map Project file Save As Provides the option to save a copy of the current Map Project with a different name 298 Chapter 8 Map Manager Close This will close the current Map Project If there are unsaved edits there will be a prompt to save changes bef
81. a report template in the project browser and select the Delete option from the menu to delete the template The selected template will be deleted both from the project browser as well as from storage 8 3 4 Setting a Report Template as Default Template 232 To set a selected template as the default template right click on the template and select the Set as default option from the pop up menu in HGA The selected template will be set as the default template Every time a new report is created the default template will be used to furnish the header and footer sections Chapter 8 The Report Editor 8 4 Import Reports from MS Access The Report Editor allows you to import reports that are created in an MS Access 2000 database environment This may be useful in cases where you migrate existing data from MS Access into HGA and want to import existing reports as well The MS Access Importing wizard can be activated by clicking on the Import Access Report button on the Designer s toolbar The wizard guides you through a number of steps to import the desired report These steps are explained in the following sections The following figure depicts the first screen of the wizard that presents some introductory text Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start This wizard assists you in converting your Microsoft Access 2000 Reports to WHIReports 2 0 format The converted files can be loaded in
82. an appropriate match in the current project When you select this option the following dialog will appear Import LAS file Step 1 Select LAS file Note Select data souce The first step requires selecting LAS File the import package and data SOUICE 5 Create an import package or Spacity a data transfer package select from existing packages The import package contains Package name mappings from previous import e sessions and allows pou to zave time when importing Description multiple source files of the Ro game format Select the data source i Save change to this DTS package Well Information Description a wee The first step requires selecting the data transfer package and data source A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing several LAS files containing the same measured parameters The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table s matching between source and destination tables and fields source units and a number of other settings You may create an import package or select from existing packages All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the import routine loads all Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst information stored in the packa
83. and paste can be used to move controls to another section Some controls have special properties that require the user s attention these controls are described below Altering Borders of Controls Border properties of one or more controls can be modified by selecting the controls first and either clicking on the Borders button on the toolbar or selecting the option from the pop up menu Modifying Data Source information of the ADO data control The ADO data control mainly uses the connection string and SQL statement as its input to provide access to the data stored in your project s database Currently HGA provides basic inputs for this control However advanced users may want to modify these inputs in order to produce advanced reports that are supported by the Report Editor One interesting feature provided by the Report Editor is that of generating a report based on specific values For example a report that displays chemical data for all stations can be modified to only generate reports for a given station and or chemical Report Designer Window 215 The SQL statement is usually composed of the following four parts SELECT Field Field2 Field3 FROM Table Name WHERE Condition AND OR Condition 2 ORDER BY Field Field2 Field3 where the highlighted words are internal to the SQL language and the terms in the brackets are optional To modify the data source information of the ADO control in your rep
84. and select Add Row Group By List Field station county Having Operator Value Operator COUNT station county gt 1 z Add Row Delete Row e Specify a Function select from Aggregate options listed below e AVG Returns the average value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e COUNT Returns the number of items in a collection e MAX Returns the maximum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e MIN Returns the minimum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDEV Returns the sample standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e STDDEVP Returns the population standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e SUM Returns the sum of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e VAR Returns the sample variance of a numeric expression evaluated Creating Queries 141 over a set using the unbiased population formula e VARP Returns the population variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the biased population formula Reference http msdn microsoft com library e Specify a Group Field the group field must be selected from one of the fields specified in the Group By List e Select an Operator and a corresponding Value e Repeat for additional conditions e Multiple conditions must be linked by selecting an appropriate Operator AND OR e Press the Generate SQL State
85. and where the AquaChem project file AQC resides 2 2 6 Tools The Tools menu hosts a number of menu items which provide links to the tools and components of HGA These menu items are linked to the Project Browser and are accessible by selecting the appropriate node in the project browser The following sections briefly describe each item in the Tools menu Query Builder This menu item loads the Query Builder which provides options for tasks related to queries In the Query Builder there are options for creating new queries or loading previous queries The button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 5 Queries Map Manager This menu item loads the Map Manager The Map Manager can be used for creating and viewing site maps creating thematic and contour maps and defining cross section lines The gg button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 10 Map Manager View Cross Section This menu item loads the Cross Section Editor This component can be used for defining and displaying geological hydrogeological and model layer cross sections The zi button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see Chapter 11 Cross Section Editor Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 57 58 3D Interpolation HGA 3D Explorer is now able to display and animate 3D volumetric plumes of one or more soil or groundwater contaminants The plume is generat
86. any plot to do so right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Add Line from the pop up menu The following Add Line dialog will appear x Name 0 Line type Formula BestFit BestFit Type Std Deviation y Source Series Ic a v Period 2 OK Cancel Enter a line Name at the top of the dialog this name will appear on the plot The following Line Types are available e Formula e Best Fit Best Fit is the default line type when selected the following settings are available Best Fit type select from Std Deviation Moving Average or Exponential Moving Average Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Period enter a period value When the Formula line type is selected the following settings will be available Form ddPlotLine x Name Line type Formula C BestFit Formula Type Constant y Source Series a y Constant Value fo OK Cancel Formula type select from Constant Exponential Logarithmic or Inverse Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Constant Value When a Constant Formula Type is selected enter a constant value for the location of the line This will result in a straight line drawn on the plot Adding Lines to a Plot 193 Click OK when you are finished to draw the new line on the plot The line series will appear in the tree under the select
87. anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Interval node from the BHLP Settings window Interva Jw Visible Pattern Symbol Description e Visible e visible Width 40 Use numeric format Image Draw Mode Tiled be Format General E Humber of digits Help Apply OF Cancel The Interval frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 253 The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box BHLP Columns 261 Please refer to the Depth Point Based Column page 256 section for more information on this option 9 2 4 Lithology Column 262 The Lithology column is specifically designed to display geologic formation details It allows the use of soil lithologic patterns together with an optional description for each formation To add a Lithology column click the P Add button and select Lithology from the combo box provided A new L
88. associated with the map project In the root you will find MapProjectName VMP This is an XML file that contains details on the map project such as the projection system renderers settings cross section lines intersections etc Each map project has a unique VMP file Selection When you create a new map layer from an HGA station group or selected stations a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory 1 e boreholes shp boreholes shx boreholes dbf Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure 449 450 Data When you create a new map layer from an HGA data query or a map project a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory e g Chem_Exceedences shp Chem_Exceedences shx Chem_Exceedences dbf Plumes The plumes folder contains all of the files associated with the plume data once the 3D interpolation has been conducted on a query The created nc files are used when viewing the plumes in the 3D Explorer Surfaces The surfaces folder contains all of the gridded surfaces GRD files created in the map project by interpolating the current layer The gridded surfaces can also be used in the 3D Explorer V3D The V3D folder contains all of the 3D Explorer project files Any saved scene configu rations will also be located in this folder e Name 3XS This is the 3D Explorer project file XML file format e BMP any map image sent from the map project will be saved in bitmap fo
89. at selected station s top elevation s bottom elevation s layer type name and description When you create a Data Query in the Query Builder and expand the Description data category you will see the Interpretation Results table as shown below T Query Builder 0 x Xm C Station Group Query Data Query cal SQL View Preview Select a Query pis Fields Cross_section_model_ interpretations y 1 Function Expression station id id i tation E Station Type stati Total Depth station y y station name name Depth to Bedrock Interpretation_Results layer_description Layer_Description description_addins Interpretation_Results top_elevation gt Top_elevation E Interpretation Results Interpretation_Results thickness Thickness Station ID L interpretation Results interpretatiorl Interpretation es Name 4 4 4 4 ie Description dh pee Y Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Slice Name Top Elevation Conditions Bottom Elevation Expression Operator Expression Thickness Below Slice Interpretation ID Xsection x Name E Geologic Description E Well Construction E Soil Testing E Soil Sampling E Monitoring Event E Mining E xploration El SAA Condition Station_ Groups y Boreholes tnd P X Advanced Close Help Field Name Interpretation_Results thickness Type Unit meters Rows 0 Time 00 00 00
90. below 14 1 1 Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Module projectname HGA projectname UDL projectname WHI History XML 14 1 2 Map Manager projectname VMP projectname ALS projectname BPW mapname DXF mapname BMP JPG etc projectname WDL projectname MAP projectname LYR projectname DBF projectname PRJ projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML Appendix A Hydro GeoAnalyst File Types 447 14 1 3 Cross Section Editor projectname V CP projectname DBF projectname SHP projectname SHX projectname XML 14 1 4 3D Explorer projectname 3XS projectname BPW projectname BMP 14 1 5 Reports 448 projectname W RP projectname WTP projectname RDF projectname RPX projectname TPX projectname XML Appendices 14 2 Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure An HGA project consists of many different files and folders related to the different components within HGA Please refer to the information below to determine what data is stored in which folder ProjectDirectory e Root e Map e Data e Selection e Plumes e Surfaces e V3D e XSection e XSI e XInter e bhip e XS2 Root Project vbh is a text file and contains the information on the connection string to the HGA project such as SQL server name database catalog name etc Project vbh bak is a backup of the vbh file Project vbx is a text file and contains the geotransformation settings of the project Map The map folder contains all of the shapefiles
91. but the cursor 1s located within the Stations List grid then all displayed records will be included on the map For more details on the Map Manager please see Chapter 10 Map Manager 2 2 5 Settings The Settings menu item provides options for modifying various HG Analyst project and component properties Each menu item is described below Template Manager The Template Manager provides options for modifying the database settings The Es button in the toolbar can also be used to load the Template Manager For more details please see Chapter 13 Template Manager List Editor This menu item loads the List Editor which provides options to set add and or delete items in a list table The button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the List Editor section in this chapter Material Specifications This menu item loads the Material Specifications Editor which provides options for the material soil and geological formation specification that 1s currently used by the Project The oe button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the Material Specifications Editor section in this chapter Manage User Access Level This menu item loads the User Access Level Management System UALM these tools can be used to add edit users user groups and assign permissions to user groups and control how users access your projects and the HGA application For more details see Chapter 3 Us
92. button A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name 1s provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template The template will be saved with the extension XML and the corresponding lists and templates will be saved in an MDB file The Templates are saved in the folder Program Files HGAnalyst Templates In addition to the current database schema the following entities are saved to the database template upon exporting e Report templates e BHLP templates e Plot templates e User defined Soil Classification Systems SCS e Lists defined in the List Editor e Project Level Security Document PLSD defined with the User Access Management Chapter 5 Template Manager Appendices 14 1 Appendix A Hydro GeoAnalyst File Types Hydro GeoAnalyst uses two types of files to manage users settings of the software and the projects its managing The first file named as HGB WHT is used to store general user settings for the software The second file Project VBH is used to store general information about your project This file stores the project identification and information about the location of your database and the necessary settings for connection Each one of these data files must remain in the same directory as they are originally created These files are listed below where projectname 1s the name assigned to the project A description of the content of each file is given
93. button to display the query results shown below Query Builder I A E i 10 x Xe e Station Group Quem Data Query Design SOL ViewsPreviews DELETE FROM parameterresult WHERE chemical_name Benzene Select a Query Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining E sploration Geophysics Well History 180 1998474121 2H 1969482422 Ag 1995529652 Alkalinity 999339551 Ag 15 Ba 1011920929 Ca 125 Cl 125 Cond 1200 Dissolved_ 980926514 Ethylbenzer 2 Fe 1978542328 HCO3 125 Ha 10 lonic Strenc 009209394 E 15 Li 97 7648258 Ma 22 Mri 1023841858 Source Conditio Project l ll ld do do l do do do ld do do do do do do ld L Advanced Cloze Help NOTE Once you click the Execute Query button all the data that is specified in the SQL statement will be permanently deleted from the database Because there is no undo function it is recommended that you use the select command before a delete command to ensure that you have the selected the correct records The Delete command can also be executed through the Data Query Tab page 147 Chapter 5 Queries 5 4 Managing Queries After queries have been created they may be easily modified saved or deleted within the Query Builder As mentioned previously once a query has been created 1t will appear in the appropriate node in the Project Browser 5
94. callout box will be placed horizontally from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed to the right of the station e A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed to the left of the station Offset Y set the Y Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed vertically from selected station e A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed below the station e A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station e A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed above the station When you are finished with the Display Settings click OK to return to the layout window Click OK once more to create the layout on the map as seen in the examples below Chapter 8 Map Manager Example of Display Data Chart You can see that sample values that exceed the specified conditions TVOC concentration result value greater than 5000 ug l are shaded red for easy detection Example of Display Data Plot Joheals cmey A G4 XA kee CELE TE ESSSE888 o o G o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o G o o o o When stations are clustered it may be necessary to modify the display location of the callout boxes You have the option to manually move individual callout boxes to a new location to improve presentation This 1s explained below Description
95. can be modified by ps selecting Settings Options from the main menu bar then select the OpenGL tab The 3D Explorer must be closed and re opened before the new Open GL driver will be used 12 2 5 Loading Projects 402 To load a 3D project select File Open from the main menu and navigate to a directory where the desired Cross Section is located or click the 4 Open button from the toolbar Supported files are HG Analyst Cross Section converted files with the extension 3XS Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer 12 3 Display Settings The Display Tree Panel should appear as shown in the figure here If the panel is not visible click View Model tree from the main menu bar or click the button from the toolbar The upper section of the Display Tree Panel contains a tree structured list of the elements which can be visualized while the lower section of this panel contains a table of the Display Settings for the selected display element The Display Tree Panel can be used to selectively view stations cross sections interpretation layers and legends or alter the display settings of the selected elements The Display Tree Panel is structured in a hierarchical fashion where the elements within the tree can be expanded by clicking on the symbol Each display element listed in the Display tree has an associated Setting list that can be accessed by selecting clicking the display element from
96. combo box select Scale A new Scale column will be added to the BHLP window 254 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter In the Settings frame in the lower left corner of the window you can set some of the visual details of the column El ES Design H E Lithology Visible True 7 El Header Text Scale Horizontal Alig Center 7 Vertical Align Center Font Font Angle 0 Font Escape 4 0 To specify the display information for this column expand Scale in the Designer tree and select ScaleEntities El ES Design H E Lithology H E el Construction DataTable Lithology E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from E BottormEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField ho Using the combo boxes select the table and the fields from which to draw data In the example shown above the Scale column will display a depth scale that goes from the smallest from depth to the largest to depth in the Lithology table Settings The Scale column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Scale node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Columns 255 Scale e Visible Column Options Visibilit Tic Marks Iw Visible Major Tic Mark Interval 110 Display Unit
97. database for the well casing if you select this option you must add an Image Entity to the Well Construction Drilling Casing entities as shown below and map to an image field in the database BHLP Columns 265 ES Design E ES Well Construction H E Scale E E3 Drilling H 6 Lithology H 6 WaterLevel H E Pump E ES Plug ES Filling ES Casing H E Screen E BES sande ES DrillingEntities 8 6 Interval gt wea EX P Name Walue DataTable Casing E TopEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from E BottomEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField to E DiameterEntity Caption Diameter Description Diameter DataField diameter ImageEntity Caption Image Description Image DataField ima TextEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField material X xl e Define color for the casing cap and mount NOTE In order to see the well casing and screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities e Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that contains an image e Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the casing o
98. defined for the Display Fields a common aggregate option must be selected for each Display Field as shown below 140 Chapter 5 Queries Query Builder XH B w Station Group Query Data Query Select a Query Display Fields VCExceeds20 y Expression Description E aes station name name X El description_addins station elevation y M x_elevation X station_guide pda_guide user_stamp ap and BHLP Ready Use current projection system photo purpose location_name Expression Trichloroethane E location description well_owner address city or town county state province Design SOL View Preview station id station station y id x y Hiv il 10 AND 2003 11 28 Z z Zip Postal Code Installation_Date x status Group By List Geologic Description Having El ithalini i description_addins coun Operator M Source Condition Project y Basic Close Help Field Name description_addins county Type STRING Rows 15 Time 0 0 0 15 Under the Having frame a condition may be applied to the Group By field For example if the query results are grouped by the field County it may be necessary to locate the MAX result in each county or the total COUNT in each County To do so right click in the Having frame
99. dialog provides access to project coordinates and the soil classification system 48 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Miscellaneous Ed Project Location Projection Type R Projection Specify the project location and Geographic coordinate related settings A NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y e UTM The Soil Specification contains C State Planar Units soil names and patterns meters y which will be used Others manis to visualize your lithology data in borehole log plots and cross sections Project Location Waterloo Ontario Soil Specification DIN 4023 zi Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater roject x Required Field Ut Cancel EJ Help If necessary the project projection system or the Soil Classification may be changed in this dialog Print The Print option in the Project menu loads the selected grid into the Report Designer the Print option is activated only if a grid is visible and selected The Print button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details on printing from the Report Designer please refer to Chapter 8 The Report Editor Exit This menu item will close HGA and all related windows 1f any are open 2 2 2 Edit The Edit menu resembles the standard Windows design including options for Cut Copy Paste and Find Depending on the window or dialog selected one or more items under this menu may be
100. displayed in the fields labelled Y1 and Y2 Alternately a Y axis value can be typed directly into this field Creating Slices and Cross Sections 423 For a Vertical YZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the X axis and the X axis value is displayed in the field labelled X1 and X2 Alternately an X axis value can be typed directly into this field When the desired location for the vertical slice has been defined click the Close button to save the vertical slice type and location The new vertical slice will appear in the Surfaces window 12 4 2 Creating a Horizontal Slice To create a horizontal slice through the domain click the Horizontal button to open a Horizontal slice properties window as shown below A yellow outline of the horizontal slice will appear in the Display Screen Horizontal slice properties Ea 2 value 31 0 0 The Slider Bar moves the horizontal slice along the vertical Z axis and the corresponding slice elevation is displayed in the field labelled Z value When the desired location for the horizontal slice has been selected click the Close button to save the slice type and location The new horizontal slice will appear in the Surfaces window 12 4 3 Selecting a Cross Sectional Slice When adding a color map or isoline map you may also utilize cross section lines that were defined in the Map Manager provided they have been added to the current 3D project To select a vertica
101. distance between two points on the map to be measured Delete Selected Object button allows the selected object polygon rectangle circle line point or text to be deleted from the active layer This feature is active only when an object is selected Add Vertex button allows a vertex to be added to the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature 1s active only when an applicable object type is selected Delete Vertex button allows a vertex to be deleted from the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected Zoom In button allows zooming in on the map window Draw a rectangle in any direction around the area you wish to zoom in to Chapter 8 Map Manager Des eN y tt About the Interface Zoom Out button allows zooming out from the map window Pan button allows panning the current map view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the map view to the full extent of the map s coordinates Previous Extent button allows restoring the map view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button advances the map view to the next zoom extent Select Single button allows individual objects such as stations to be selected This feature 1s active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Rectangle button allows selecting all st
102. for the plot and click OK Depending on whether you selected Depth or Interval for your plot the Entities displayed in the Settings window will be slightly different Zig Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Depth Interval E IntervalEntities E DepthEntities EE Plot BE Interval El E DepthPlotE ntities fae ES IntervalE ntities E Es Plot EST DataTable E TopEntity DataTable E Depth ntity Caption Top elevation Caption Depth Description Description Depth DataField DataF eld r E BottornEntity E ValueEntity Caption Bottom elevation Caption concentratior Description Description DataField D ataField k E YalueEntity Caption pressure Description DataField In the first row of the table under the Name column select the data source for the plot There are two options available Data Table or Queries If Data Table is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data tables from your database schema for which you may select one table If Queries is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data Queries available in your HGA project for which you may select one table The advantage of using Data Queries is that the fields may originate from one or several tables in your database Queries 7 tce exceeds 10 mg per kg 7 DataT able Queres The Caption corresponds to the text you entered in the Label text box of the Add a Plot Ser
103. geet aT Ter 207 o EENE E ee tenet Ota enc cee mete eee E ee NET TEEN DE E E EA E N 208 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services SEN 209 Eine ehan a saat abs sees can yaaa eeacta E une cuca a E OR 210 SOUL ASH ses tices tra A IN ae od nna A 210 RICM PCG cee A 210 A 210 SUD RE PORE alain opc liniers 210 Page Break 55 ceclats wa seruanaen a e ental rust ha satan O 210 A Raita A A IO 211 Barcode nn ts 211 ACUNEREPO a a a a dicta 211 Usmo THe Repor TSI Ger dit A2 GN E EE E eE 212 Pia Tela S Explorer eie a A E EA 213 Report PropertiessToolbOX atada dd de 213 Designer Advanced Controls and Setting ooooooocoooooooooooonaoonaaonanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 214 Report Preview VV INGOW cssizeicesdceescatscuencuaustanauendecedaauatanatssderecusvstneaaacddeecetassunstesdseecweuste 216 Repor VIEW ERT OOID ATS nn E E E 217 Navieati n toO Suspiro iria loba 218 Usine THe ARE port VIC WEE std dis 219 SEA AA a e E sede lacdleceae aeadics 219 Report Settings iia 220 A ee ny ee Mc Teer eer rem 222 Limitations nann a E O AA 222 Using non default page dimensions 1 At 223 Creatine REDOEIS 24 223 Creating Reports in HGA Main Window li 223 Creating Reports from a Data Grid aia ia 224 Creating Reports based on a Data Query sssessssssesesresrreseresesesesseresreseseeseseesenssnssssesssnsssnssssssssse 225 Creating Parameter Query Reports is iy A aoe ages 226 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project
104. geologist working on the project may only need to view tables that are related to geological investigation data The Template Manager allows you to hide all unwanted tables and or fields from such users and display only a smaller set of relevant tables and or fields All user modifications to the database views can be saved either in the currently active template or as a new name All such modifications to the project s database are automatically reflected in all copies of user settings The Template Manager allows you to export the currently active database structure as a new database structure for use in creating similar projects More information on the detailed options that are available in the Template Manager is provided later in this chapter 13 2 About the Interface 430 The Template Manager may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways e Select Settings Template Manager from the Main Menu e Click on the A Template Manager button from the toolbar The Template Manager window is shown in the figure below Template Toolbar Template Editor Demo a E agi o x Database_____ environmental_june30c y Ie T sy m M Use as project default Templates Database structure Category Settings D escriptions EV Description D H Geologic Description Database Settings W Well Construction Table name Description 4 Soil Testing 4 Soil Sampling H Monit
105. it at the desired location following the procedure outlined earlier in this chapter Once the chart control is placed on the runtime report designer its properties can be set by activating the control and clicking on the Charts Manager icon on the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed Charts Manager Chart2D1 3 Series Plot Series On Series Label Axis Field Y Axis Field 1 Primary Axis Vinyl Chloride sample_date result_value 2 Primary Axis TEE X 3 Primary Axis EEE Name 4 Primary Axis 1 1 DCE chemical_name sample_date result_value result_unit More Options gt gt Add Remove Ok Cancel Apply The dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes The fields are obtained by loading a data query into the report See the example below Indicate whether a series will be plotted on the primary on the left side or secondary on the right side vertical axis Creating Reports with Charts 235 The properties of the chart can be set by right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties pop up menu option When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview by clicking on the corresponding icon f1 on the toolbar Plots of data can be grouped by location and or any other field by creating the necessary groupin
106. layer e At the right cross section boundary click once more with the left mouse button to add a vertex and complete the line when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the line will snap to the boundary The selected model line will be drawn at the specified location NOTE The model line is drawn using the attributes that were defined for it at the time it was created Most attributes of a model interpretation layer can be modified by right clicking on the desired model interpretation layer and choosing Properties from the pop up menu e A dialog similar to that shown below will appear Model Line E3 Mame Description Pattern Coo CM si 5 Sample OF Cancel e Provide a Description Line Style Line Color Fill Pattern for the model interpretation layer the Name for the layer cannot be modified as the name is defined in the Model Layer Options dialog e Click OK to close the dialog e Once this is finished repeat the same sequence of operations for other model layers within the cross section domain Restrictions on Model Layers The following restrictions apply when drawing model interpretation layers e The model layer line must start at the left boundary and end at the right boundary e The line must be drawn from left to right and may not go backwards 1 e no Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 385 386 vertices can be drawn left of a previously drawn vert
107. log plot and you would like to change the order in which they appear you can simply click on one of the sub nodes under the Design node in the tree to highlight it then click and drag the folder to a new position in the folder list The BHLP will be re organized to reflect the order of the sub nodes under the Design node 9 4 Saving the Borehole Log Plot Once the desired BHLP design 1s obtained there are several saving and exporting options available e The BHLP template can be saved to be recalled later on e The BHLP image itself may be exported to a Report or an external file e The BHLP image may be printed 9 4 1 Saving a borehole log plot design template To save a BHLP template e Click on the 7 Save button on the BHLP designer toolbar To save a copy of a BHLP template with a new name e Click on the H Save As button on the BHLP designer toolbar 9 4 2 Exporting a borehole log plot design template It is possible to export the design and data composing a borehole log plot This is helpful if the user wants to create an XML file from the database To do so click on the Export button at the bottom of the designer window and select from one of the export options as shown below Y Print Y EJ Help Export current borehole Export all boreholes You can either Export the Current Borehole or Export all boreholes in your project using the current BHLP template The exported file will be saved in XML format
108. more details see Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 459 Use Only Selected Stations When selected the contour component will use only those stations that are selected on the layer as the data source for the contouring The option is only enabled when one or more stations are selected If not selected all stations on the layer will be used Restrict Within Domain This option allows you to clip contours lines to a selected polygon layer Select Domain x Please choose a polygon layer as the clipping domain domaint E E Cancel Help You may select any polygon shapefile from the combo box Then click OK to continue The calculated contours will then be clipped at the edges of the polygon NOTE If the polygon is greater in extents than the selected station layer the contouring will end at the furthest point Currently extrapolation to the edge of the polygon is not possible When you are satisfied with the settings click the Create button to create the contour map Chapter 8 Map Manager Contour Line Settings Click on the Settings button beside Contour Lines and the following dialog will appear Contour Line Settings x Intervals Contour Line Settings C Contour Interval 9400 Contour Line Style Number of Intervals fo Necsccscsscsescssscsscssccesscsscesssessceseees E Label Renderer Sample Text Custom Interval Decimal Places fa E x Ok Cancel
109. name e From the Items frame select a field item and click the gt gt button to add the field item to the group Similarly you can use the lt lt button to remove an item from a group Note A field item can only belong to one group The Edit button allows you to modify the name of a selected group Use the Delete button to remove a group from the groups list Clicking the Clear button will remove all groups from the groups list Once the groups have been defined select Ok Crosstab Table Display Settings You may show hide data from the crosstab report using tools built into the crosstab component Each data field that is displayed as a row or column includes this functionality Click on the ES button beside the field and you will see options similar Crosstab Queries 159 160 to those shown below EJE Filter f By value f By condition Filter by value Filter by condition 0K Cancel For each data field you will see the results returned In the example above the query returned seven instances of station name but 1f the selected field was chemical names then you would see all the chemical names that are included in the data query results You can show hide data from the selected field using one of two methods By Value or By Condition Each method is described below Filter By Value When this filter option is selected you can manually specify which field values to show hide by selectin
110. next time you create a new plot in the Add Plot dialog under the Templates combo box Deleting Plot Templates Plot templates can be deleted from the main HGA window Right mouse click on Plots in the HGA project browser tree and select Plot Templates The following dialog will appear lx Select the template you want to remove then click on the x Delete button at the top of the window Saving and Exporting 195 7 5 3 Export Plot Page to Graphics File To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot page design node in the tree and select Export Plot Page to Image from the pop up menu The image can be saved to the following graphics file formats BMP JPG TIF EMF GIF PNG Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save 7 5 4 Copy Plot to Clipboard This option is available for individual plots in the design To copy the selected plot to the windows clipboard right mouse click on the plot name in the tree or right mouse click on the plot in the viewer and select Copy to Windows Clipboard from the pop up menu You can then insert the plot into a graphics or word processing application for further modifications 7 5 5 Export Plot Page to Document To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot design in the tree and select Export from the pop up menu The plot page design can be saved as an XML file 7 5 6 Printing A plot report may be gener
111. object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Copy Map to Clipboard Copies the entire Map Window to the clipboard The map window can then be pasted as an image in other applications 10 2 4 Tools 336 The Map Manager provides annotation tools which allow for drawing shapes and inserting text labels on the map The drawing tools are available in both the Tools menu and in the Map Manager toolbar The options for the annotation tools allow modifying the color and style of the annotation objects The annotation items are only available on map layers with the corresponding object type i e text line point polygon These are called annotation layers For example to draw polygons on the map a new map layer with the type Polygon must first be created using the Layer New menu option or if a polygon layer already exists it has to be set to edit mode To add text to a map layer a new layer with the type Text must first be created using the Layer New menu option The following annotation options are available Polygon Provides the option to draw a polygon This option is available only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Shifting and Scaling Digitized Polylines Polygons Map Manager allows you to shift and scale digitized polygons and polylines These options are NOT accessible through the main menu However they can be accessed by double clicking on a digitized po
112. only those records which contain matching values for a selected cell in the selected column Those records which do not meet the criterion will be temporarily removed from the station list Only a value from a single cell may be selected at once The EF button in the toolbar performs the same function All filtered records can be restored using the Show All menu item By filtering records based on a defined criterion 1t will be easier to focus on a sub set of stations and create specific reports plots and cross sections The Filter menu items are only available 1f the cursor is located within a grid Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 53 54 Hide Selected Rows Use the Hide Rows option to hide all records which are selected in a grid all non selected records will remain in the display All hidden records can be restored using the Show All menu item The 3 button in the toolbar performs the same function Invert Selection Use this command to select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected The EA button in the toolbar performs the same function Show All Use the Show All menu command to show all records in the database this will restore all hidden records Select All Use this menu item to select all records in the grid This item is activated only if a grid is active Sort Ascending Use the Sort Ascending option to sort records in the selected column from lowest to highe
113. option is also referred to as Universal Kriging For most situations Ordinary Kriging is recommended and is the default option The SK Mean defines the global mean of the data if Stationary simple Kriging is performed The Drift term defines the drift components if Kriging with external drift is performed Nine drift components are possible e X linear drift in x e Y linear drift in y e Z linear drift in z e Xq quadratic drift in x e Yq quadratic drift in y e Zq quadratic drift in z e XY cross quadratic drift in xy e XZ cross quadratic drift in xz e YZ cross quadratic drift in yz Appendices The Variable Trend Estimate allows the user to choose between estimating the variable or the trend The default is Estimate variable The Nugget constant quantifies the sampling and assaying errors in the data In a Variogram plot the nugget constant 1s the y intercept value The Use variograms option allows the user to select the type of variogram to be used The Variogram models available include e Spherical e Exponential e Gaussian e Power e Hole Effect If the variogram information 1s not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option 1s a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 465 14 5 Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes 466 None 1250 ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 1251 ANSI Cyrillic Sl
114. options for the modifying the image provided in this dialog Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option 1s available only 1f the JPEGs export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size 1s also directly proportional to this value Description of Menu Items 359 Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Metafiles EMP Print Loads the current cross section into the report editor s runtime designer Please refer to Chapter 8 The Report Editor for more details on managing reports Exit Exit the Cross Section Editor and return to the main window of Hydro GeoAnalyst Note that this menu option also closes the map manager 11 2 2 Edit Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all shapes from the currently active cross section interpretation Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation make it ed
115. or Use Color The use image option will use the images defined in the List Editor to display the filling Otherwise select use color and specify a color from the color box Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Casing Well Constructio e Visible Customizatia fi Show Border Color f Use Default Color J f Use Material Image Color Use Material Ima e Tiled ETE Font a Use Casing Color for Cap J Right Justify W Use Casing Color for Mount J Position The Casing Settings frame allows you to define the well casing source color view and order and label settings Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well casing e Select the View 2D or 3D e Casing Order left to right right to left centered etc e Define Label properties NOTE In order to define well casings within another parent casing you must define the parent casing value in the Casing table If you do not have this field 1t must be added to your data structure If you want well casings drawn individually not within a parent casing define a value of O for the Parent_casing_ID Under the Customization frame define color source for the casing Draw Border Use e Draw Border e Use Default Color e Use Material Image color use this option if your well casing materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color e Use Material Image will use an image from the
116. or the Description category will be loaded as a default Each table in the selected category will be displayed in a separate tab under this tab Each of these tabs displays data from corresponding tables filtered for the Station selected at the top of the window To change the active station simply select a new station from the combo box above the grid About the Interface 15 Category Selection Station Selection sO xi HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst rojectsiDemo_Project Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help J e87 OO XAO BOS al ii ll Station Groups J Stalin List EA Data Query Staf Data Project Data Category a Monitoring Wells Geologic Descripion IE Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m 44 Boreholes g P GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 wi Soil Borings a W0_Stations Lithology Hydig geology Mpdeling features a OC_Monitoring Wells MN Boreholes_with_plot_data Description Consister_ Structure ASTM De_ Color Odor_ fon M clay thicker than 2 m TON Coarse Gravel gt Coarse Gravel am soil_borings_with_tce_exceeding_10_mg_kg i Medium Sand Fine to med sand E Station Data ON J Gravel X E EA Queries Fine Sand Fine sand f Crosstab i Silt Silty clay with traces g Maps Cross Sections Repor
117. performs the same function Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 33 When opening a project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials xX User Name Password OF Cancel The default User Name is Admin with no password Enter the desired password then click OK to continue NOTE Only one user may access and modify a HGA project at a time Open from Backup Use this option to open a back up copy of the HGA project and database This is useful if a remote client or colleague needs to open your HGA project and SQL Server database A back up of the SQL Server database can be made using the BackUp Database option available in the Tools menu explained later in this chapter A copy of the project can be made by simply copying the project folder and its contents using Windows explorer x Server WAYNEWWHI y E This dialog allows opening a project and restoring related database to the selected local server Project D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project pr Ey Please select the desired server provide the project file and the Backup File D TestBackup BackupD atabase bak Ey pa poe pe qo to the server OK Cancel Help In the Backup database dialog specify the Server The Server can be the WHI instance or SQL Server provided it is on the local machine Specify the Project to open VBH file and
118. project are listed under the Station Groups node below the Project node Clicking on a Station Group node will load the Station List tab and display a limited number of columns of data for the stations belonging to that group Additional fields and tables for each Station are available through the Station Data tab discussed later in this section Station Data Data Categories The Station Data node displays the visible data categories under which project tables are organized Clicking on any of the data categories activates the Station Data tab if it is not already active and displays a tab for each of the tables classified under the selected data category The Station Data tab displays information pertaining to the station currently selected in the Station List tab As mentioned earlier in this manual data categories are provided to enable logical groupings of your tables Queries The Queries node lists all the queries that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the queries under this node executes the query activates the Data Query tab and displays the returned results 20 Chapter Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Crosstab The Crosstab node lists all the crosstab query reports that are created and available for the current project Double clicking on any of the crosstab reports under this node will load the crosstab query component where you can modify print or export the report Map
119. projection system In the next line enter your Project Location and specify the Soil Classification Settings SCS The soil classifications will be used to represent soil materials in the cross sections and borehole plots in the program One of the existing SCS s may be selected or anew SCS may be easily created The available soil settings include Using the Project Manager 103 e USCS Unified Soil Classification System e USDA United States Department of Agriculture e DIN 4023 Deutsches Institut f r Normung e V e AH International Association of Hydrogeologists e Compton Simply choose the desired soil settings from the combo box To customize or create a soil classification press the MJ button to load the Material Specification Editor For more details on customizing the soil settings please refer to Chapter 2 Material Specifications Editor You may also enter a Description of the project in the field below the Soil Specifications optional Finally under the Projection Type frame you must specify the coordinate system used for this project You may choose from the following list e Geographic e UTM e State Planar e Others e Local Once the projection Type is selected choose the Projection from the combo box on the right side of the window The Units will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc If the Local option is selected
120. prompted for action if stations with same names exist in the database When importing additional data from child tables and the source files contain only the station names the DTS will search for the appropriate Station IDs in the station table based on station names and map the data to appropriate stations In the case where there are duplicate station names please see the explanation listed in Duplicate Stations on page 121 Import Order NOTE When importing be sure to import data for the parent tables before the child ones For example Stations must be present in the database before you can import chemistry or lithology data for these stations Likewise for soil or groundwater chemistry data you must first define or import the sample id codes in the parent table then run through the DTS again to import the sample results into the correct fields How to Map Fields Follow the directions below to map fields in the source table to a destination table Select the Destination Category from the list on the right side of the window Select a Destination Table from the list on the right side of the window Select the Source Database Table from the list on the left side of the window Under the Source Table Click once in the Name column of a blank field across from the destination field where you wish to import the data A list of available fields will appear as seen in the example below Importing Dat
121. section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 In the Template Manager select the field for which a list is desired then click the Edit List 69 70 button to load the List Editor This will allow for creating editing a list for the selected field The following figure depicts an instance of the List Editor List Editor Demo al i E 10 x Select a Fiel List Items so1l_type Uan Name clude Picture Description el geologic description lithology La Po Por Fields A a colour Color comment consistency Consistency form_desc Description formation_hame formation unit matgs0 ASTM Descriptor moisture odor Odor structure Structure to_ to la Js lEs ls JEslEslEs JEs JE JEs Es EJE Es JEs JEs Es EJE TIA F Total Items 46 Ok Cancel EJ Help The List Editor window contains the following parts The Tables combo box Allows you to select the table containing the field for which a list is to be created or modified Fields Allows you to select a field for which a list is to be created or modified List Items Displays the list for the selected field if available Each list item may have a Name Image and Description Adding Lists Manually To create the list for a particular field follow the steps below Select the Table and Field for which a List is to be created Click the op Add button to add a list item In the fir
122. section line on the cross section line layer e Draw a new cross section line on a station layer For more details on creating cross sections please see Chapter 11 Cross Section Editor 10 2 5 View 340 This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Map Window and the layers within the map project Full Extent This menu item will zoom the map window to its original full extents Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the map that is defined by drawing a rectangle Place the cursor on the map and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the map Click this menu item and the map window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is already in full extent mode Zoom to Active Layer Zooms the map window dimensions to the extent of the selected map layer Previous Extent Zooms the map window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the map window to the next window dimensions Activated only after Previous Extent has been used Chapter 8 Map Manager Custom Extent Allows you to manually set the zoom extents and the center of the Map Window When this menu item is selected the following dialog will appear Chang
123. see Section 8 2 7 for more details In the Set Features dialog there are several options e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Visible Defines if the element is visible or not e Field Allows you to select a field to use as a label for the intersecting feature e Symbol Allows you to select a symbol to represent the intersecting feature e Label Allows you to set properties of the label representing the intersecting feature The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view Double click on the desired cell in the Symbol column to load the dialog where a symbol can be selected and its properties set Point Style xl Pattern rs j4 Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x Fil Boder T Sample x OF Cancel NOTE You will only be able to change the Font and Symbol of the point 1f the Pattern is set to True type The Label Properties dialog may be loaded by selecting the button the properties that are available are shown below Description of Menu Items 363 Label Renderer xl Font Angle 45 Vertical Alignment Horizontal Aligment Left i a OF Cancel Change Well Width Provides options for increasing the display width of stations wells and boreholes plotted on the cross section Change Well Width a X OK Cancel 53 Help You can change well width a
124. select create the database on that server Server SAY Build Connection String q Next Cancel Help HGA requires a MS SQL server to host the project database A server can be any computer on your network which has MS SQL Server 2005 Express installed or an installation of WHI SQL Express installed The WHI SQL Express can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI SQL Express is installed 1t will be setup as the default database server This will allow your local computer to act as a server for new projects The MS SQL Server 2005 Express is a data engine built and based on core MS SQL Server technology If you are working on a stand alone computer then the MS SQL server would be your computer and the server name would be the name of your computer as 1t appears in your General System Properties followed by the abbreviation WHP For example if your computer s name is John the MS SQL Server name would be John WHI Once the server 1s selected select from an existing database on this server or create a new database HGA allows you to 1 Select from a list of known servers and create select a database OR 2 Build a Connection String to an existing database on a server NOTE The current version of HGA supports MS SQL Server 2005 Express MSDE and later other SQL Servers such as Oracle DB2 Sybase Terradata etc are not supp
125. selected field into the desired section of the report 8 2 1 Report Designer Toolbars The figure below shows a closer view of the toolbars used in the Report Designer window The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the designer window Main Toolbar New Report Allows you to create a new report Report Wizard Allows you to create a new report using the report wizard ES Import MS Access Reports Allows you to import reports that are created in MS Access Ex Open Report Allows you to open an existing report z Save Report Allows you to save the active report H Save Report As Allows you to save the active report with another name and Report Designer Window 201 202 x oit or format 1 e as a report template if desired Page Setup Allows you to edit the page setup properties Printer Setup Allows you to configure printer settings Print Report Allows you to generate the report and send it to a printer Preview Report Previews the report before printing Undo Cancels the last operation Cut Cut selected text or object from the report designer Copy Copies selection to clipboard Paste Pastes contents of the clipboard to the report designer Delete Deletes current selection Reorder Groups Displays the groups order dialog Display Settings Tools Report Explorer Displays hides the control that displays all report elements placed on each section of the report Fields
126. setting specified in the Template Manager When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 39 40 Import LAS File Step 4 Data Preview Validation the mapped fie Ero Avamnings indication of any emoneous Site 5 records Records with emors Meaning wil not be imported ou may reluen lo previous steps lo make any corechons bo the mapping This step provides a preview of ds and an Al The bop of the window each tab represents a different database lable containing one resistivity of more mapped fields 188 5 157 5 187 186 5 156 185 184 5 154 1825 Recods The last step in the import involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings 1f any will be listed along with the data Records with errors will not be imported You may return to previous steps to make any corrections to the mapping The data is checked against the following conditions e Proper Station Locations e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format WGS 1984 for internal use regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordi
127. size and color settings Setting m m m m ig D Visible a a E a E 2 Label Sets the label attributes 4 Live Update Apply 12 3 4 Sitemap Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports AutoCAD DXF files and BMP files for site maps The Sitemaps category contains a list of the sitemaps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual Sitemap Display Settings 407 To load a site map into the project select File Import Basemap from the main menu In cases where the sitemap 1s not appearing clearly because of the colors used in the DXF file you can specify a fixed color to apply to all lines and attributes of the DXF file The following settings are available for Site map elements Name sets the image name Visible shows hides the site map image Semitransparent sets the site map image as semi transparent Z Level for bitmap defines an elevation for the site map Bind to surface drapes the map over a surface If there are no surfaces available the only option will be None First load a surface as explained in the following section then select a surface for the draped map 12 3 5 Surfaces Display Settings gt gt gt Stay on top e 9 8 Site maps EE E sen E Surfaces Ef Cross Sections Data Bo AA Level for bitmap Bind to surface E Surface to bind Map e Live Update Apply The 3D Explorer supports Surfer Grid
128. specify the Database BackUp File BAK file NOTE The user must have permissions to the Manage Databases and Create Projects objects in the ALSD in order to use this option NOTE If you are using SQL Server 2005 Express you cannot open a backup database created by Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine 2000 MSDE 34 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst NOTE On Windows Vista operating systems User Account Control UAC must be disabled before you can successfully open a project from backup For information on how to disable UAC please refer to the installation instructions in your licensing guide Close Close the project which is currently open Re Open This menu item provides a list of projects that have been recently opened The most recent project will appear at the top Simply select the desired project and 1t will be loaded into HGA Import Use the Import option to import data or reports into the project database data may be imported from source files using the Data Transfer System package Note Depending on the performance capabilities of your computer importing large quantities of data points can take a very long time and cause HGA to become unresponsive As such SWS does not recommend importing more than 20 000 data points at one time Data Using DTS This option allows data to be imported into the HGA project database using the Data Transfer System DTS Data may be imported from the following
129. text box Next Page Moves to the next page in the report Last Page Moves to the last page in the document Back Moves back to the previous page in a list of recently accessed pages Forward Moves forward to the next page in a list of recently accessed pages 8 3 2 Using the Report Viewer Once a report is generated and displayed on the Viewer it can either be saved in the Report Editor s native binary format printed or exported to various formats that are supported by the Report Editor Using the button on the toolbar reports can be exported to Portable Document Format PDF Microsoft Excel TIFF Hyper Text Markup Language HTML and Rich Text Format RTF Please see Exporting generated reports on page 230 for more details Saving Reports Saving the report design as opposed to the final report is preferable as the design requires a smaller storage space for most reports and the reports that are generated from a saved report design are dynamic they are up to date with the data stored in your database However reports that are saved from the Viewer are static and they may not Report Preview Window 219 reflect the exact content of the current data To save the report press the Save button from the Viewer window s toolbar The Report will be saved as a RDF file archive file HGA stores and manages all report designs in your project database All reports that are created for your project wi
130. the Model Axes The AutoRotate speed may be adjusted by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the Slider Button and setting it to the desired level Time Animation The Time tab is available when displaying a transient plume When the Time tab is selected the following window appears El Rotate Shift Light Position Time Pume Browser F lalo J ZE Options 12 1 2000 Browser Time 5142000 Time Animation Options Clicking the Options button will load the Animation Properties Time window as shown below Animation Properties l x Rotate Time Pume Browser Time steps 50 Start Time x 172000 5 1 2000 Finish Time fiz 1 2000 124142000 Animate in selected interval Cancel 398 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer The Number of time steps for animation value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or 1t may be decreased to make the animation proceed faster HGA 3D Explorer uses interpolation in time for the case where the time step falls on a date where there is no data The Start time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will begin The Finish time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will end The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish time Plume Browser The Plume Browser tab is the location where you can select from pre defined co
131. the closest grid point 206 Chapter 8 The Report Editor FE Size to Same Width makes all selected controls the same width as the last selected control O Os Size to Same Height makes all selected controls the same height as the last selected control Size to Same makes all selected controls the same height and width as the last selected control de Lock Controls Locks all controls on the designer so that they will not be resized or moved from their original location 8 2 2 Toolbox options for General Tools This section 1s designed to help familiarize you with the different options available in the toolbox for various tools The Toolbox 1s dynamic and changes depending on the object currently active in the Report Designer The vital options of select tools are described in this section however if you require further information please refer to the ActiveReport help file included with the installation in the Reports folder If you cannot find a description of a specific property see the previous descriptions in this section Label Angle Allows you to change the angle at which the text appears in the label ClassName Sets the overall text style of the label caption e g Heading1 Hyperlink Allows you to change the label into a hyperlink To do so enter an internet address inside the Hyperlink field Left Determines how far in pixels from the left edge of the report the object is located You can either e
132. the data cannot be recovered once deleted and there is no undo option unless you have taken a backup Deleting a database does not remove all the files that are related to the projects using the deleted database NOTE Databases may be removed only from the WHI SQL Express instance Databases from other instances of SQL Express or on a SQL Server cannot be removed through HGA Pumping Test Analysis Use this feature to analyze pumping test data in AquiferTest For this feature you must have one or more data queries that contains the required fields for a pumping test analysis namely e Well Name e X Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells e Y Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 63 e Pumping Start e Pumping End e Pumping Rate e Observed time e Observed depth to water level Additional fields may also be mapped and the data sent to AquiferTest these include e Well Elevation e Screen Diameter e Borehole Diameter For your convenience these fields are included in the Environmental templates in the Well History tables The following section describes these settings Aquifer Test A y e jml x f SS AquiferT est Settings Pumping Wels Pumping Rate Observation wells Units Side Map meters v Dimensions meters y Time sec v Discharge m 3 sec y Transmissivity m tsec v Pressure Pa y Project i
133. the left mouse at the vertex location To finish the line double click the left mouse button at the final vertex location This will open the buffer distance window Description of Menu Items 343 Buffer Buffer meters OF Cancel Enter a buffer distance from the drawn line and click OK All stations within the buffer distance of the line will become selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol The Buffer distance extends out perpendicular to the line location All All stations on the current Map Layer will be selected None All stations that are selected on the current Map Layer will be deselected NOTE Once selected you cannot deselect individual stations Add to Station Group Provides an option to add the selected stations to a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group Using one of the Selection tools mentioned above select one or more stations then choose this menu item from the Select menu and the following dialog will appear li Select Station Group Jof x Fleaze select Station Group OF Cancel Stations can only be added to an existing station group Delete from Station Group Remove the selected stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group The stations will be removed from the station group map layer currently selected and active in the layer manager 344 Chapter 8 Map Manager 10 2 7 Settings Cross Section This dialog allows modifying the display prop
134. the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch Batch ID which relates the samples to each other Defining Quality Codes for Data When importing adding sample data quality codes need to be added to indicate the type of sample in order to be used in a Lab Quality Analysis The following are the codes required by HGA Sample Type Quality Code Duplicate Original Duplicate Measured Spiked Theoretical Spiked Measured Chapter 6 Quality Control Sample Type Quality Code Using the Template Manager you can create a field that will store the quality codes This field may be added to any table but typically 1t 1s found in the Chem_sample table with the Sys_sample_code These quality codes are saved in the file Program File HG AnalystWhi QualityAC dll config If necessary the codes may be changed to reflect the codes used in your data Simply use a text editor to open the config file and modify the quality codes under the section lt QualityCodes gt 6 1 1 Data Requirements Quality Control starts with a data set before you can apply a quality control template you must generate a data set by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the Quality Control component The following are required fields for the Lab Quality valida
135. the server and database to be used for the project and the connection string if necessary e Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template e Step 3 Set Project Properties Location and Soil Settings In this window specify the project name project folder project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project The project wizard is designed in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next gt button to proceed The Next button will only become activated after the necessary fields have been defined These required fields are indicated by an asterisk 3 2 1 Step 1 Set Database Environment The Set Database Environment window shown below is the first step in the Project Wizard and provides the controls needed to select a MS SQL Server and create select a database for the new project Using the Project Manager 93 94 Fi Project wizard ioj x Step 1 Set Database Environment Select Server and Database The Project Manager allows you to create 4 database for your eee project on a SOL Server of your Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization choice through a four step User Name sa procona ES a In this first step select a SOL Password Server on which your project s SES A database will be created and Database VES ARA z
136. the tree A brief description of each display property is available by clicking the mouse pointer on the display property This produces a tool tip Description of the Property in the bottom of the Display Tree Panel below the Setting table Although each display element has a different set of display settings there are several display settings which are common to most display elements gt gt gt Stay on top e Elf Site maps i E HG43D E Surfaces a Cross Sections Data H E AA EE Stations i E GB 34 i Elf Interpretations ff Model Layers Elf Geology Layers Ey Coarse Gravel E Medium Sand Gravel Fine Sand i E Sil iE Hydrogeology Layers H E BR H E CE Ff DD P Background color _ _ Vertical Exaggeratior 4 a eetation type Geology ElStations Label Prope T itle e Live Update Apply e Name Sets the name of the display element as it appears in the Model tree e Visible Shows hides the selected display element On Off The following is a brief description of the various display elements and the display settings for each display element listed in the Display Tree 12 3 1 Default Settings The Default Settings are used to define how selected objects are initially displayed when a project is first opened If Default Settings of the selected objects are modified the new settings may be saved and applied to all HG Analyst 3D Explorer projects
137. the unit conversion or create constant conversion factor in this case enter the factor and an appropriate field The units conversion component implements full SI units including temperature electric current and luminous intensity Label select a field to be used for the symbol label The next two fields are used to control non detect results When the query returns null records for the result value the method detection limit if available and 1f selected can be displayed on the plot Optionally the method detection limit multiplied by the non detect factor ND_ Factor can be used instead of the method detection limit For example if an ND_Factor of 0 5 is provided and a column containing method detection limit values is provided then the plot will display the method Detection Limit DL value multiplied by 0 5 the ND_Factor If ND_Factor is left empty then the DL will be displayed ND_ Factor specify a field that contains the factor for non detects 183 184 Detection Limit select a field that contains the detection limit value Uncertainty select a field that contains a value for the uncertainty for the plotted series This will plot uncertainty bars directly on the plot Standard This option allows you to display water quality standards as a plot series on the plot This 1s useful for quickly identifying which values exceed the standard When you load the options for standards the following dialog will appear
138. to high level features such as managing databases creating new projects and the user access management e Project Level Security Document PLSD used to control access to individual projects as well as the data and modules within this project The settings for the ALSD are encrypted and saved in the ALSD whi file which is copied to your HGA installation directory during the installation default is Program Files HGAnalyst The ASLD contains one default user group Administrators and one user Admin with no password After installation the Administrator can launch HGA login with the default user credentials and customize the default Administrator user and Administrators user group NOTE At least one user must belong to the Administrator user group at all times If you are working on a network and you want other users to have the same ALSD settings that you have defined then these users must have the same ALSD whi file in their HGA installation folder Simply copy the file to the target machine and overwrite when prompted The settings for the PLSD are saved in the PLSD table which is an encrypted table and is created for each HGA project 3 1 3 Managing Users and Groups 84 The User Access Level Management UALM module is loaded from the main window of HGA by selecting Settings Manage User Access Levels from the main menu If you load the User Access Management component and there is no project opened then you will
139. to represent the chemical characteristics of aqueous geochemical and water quality data as well includes PHREEQC a powerful geochemical reaction model 111 GW Contour The GW Contour data interpolation and contouring program incorporates techniques for mapping velocity vectors and particle tracks GW Contour incorporates the most commonly used 2D data interpolation techniques for the groundwater and environmental industry including Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance Kriging and Bilinear GW Contour is designed for contouring surface or water levels contaminant concentrations or other spatial data UnSat Suite Plus UnSat Suite Plus seamlessly integrates multiple one dimensional unsaturated zone flow and solute transport models into a single intuitive working environment Models include SESOIL VS2DT VLEACH PESTAN Visual HELP and the International Weather Generator The combination of models offers users the ability for simulating the downward vertical flow of water and the migration of dissolved contaminants through the vadose zone UnSat Suite Plus includes tools for project management generating synthetic weather data modeling flow and contaminants through the unsaturated zone estimating groundwater recharge and contaminant loading rates and preparing compliance reports Visual HELP Visual HELP is a one dimensional unsaturated zone flow modeling application built for optimizing the hydrologic design of municipal landfills Vis
140. types of queries e Station Group Queries and e Data Queries Each query type is discussed later in this chapter Additionally once a query is created it is possible to generate a CrossTab Query using the query data Crosstab Queries are discussed in section 5 8 on page 151 5 1 About the Interface The Query Builder may be loaded from HGA in several ways e Select Tools gt Query Builder from the main menu e In the toolbar click on the E Query Builder OR e In the Query branch of the Project Browser right click on an existing query and select New or Edit The Query Builder window is shown below This display shows the options for a Data Query About the Interface 129 130 Display Fields Toolbar 2 Query Builder Query NETA ss P Station Group Query Data Query E sau View Preview Selecta Query p Display Se a E E a E aE E E A Query POC Exceeds 320m Al eee LL ieee A PIS a ee ee station id E R E ES station x 3 L IS t T station y y i T gt station name name pd sys_sample_code gt station toc TOC 3 Name 3 3 Available ee chemical_name E Fields es und e X V Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system E conc_ppm SS E ejo 5 E a ap n C on ditio ns reperting detection irit Express Operator Expression Operator pi station toc 320 3 fractioncode 2 che
141. unit will usually conform with the boundaries of the geologic layers As such you can copy one or more of your geologic interpretation layers and use them as a startup for hydrogeologic interpretation layers To do so e Select the Hydrogeology option from the Layer Manager to make this layer visible e Right mouse click on this interpretation layer and select Copy from Geologic Layers and the following dialog will appear Select the Layers to Copy Bedrock ok Cancel EJ Help e In this dialog select one or more geologic interpretation layers to copy e For each layer to be copied provide the name pattern and description of the 382 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor corresponding hydrogeologic interpretation layer Aquifer or Aquitard Once this is complete the cross section editor draws the selected hydrogeologic interpretation layers 11 4 4 Model Layer Interpretations This option allows for defining the unique model layers Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers can be used for numerical groundwater flow models or for general purposes The layer positions for model layers must be drawn in manually with the mouse using the Line tool Defining Model Layers Before drawing model layers the layer attributes must first be defined To do so e Select Tools gt Model Layers from the main menu This will load the Model Layers dialog as shown below Top of Lavery Topography
142. view The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of data interpretations e Geologic containing lithology structure data e Hydrogeologic containing locations of aquifers aquitards etc e Model containing locations of model layer lines which may be used in numerical groundwater modeling The Cross Section Editor provides users with the following key features e Digitize geologic and hydrogeologic layers using the polygon draw tool e Select standard cross section fill patterns from the Geology e Copy zones from geology layers in order to define hydrogeology zones e Display the locations of intersecting layers and other cross sections using symbols and labels e Display water table location in cross section view e Dynamically view the spatial orientation of the boreholes in the Map Preview Window simply move the mouse over the 2D borehole to highlight its location on the map e View the orientation of cross sections as they relate to the Map Preview Window e Define properties of intersecting features other layers or cross sections e Display screened interval in cross section view e Modify labels for lines and polygons e Zoom in out and pan features e Launch cross section for viewing in the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer e Export cross section view to image format e Export model layer points for use in groundwater models including Visual 353 MODFLOW e Send cross sections to the Report Editor to be included in
143. will interpolate the log values of the data points and then invert the log value distribution This option is useful when interpolating data with a high degree of variance Add Data Source Define the various properties relating to the data source e Data Source select a field from the data query that contains the data to be interpolated e g concentration or result value e Name define a name for the parameter e Date Field select the field that contains the sampling date if available e Date Granularity This option controls how to accumulate the data items of various date stamps For example assume you have data for the following sample dates e 5 stations sampled on 03 05 99 e 6 stations sampled on 03 14 99 could be from the same or other stations e 4 stations sampled on 03 19 99 e 5 stations sampled on 03 27 99 e 6 stations sampled on 04 04 99 e 5 stations sampled on 04 15 99 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst e 4 stations sampled on 04 25 99 If you select Day for date granularity you will obtain 7 data sets to interpolate and If you select Month for date granularity you will obtain 2 data sets to interpolate e 20 stations sampled on 03 01 99 and e 15 stations sampled on 04 01 99 In this case the first observation from a well will be selected If you select Year for date granularity you will obtain only one data set that will essentially be a static plume In this case the first 1 data set When you ha
144. 0 1666 6666666 2000 6000 14000 25000 33000 38000 40000 400 933 33333333 26 666666666 4 0 1666 6666666 53 333333333 60 63 333333333 66 666666666 The Print Preview window contains a toolbar that allows you to modify the view The following buttons are available settings Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the Use the amp button to print directly from the Print Preview window 2 button to zoom in and zoom out of the Print Preview window EN button to view just one page 00 button to view two pages at once E button to view three pages at once INE button to view four pages at once E button to view six pages at once You can scroll through the pages using the Page vertical scroll bars located in the top right corner of the print preview window Click Close from the Toolbar to return to the Report window Printing Report To send your report to a printer click on the Print button 164 Chapter 5 Queries Quality Control When collecting analyzing and interpreting environmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions Hydro GeoAnalyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As part of a data collection process duplicate samples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the o
145. 0 RIGHT JOIN PStation ON t0 1D PStation SID LEFT JOIN lithology 45 t1 ON t0 id 41 Station WHERE t1 FROM_ gt 30 AND bedrack30 t1 soil Limestone AND PStation ID 75 Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration y name 100010 80 5575320604263 43 4821142326773 BH 010 da 100011 80 5616076993998 43 4751191676727 BH 011 gos 100013 80 5613306964769 43 4912779610142 BH 013 E Well History 100019 80 5459026865231 43 4787262381272 BH 019 User Category Source Condition Project j Edva Close Help Category User Rows 4 Time 0 0 0 80 You will see that the display fields show only the ID Name X and Y If desired additional fields may be added to the display fields using the steps listed above The query may now be accessed from the project tree under the Queries node If the user 1s familiar with SQL string structure the query string may be directly edited in the SQL View Preview tab Follow the steps listed above to execute the query Adding a field which contains a Linked List If a field is added to the Conditions which contains a Linked List then the Expression field for the Condition may be chosen from a linked list An example is illustrated below For example it may be necessary to do a chemical exceedance qu
146. 1 Upp Au AO er ESOT Eee Hpt 5 AN ka str aM AA 1 eigen 1 Topapaphg Ce PERERER 110 di PERLA Made LL Datel AA 1 Ai IAN ada T Dilsa AA Ta D Mabel T Bils E AENA TOOL APA Model Heim Sond 7 SPRRPREI ia 1 PERRERA Lied Lune LE DOE Ad A pig Comte Lupe Ce PERERER 110 AS lr Sard fo OT TG VOL pig Di 7 OT a SPRPPPP a ce bwd E ALAN LIA pig ppt guis cS RAR 1 PARA Hpdrogealoga kr aque A 1 TILA Wedges 1 TH popa Of TEEPEE A DOL Hida TH Dori al oll EEE ALA SOT LAA ada 1H EA SU FEFEFE A di PEFFEEAIFER Hipa arce Cordon DH Dot yaa 0 ACA E a Model A 1H Losros ipa LN SPRRPERL ee 7 PPPPPOSORL Gecici gt TH Fra Sard M4 DOL Th ON AE Gega TH Di A OO A A Geco Doraticda DH Chey FO AA O alga sl own 250 Tes gga For more details on using the Query Builder please see Chapter 5 Queries 11 6 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 390 Text labels lines and shapes can be added to any layer in the cross section To add annotations you must select the layer but NOT make it active 1 e do not check the active edit check box Once the layer has been selected right click and select Annotations from the list of options The Edit options shown in the following Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor screenshot can be used to add edit and delete text lines and polygons Save Delete View 30 Copy From Geo Layers Properties Model Label Update Erosssection Show Intersecting Info Annotations Edit Text Ed
147. 38 PO ora aa O a TTR aM In En TRUREAT RTT NT ARE WaT rene an 338 O ONC PPE A A II We De ROR A OEE EE RT 338 FEO EAU O A a 338 Nea A aaa tata etme A A A AN 339 Defne Cross Section LME rare 339 Sis CTOS S O E A EOE 340 O E E EEA A TEA A N A E E EEE AE A 340 FONE A O 340 LIM dede crod incio dates ed ota dd e a ed iat ania ne eke 340 E A A eae Ca eons 340 ZOOM OPAC 6 LAVET ai its 340 A O AN 340 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services A A ayaucnnsacaceceauan a iain onceea ba rumonwnabicuncea A EAA 340 TI CG TS C0 ase areata tt recta tet nc E E E A E 341 Tun On Layers oa ta 341 AA AS 341 O A O O 341 DCICCE ad 342 PM its 343 Re ctantle eur pi dd e aes 343 A sams suena gases E au deans scene asousiaceancenatunenindasimncicane teats 343 CTR Gs a da cases cine nace cam estas aa A 343 e Tees rene here eet rete ene eee 343 A beg Si che ett id cada sain Sasa oo a e sa aaseaua soe sea nanan E easel nce uae eaten 344 NOS uni di ins 344 PNG SALOU ULA E ase 344 Delete from Staton GrOUp dara 344 A a o o o A A E A 345 CLOS DECO ii ia ato bei 345 A NT 347 Code Pane pennen n nals ned rua O ashen l aaa cic Necks at leanuias sata on gilead Iatadsteda anata aln 348 DV i o E E odo read 348 CONOS a E E anh en eta neha dace bases taeneante baat cyan ae aoaaeeaae aatade 348 Defining a Cross Section LIN aer 348 Disitizine a Cross Section Line is 348 Use astro Polynesia 350 Modity Butter DIStanco io 351 11 Cross Section Editor sins JDI About t
148. 380 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained below Once a layer is created in one cross section it will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you might have for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Editing Layers Once the interpretation layers are drawn 1t may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or fill in the gaps between any two adjacent layers to create a continuous layered structure To move a vertex e Select the pointer tool from the toolbar e Click on one of the vertices of the polygon e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex e Select the pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the polygon to activate the object e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Geologic interpretation layers can have a free form and do not have to conform to a conceptual model e g a sand layer may appear more than once in an individual cross section Layers may not have to continue from first to last borehole However to have a meaningful view of your cross sections in the 3D Explorer you must avoid creating ove
149. 4 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 44 535 162 4 813 762 1 10 359 From the top of the BHLP viewer select the template from the combo box These templates are defined in the main HG Analyst window under the Borehole Logs node For more information see Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter 10 2 6 Select 342 This menu provides options for selecting or de selecting stations on the selected layer in the Map project Typically this involves stations from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project Once the station s data points are selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol Stations may be selected on the map by e Clicking individually e Drawing a polygon box or circle all stations inside the object become selected e Drawing a line and defining a buffer distance all stations within the buffer distance become selected Multiple station selections may be accomplished with the use of the lt Ctrl gt key Simply press and hold down the Ctrl key after making the initial selection then use one of the tools to select or de select additional stations Chapter 8 Map Manager Each selection option 1s described below Pointer Allows to select stations one by one When a station 1s selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol When another station is selected the previously selected station is un selected and the new station s symbol becomes selected indicated by a red cir
150. 4 1 Editing To quickly load a Data Query into the Query Builder right click on an existing query in the Project Browser under the Queries node or Station Group node and select Edit or Edit Dynamic Once in the Query Builder make the necessary changes to the query generate a new SQL statement execute 1t and Save 5 4 2 Saving As One method of quickly creating multiple queries with similar conditions is to use the Save As option press the H Save as button in the toolbar To do so define all the necessary inputs for a query Then Save As the query under a new name Then simply make the required changes to the new query and execute and Save This is convenient for many cases For example if the only difference between the queries is in the Value field Query 1 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ppm Query 2 find all stations where Vinyl Chloride gt 500 ppm By duplicating the first query using the Save As option the second query can quickly be created by making a small change to only the Value field 5 5 Recalling Queries in Hydro GeoAnalyst Once queries have been created they will be available from the main HGA interface A Station Group query will appear as a new branch under the Station Group node in the project browser The stations which satisfy the query will be automatically added to this new Station Group A Data query will appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the project bro
151. 4814652 90 329 50 4 40 Crosstab E 53554590 481455350 332 10 H Mons S25800 00_l4614837 50 228 30 ji 5 el dl 53567460 4814800 00 330 40 R 535687 40 4814665 30 330 50 BAY 3DView 535390 00 4814741 90 329 90 fl Borehole Logs z 535577 40 4814477 10 329 30 Plots E 535677 10 4814416 20 330 50 535584 50 4814300 00 329 90 535599 70 4814371 80 330 20 53549290 4814477 20 331 10 535635 20 4814503 80 330 80 535588 40 4814667 30 331 10 Loading options Load All Incremental fi 000 a X Borehole Logs Total 23 selected 0 j 30 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Station Data Tab For a more detailed view of a single Station s attributes the Station Data tab should be selected and an appropriate Data category chosen The Station Data tab provides access to all data related to a single station Once a Station is added to the project detailed information on the station can be inserted edited or deleted through the Station Data tab HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst Projectsi Demo_Project Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help aezZ Sh t XBA RBRBH S Basil a ii E Station Groups M Station List E Data Query Station Data M Project Data Category Monitoring Wells Description MN Select Station m Y m Elevation m 4 Boreholes Sl il GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 32350 M Soil Borinas AS M 0_Statio
152. 504 700 4114554 Gee 0625 2000 BTEX 25000 ug In the Data Query window the following options are available To execute an existing query e Select the desired query from the Queries node in the tree e Right mouse click on this query and select Execute To see desired data from a selected table e Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Pressthe f Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid will be populated with all records which satisfy this query For example select the Boreholes station group and view all Lithology data that belong to this group In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table This is useful if you mistakenly import numerous records to the wrong table To delete records from a selected station group and table e Select a Station Group from the combo box and any table from the Database Tables combo box e Pressthe f Execute Query button at the bottom of the window and the grid 148 Chapter 5 Queries will be populated with all records which satisfy this query e Press the x Delete button Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database 5 6 Exporting Query Results Data Query results may also be sent to the Map Manager or to a Report To load the results of a Data Query into a map project select the Record Di
153. 515 12145 AR Oh ARTS SSG PA ae SSAA ANTE OAD Td Status Bar Lived All LAA SOR Al SP ba TAEA SSma AM 20757 1057 D maia E 4014736 230 Fd f El 9 Station Data The HGA Graphical User Interface is composed of several controls Data Tabs Provides access to the various parts of the project including the Station List Data Query and Station Data Menu Bar Contains menu commands with access to most features that are avallable in the HGA package Toolbar Contains several context sensitive short cut buttons for the most frequently used HGA features Project Browser Hosts a tree view listing some of the most common components of your project These include nodes for Station Groups Queries Crosstab Maps Cross Sections Reports 3D Views Station Data Borehole Log Plots and Plots Well Profile Provides a borehole log plot BHLP view for the selected station Data Grids Contains the grids for data entry and visualization Data Loading Options Provides settings for managing loading of data this is especially useful when managing a large number of stations and you want to navigate through HGA without loading the entire set of stations in the station group See Data Loading Options on page 16 for more details Status Bar Displays the program status Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst The following sections describe each of these components in greater detail 1 6 1 Data Tabs To facilitate data management th
154. 52 Gravel Gravel 7 GBS 52 69 Fine sand Fine Sand 7 GBA 69 1668 Silty clay Silt 8 6608 0 4 3 Co0a4rse Gravel Coarse Gravel 8 6B08 4 3 17 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand 8 6608 17 48 Gravel Gravel 8 6B08 18 66 Fine sand Fine Sand 8 GBO8 66 94 5ilty clay Silt 8 6808 94 106 S5i1ty to Fine Sand Sand NOTE It is recommended that you have a header in the first row of your source file to simplify data mapping in Step 2 The method of selecting a data source mainly depends on the type of the data source There are two options e Specify Import File Name quick and easy for text files spreadsheet and MS Access Database data sources on a local or network machine OR e Build a Connection String to a file using the standard Universal Data Link UDL properties dialog More appropriate for data sources on a server or network computer Specify Import File Name To specify a file directly select the radio button beside the Specify Import File Name option then click on the E Open file button to load the following dialog Importing Data using the DTS 113 Look in E My Computer Ej 3 Floppy 4 S Soft A J 0 3 D Y E Removable Disk H 0 File name fr est Files of type EE o mdb y S Access mdb enya txt csv tab asc Excel xls db Cancel Select the appropriate file type Browse to the folder containing the file Highligh
155. 565262842728 80 5578342692123 80 5589858888123 80 5601026267776 80 5619747219437 80 5632937 953774 oft Y xX lt Back Import Cancel E Help Bil Es Note This step allows you to accept reject records with warnings by selecting the warning message in the Errors Warnings grid Records with errors must be rejected to activate the importing process You can also select one or more records in the preview table and exclude them from importing into your database E Error O Waring The data is checked against three conditions namely e Proper Station Locations e Specified conditions for each field if any e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HGA in any projection system desired Importing Data using the DTS 123 Accepting or Rejecting Errors Warnings The records that fail to satisfy each of the above conditions will be indicated in the Errors and Warnings table By default all data marked as erroneous will not be imported However all warnings are ignored by default One or more of these error messages can be selected and the data affected by those errors can either be rejected or accepted Note t
156. 66 Your QC Blank duplicate and spiked samples should be entered in the same table and fields as your original samples If a Duplicate sample was collected at an existing station then create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code D You must also define a common batch ID for duplicates to indicate that they belong together If you want to compare the duplicate to its original sample you must add the appropriate Original Sample Quality Code O to each original sample If a Blank sample was collected 1t can be added as a new station and sample or as a new sample to an existing station Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code B For Spiked samples you must add two types of samples codes and results e The first will be a sample that contains the known spiked concentration for each parameter Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code ST for Theoretical Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the amount of constituent that has been added for every spiked parameter e Next add the analyzed spiked sample as a new sample Create a new sample ID Sys_sample_code and assign the appropriate Quality Code SM for Measured Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the measure amount of constituent that was recovered for every spiked parameter Both
157. A es gt Field Property Editor You can change the properties of each field using the Field Property Editor shown below By default the editor is divided into two sections Appearance and Data You can organize the settings in Alphabetical Order by selecting 1 Crosstab Queries 153 154 xi A Layout Style sheet M Source fields DataCube fields Inactive fields x dimension fields es 24 ae gt l O Appearance t ci t Caption Concentration 4 4 Format ShowPercent False GH gt ShowProgress False x x Totall abel i Width 100 E Data Aggregate Sum DisplayE xpression Expression Concentration FieldT ype Both ES SortOrder Ascending AY dimension fields chemical_name ate Aggregate Determines the object which creates an aggregate function OK Cancel Each property is described below Caption Change the caption of a field item Format Assign a field data output format string For example you can use this property to specify the number of decimal places to show e g Type 0 00 to show values to two decimal places ShowPercent Show field data as percent ShowProgress Represent field data as a progress bar for each cell In order to set this property the ShowPercent property must be enabled Total Label Assign a header for a field total Width Change the cell width of the field Aggregate Assi
158. A is equivalent to either a physical or virtual look up table Data Querying and Filtering with the Query Builder Data querying is an important feature for any environmental database It provides the ability to easily locate desired information with only a few mouse clicks HGA provides multiple methods of querying data out of your database through the Query Builder The Query Builder combines a set of tools for creating a range of simple to the most advanced queries for your projects All queries created can be saved for later use used to define Station Groups or used to filter data for reporting plotting charts and creating GIS maps 1 2 3 Data Visualization Interpretation of geologic and hydrogeologic data is made easy with the visualization modules that are provided in HGA Using these tools raw data can be transformed into 4 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst meaningful spatial data sets HGA offers a collection of standard and custom modules for interpreting vast amounts of spatial data Some of these modules are briefly described in the following sections Map Manager The Map Manager built on ESRI s MapObjects technology provides a spatial view of any set of selected data Basemaps of the site can be quickly imported allowing for meaningful interpretation of borehole and well data The Map Manager is designed in such a way that most files required for a desired map view are generated automatically The Map Ma
159. BHLP e Output Options Allow you to export or print one or all BHLPs Live Update When this feature is enabled the BHLP will automatically refresh update whenever an entity is defined or modified in the entity settings The time it takes for the BHLP to refresh depends on the volume of data being displayed on the BHLP a BHLP displaying a lot of data will take longer to refresh In this case it may be desirable to disable the automatic refresh to avoid the extended refresh times when making changes to the entity settings To do so simply uncheck the Live Update checkbox make all the necessary modifications to the entity settings and then click the Apply button to refresh the BHLP About the Interface 249 9 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The BHLP toolbar provides the controls and commands for the BHLP design The following buttons are available Save button saves the current borehole log plot Save As button saves the current borehole log plot with a new name Add button adds a new group column or plot entities depending on the currently active node Columns may be a scale interval lithology plot well construction or other features Delete button deletes the selected group column or plot series Refresh button updates the design and displays the preview of the current borehole log plot for the selected borehole Zoom in button allows you to select an interval to zoom in to and display a magnified port
160. CSV TXT ASC TAB e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB For more details on this utility please see the DTS section in Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System Export Grid All HGA data that can be displayed in any of the grids can be exported to a number of external destinations The data could be a station list from any station group a result of a query execution or any data from the data entry tabs HGA allows exporting data displayed in grids to various output formats including e Comma separated text file CSV e Extensible Markup Language XML e MS Access Database MDB e ESRI shapefile SHP e Hypertext Markup Language HTM All or part of the data currently displayed in a grid can be exported To export selected data from a grid the data must first be selected Data selection can be performed by either selecting desired rows or using the tools provided in HGA These tools include those that are used to filter data such as Filter By Selection and Hide selected rows The selected data can then be exported by either selecting the Export option from the Project menu or by right clicking in the grid and selecting the Export pop up menu item Once the file dialog appears the desired export destination can be selected by Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 4 choosing one of the file types corresponding to the supported destin
161. E This option is available for new shapes files only existing shapefiles cannot be converted Click OK when you are finished 10 2 8 Help Contents Contains the contents of the Map Manager help 10 3 Defining a Cross Section Line Use the Map Manager to define the locations of cross section lines which can then be interpreted in the Cross Section editor There are two methods for defining cross section lines Digitizing and Use Existing Polyline Each method is described below Digitizing a Cross Section Line e In the Map Manager open an existing map project or create a new map project e Select a Hydro GeoAnalyst data layer 1 e station data and ensure this is 348 Chapter 8 Map Manager visible and active selected If you do not have such a layer you may create one based on station groups that are available in your Hydro GeoAnalyst project To do this use the Layer gt Load HGA Data option to select a station group The Map Manager creates a layer with stations that are available in the group e Zoom in to the area of interest optional e Click the 4 Cross Section Line button at the right end of the toolbar or select Tools Define Cross Section Line from the Main Menu e Place the mouse cursor at the starting point of the line and click once with the left mouse button e Click again at another location to add a vertex to the line You may add one or more vertices that define the cross section line Note If you
162. E as their main SQL Server Engine If you are upgrading from MSDE to the Microsoft SQL Express please consider the following limitations when working with backup database files e You cannot open a backup database created by MSDE in an environment that is using SQL Server Express e Likewise you cannot restore a project that is using SQL Server Express with a backup database that was created with MSDE If you have used MSDE in the past and would like to continue using it simply do not install SQL Express during the HGA Installation Once the installation is complete a shortcut icon will be placed on the desktop You will be prompted to re boot your computer for the system changes to take effect this 1s necessary only if the SWS instance of SQL Express is installed 1 3 3 Uninstalling Hydro GeoAnalyst There may be instances where you will need to uninstall remove HGA from your system e g if the software is to be transferred to another computer or if you need to reinstall it on the current computer Before uninstalling the HGA software package from your system we strongly recommend you to make backup copies of all your HGA projects and databases These include your entire HGA project folder and all its contents Simply copy the Project directory and its contents to another directory If you are also uninstalling the SQL Express component make sure to also back up the SQL Server database s or else you risk permanently losing y
163. Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid e Station representation showing lithology e Imported Surfer Grid surfaces e Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps e DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces e Light source position control e Semi transparent objects e Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis e Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 12 1 About the Interface 3D Explorer may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways e In the Project Tree select a p
164. Hydro GeoAnalyst User s Manual Database Utilities Borehole logging reporting 2D Mapping and Cross Sections and 3D Visualization A A aa METE ET acer ie S PERCE REECE oa 8 E Ther 100 i Cross Section AA th Vertical Exaggeration 6 48743 a Sw i E pa pa i Bt a a a0 a delas LITA RA AIRE AMARA CIO a Semplig_Duie 3 ove i A Ja ME Coarse Gravel 20 1 F TE 200 1 Bu 100 i a Taat wo MLE ee Le map Project Laver dE Took View Select Getting Help Ghee k O A OF MAL BRST AA We Be f WOC ue 500 Lucana Er 10 3045 Do Diet contour Fo w Cuts F rapsi Eo bma i Ts E dope cola bp Fon LL 117155 OO Copla NIT El po C mimi bal C Tree bananas Co Fo igor Pesala FT Wate Dorset r z 3 i r 7 a ri r F Di trdretins Jesar H beplan fei Program Piei Hisaya Projects Dena Pregect vhf AA ad all x Pie dt Wer Objects Seting Help IPCC LALA TOC ES i aikin Date 11019000 TPE T ES M 256314 E E 11243 N EET E imit E ii Be E aare Lam binasa 4 Coord HAD 1963 UT Zona 17H Geology Datura E Hoth Maman 1300 Liri Mister Featue Courir 59 750 ee Madu Bard ES ee Gravel ar Costi Grivel ee Fires Sari E oa Clay E find ES Boulder Clay Ei Rois cha Ugh Pos Tie Puse Brom Faja E Schlumberger Water Services Copyright Information O 2010 Schlumberger Water Services All rights reserved
165. In this event you can manually select the data source or query results for the column using the Data Table Queries property In the case of Lithology select the Lithology Entities node as shown in the previous screenshot Specify Data Source First select 1f you want to use a Data table or a Query as the Data Source Then choose the respective table or data query from the list provided in the combo box next to this property as indicated in the following screenshot All fields from the selected table or query will be available for mapping to the required data fields in the column Update each Data Field as necessary The Data Fields required for a Lithology column are circled in the following figure 282 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 ES Design 3 6 Lithology E LithologyE ntities Name Value DataTable Lithology TopEntity Gravel Caption Top elevation Description DataField from BottomEntity Caption Bottom elevation i Description i DataField to i Fine Sand ImageEntity Caption Image Description Image DataField soil_type_image TextEntity Caption Text Description Text DataField soil_type IV Live update Close Export y Print y Help Note The depth point and d
166. L Server 2005 Express you cannot restore a database that was backed up using Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine 2000 MSDE Note On Windows Vista operating systems User Account Control UAC must be disabled before you can successfully restore a SQL Server database For information on how to disable UAC please refer to the installation instructions in your licensing guide Manage Databases Use this option to remove unwanted databases from the local or network instances of WHI SQL Express This option is available when HGA is first loaded and no projects have been opened The following dialog shows the options that are available Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Database Management Server waynetwhi Iv Windows NT Integrated Authentication User Name sa Password o Database whi Refresh Projecte on database whi x 3 Close E Help In this dialog select the Server and the Database that you would like to delete Once the database 1s selected a list of projects using the selected database will be listed at the bottom the project list is read only and displayed in order to assist you to decide if the selected database can be safely deleted Click on the x button to delete the selected database Click on the button to compress the file size of the database to save disk space After the database has been compressed you may continue to work with it NOTE Use caution when deleting databases since
167. L file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the HTML file Use the button to export the report to an MS Excel file A dialog will appear where you can specify a directory and filename for the XLS file Use the to export the report to an PDF file A dialog will appear where you can define the page and export settings and the filename for the PDF file Note HTML Excel and PDF export features do not support gradient coloring As a result report elements that contain a gradient appearance will export as a solid color Use the button to open the DataCube Wizard Here you can modify the crosstab query format and style as described in the previous section Use the 4 button to define modify data markers for the data points See Data Marker Settings on page 161 for more details Enable the button to have the crosstab report automatically refresh when changes are made to the format or style Use the button to manually refresh the crosstab report when the automatic refresh 1s disabled and changes are made to the format or style Use the button to access the electronic help document The Crosstab results window provides flexible management of the columns and fields Click on the button to expand the full results Click on the button to collapse the view for an overview of the results Using conventional drag and drop you can shift columns to the left or right or rows up or down
168. Land Cover Dataset High Resolution Orthoimagery Layer extent Transportation Bound aries Hydrography Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 469 470 Florida Department of Environment Protection ftp 1 ftp dep state fl us pub gis data Data GIS Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Florida Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Environmental Data Basemap Data Global Forest Watch Canada Warehouse http www globalforestwatch ca datawarehouse datawarehouse htm Data GIS Format Shapefile GRID XLS Geographic Coverage Canada Datum North American Datum of 1927 Layer Forest related data basemap data GeoPlan Center University of Florida http www fedl org Data Florida Geographic Data Library FGDL Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Floridawide and County Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Various St Johns River Water Management District http sjr state fl us programs data html Data GIS data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage St Johns River Water Management District Florida Datum NAD83 Layer Basemap Natural Resources and Images United States Geological Survey and USA Environmental Protection Agency http Mhd usgs gov index html Data National Hydrography Dataset Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage USA Layer Surface water features such as lakes ponds streams rivers springs and wells Appendices Uni
169. Manager 3 Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS provides an easy to use interface for importing data into or exporting data from a HGA project The DTS in HGA is designed to allow for efficient data transfer between the database and external applications Data may be quickly imported into new or existing projects from various formats When creating a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HG Analyst database Data may exist in sources such as MS Access SQL server Oracle databases or in text files or spreadsheets The DTS is designed to import data from these sources into the HG Analyst Project database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the project database and various other data sources during the lifetime of the project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the project database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and even other databases such as MS Access The current version of the DTS is designed to e Import data into the HGA database from such sources as e Spreadsheets e g Excel e Delimited Text files e g Comma Tab delimited text files e Other databases e g from one or more tables in a MS Access database e Export selected data to destinations such as e Spreadsheets e g Excel e Text files e Other databases e g to a table in a MS Access database e Export one or more HGA tables to an external da
170. Manager Please refer to the Surface section on page 302 for information on how to import a surface layer into a Map Project Also please see the Create Cross Section section on page 340 for information on how to create a cross section When a surface layer is present in a map project you will be prompted to select a surface layer when creating your cross section line The following dialog will display Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Select Surface xj OF Cancel This dialog contains all of the surface layers currently present in your map project Select a surface from the dropdown list box and click Ok to create the cross section Be sure to select a surface layer that covers the full extent of the cross section line Leave this dialog blank if you do not wish to use a surface layer 11 4 2 Geologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing interpretation layers that assist in defining the geology sand clay till bedrock etc at the site To draw Geologic interpretation layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse Follow the directions below e Activate make it editable the Geology interpretation from the layer manager e Select the M Polygon button from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location of the first vertex of the intended geology layer e Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and sta
171. Modify mno aS liCE ad lia 425 Scene COMMGUPATIONS aia 425 Saving and Exporting Options ssssssssssscecececcecccccocsossssssseccccecccosssossssssosesseseceeecesssssso 426 SERTO C cerea a a a a 427 Printing he3 D Mia ge ernea T a E ETE 427 13 Template Manager cornisa Zo Understanding the Template Manager ssessssssceceocccssssceeecocossssccecocoosossssseceecossssssseee 429 ADOUt th Interface nt All 430 Descriptioirot Toolbar ems li E a A 431 Template Toolbar Global Template Options occoccccccncncnonnnonononnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 431 ables and Fields Toolbar ita ae ANEA R EEA EEE EREN EEES 434 Working With the Template Manager sssssssececcccccssssceecocoossssccecooosossscececoosssssseeeosoo 436 Modityine Tables and View SSI Sson E E E 436 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services PARA eh leaets E ats snake ta oabievsiecl asian ts lalninta ATAR 436 Table Property Se lOs ara Sa 437 Defining Table Relationships a io 440 Modityme Freldsand View Setunies cn 442 Fe KOC Piel roncon E N 444 Manacina FemplateS irte E EEEa 445 Ercatinesa MEW TENA AUC ea a a a a 445 Creatine a copy of the curent template ani bi 445 Savine a template as delault template a 446 Exporting the current template as a Database template ccccccccnoooononnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 446 TA AA PDONGICES nati iii a Appendix A Hydro GeoAnalyst File Types scsssssssscccccccsssssssssscccsssc
172. NOTE It is important to know and select the correct project system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates Coordinate Exclusion Filter The DTS also provides the option to indicate excluded coordinates Excluded coordinates could be coordinates used as place holders in the source file in cases where coordinates are unknown For example the value 9999 may be entered if the X or Y coordinate does not exist or is unknown If this is the case these coordinate values should be entered in the appropriate field In the screen shot shown above the value 9999 is entered for both X and Y coordinates In this case stations with these values will be excluded from the import These coordinates could also represent erroneous coordinates Add Stations to Group Another feature provided in the Settings tab of the DTS is that of grouping new stations as desired The DTS lists all station groups available for the project All newly imported stations will be added to the Project station group by default If selected these stations will also be inserted in one or more of the station groups listed in this tab You can also enter a name of a new station group in the last row and the stations will be inserted to this new group if desired Duplicate Stations Since Stations can use an ID as the unique identifier the DTS allows you to store stations with duplicate names in your database Duplicate Station names are common in
173. Name e Station Coordinate X e Station Coordinate Y e Station ground surface elevation Elevation If plotting stations on a map or cross section is desired then the following fields are required e Station X co ordinate e Station Y co ordinate e Station ground surface elevation Elevation Station coordinates are stored in the Stations Table in latitude longitude format by default However each project may contain its own projection and coordinate system settings so that station locations may be entered and displayed in an alternate format e g UTM State Planar etc These options are available in the Template Editor Stations can be added modified or deleted through the Station List tab The Station List tab displays a limited number of fields for viewing and editing for a more detailed Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts 25 26 view of each station the Station Data tab must be used the information displayed in the Stations Table can be found in the Description Data Category within this tab in the Location table as shown below HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst ProjectsiDemo_Project LANE A Eio x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help Ja ea2q Sh xBaAl RGB BO Se A in Ml Station Groups a Station List BR Data Query Station Data onl Project Data Category Monitoring Wells poros Select Station X m Y m Elevation m TOC m
174. OE A T A nine agent eee eee E E OR 258 Depth interval Dascd Column a add 260 PP PEE E A E E E E EN 261 Lthology COMA SI ASA S 262 O 262 Well Construction COMA di UI hotest alone agement 263 E 263 Dept Dependent PIOS a iia 271 A E E E 274 Pictore Colunn A E 5 atte ls oktca daria tah aaten dua shatidh tals inl aatn siden ltd uu han Nreak staat ZIF Designing a Borehole Log Plot sssssseeeecccsssssceeccoccosssssceccoccosssssccceoeosssssceceocssssssseeeesso 278 Addis Lutong y Colier a taa 279 Select Colum pE saora E E A A AO 280 Edit Columa Properties lit DS 281 SPeCily Data SOULE A o 282 Add WelConstucion Colhtimni sec o a Adnan neha atiace 284 Add PIOU COMAS A ia 284 Add PIOUS CLIC Sx olas EEO occiso fado 285 Re order BALE COMMS set tii A ln 288 Savine the Borehole Loe Plot cananea OEA NEES 288 Saving a borehole log plot design template oooonnccncccncccnnnnnnonncnnonnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 288 Exporting a borehole log plot design template ooooononnncnnnncnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnonnnnnononnanonnnnnnnnnos 288 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting sssssssscccsssssssssssssccccscsessesees 289 Generating a borehole OS report ii A voce we es eee dn ad A GES 289 10 Map Manager iia Ll ADOUE TNE INTENT ACC caca urs eustuecacaesussnecadeaceeacseussessasvanscacteecasaseuassueauvecnses 292 Groupia LAS cie 294 Descriptiom or Toolbar Tenis do 295 Copyright Schlumberger Water Servic
175. Once a data package is selected or created the data source can be defined The format of the source file must be Records as Rows which means each new record must be in a new row in addition if the file contains Header information the Header must be in the first row If the source format is a database then in most cases these requirements will be satisfied However 1f Excel or Text formats are used ensure that the necessary formatting is completed before using the DTS A few examples are shown below The following example demonstrates an Excel file containing station location data note the format records as rows and the header information in the first row Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System 1 2 1 GBO1 536012 7 4613630 333 5 334 5 E 2 B02 535956 7 4613650 336 337 4 a GB03 535679 7 4613670 336 337 5 4 5604 535753 7 4613620 132 133 E 4 5605 535645 7 4613660 334 335 El 6 5606 535543 7 401360 40 5 341 5 5 7 GEO 535452 7 4013630 345 344 g a 5600 535295 7 4613640 339 5 340 5 10 4 5609 535166 7 4613660 339 5 340 5 11 10 6610 539095 4013630 340 349 The following example demonstrates a CSV file containing lithology information for a few stations note the format and the header information in the first row example_file Notepad _ Oy ES File Edit Search Help ID Name from_ to_ form_desc soil type GBA 8 6 5 Coarse Gravel Coarse Gravel 7 GBS 6 5 26 Fine to med sand Hedium Sand GBA 26
176. Query Builder For more details please see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 389 Store Soft Data Points Whenever a layer intersects with a station at only one point 1t could be because of one of the following reasons e The layer truly touches the well at only one location e g pinch out or e There is no contact with the well In either case the following options are available e Consider the actually intersecting point as the top elevation and insert NULL for both the thickness and bottom elevation e Extend the depth of the station fictitiously within the bounds of the cross section to determine the location of the other point These extensions are known as Soft Data Points If this point can not be found within the bound the layer will be considered to be a zero thickness layer with thickness of NULL Save All Contacts Some stations may be crossed by a layer but may not be involved in the interpretation Description of Menu Items 373 e g bad wells or data in those wells did not make sense etc and as such the following options are available e Consider all intersection points as valid contacts this is the option Save All Contacts e Only store contacts where there are vertices within the well e g user snapped to intervals or clicked within a well and created a vertex To do this disable the option Save All Contacts Limitations Although the cross section component currently allows creat
177. Query see Data Query Example on page 132 5 2 2 Station Group Queries Station Group Queries provide the foundations for new Station Groups these queries can be built and executed for the purpose of organizing the stations into specialized groups To create a Station Group Query select this option from the upper left section of the Query Builder window Then define the necessary conditions generate the SQL statement and execute the query Once the query has been created and saved the query will appear as a new node in the project browser under the Station Groups node NOTE Station Group Queries do not have options for modifying the display fields or advanced grouping options For more information on how to build a Station Group Query see Station Group Query Example on page 142 5 3 Creating Queries 5 3 1 Data Query Example 132 Follow the steps below to create a data query e If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Data Query as the type in the upper left corner of the window e In the toolbar click on the New button and the following window will appear Chapter 5 Queries Creating Queries x Name Description DE Cancel E Help e Enter a Name for the new query e g TOC Exceeds 320m for this example and a Description optional e Click OK NOTE Query names should contain alphanumeric characters on
178. S Scale ScaleEntities DataTable E Depthe ntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField Select the data table or query and the depth entity for the column using the combo boxes provided Selecting the field for the depth entity will create markers at the depths for which data is entered in the specified table or query At this point you can select what is displayed beside or in these markers Right click in the settings field and select Add Entity DataT able E Depthe ntity Caption Description DataF eld Please Choose an Entity IrageE nity OF Cancel Adding a Text Entity will allow you to display text in the column such as descriptions or numeric values An Image Entity will allow you to display a graphical representation such as an image photo or formation pattern in addition to text BHLP Columns 257 258 In the Settings frame select the field that contains the appropriate information for the entity you have chosen DataT able 64 in E log E DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth Caption Text Description Text DataF eld Value Settings The Depth Point based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Depth node from the BHLP Settings windo
179. SELECT FROM pararmeterresult WHERE chemical name Benzene Select a Query H Description H Geologic Description E Well Construction E Soil Testing E Soil Sampling E Monitoring Event H Mining E sploration H Geophysics E Well History 1 M w 1 952 Benzene 50 1 4 1 93 Benzene 1 MMW 1 9 Benzene 11 98 Benzene 2 MMW 3 92 Benzene 2 Mw 393 Benzene 2 WwW 3 94 Benzene 2 WwW 3 95 Benzene 3 DWw 2 92 Benzene 3 0Ww 2 98 Benzene 4 O W 4 93 9 Benzene 4 OW 4 94 Benzene 4 O w 4 96 Benzene 4 OW 4 97 Benzene T WO 2 12 Benzene 10104 ug L 11 W171 416 Benzene 35 ug L 4 OW 4 96 3 Benzene 1 6 W 06_476 Benzene 310 ug L 6 W 06 6 9 Benzene 200 ug l Source Condition Project r Advanced Close Help Category Event Rows 114 Time O 0 0 31 NOTE The table names e g Parameter Result specified in the SQL statement must be entered as they appear in the database e g parameter_result You can check the table Creating Queries 145 146 Category Event Rows 1775 Time 0 0 0 125 names by referring to the Template Manager Delete Command The Delete Command can be used to remove records from the database For example if you want to delete all records from the Parameter Result table with the chemical name benzene enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab DELETE FROM parameter_result WHERE chemical_name Benzene e Next click the Execute Query
180. Step 3 Importing Data into the Database Import MON file data E Ioj x m Import data Notes A M Select Channel 1 Select one or more enabled channels Iv Level Temperature T Conductivity T Flowman selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name Station lt the checkbox in the ctp_070503132 CTD Diver 13 NO1 B1667 312 import column see Remarks below 3 Click on the Import button when ready Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination v station AO gt eee o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there lt Back Import Cancel a Help From the Select Channel frame select a parameter 1 e Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman NOTE A selection is not necessary if all the channels are inactive greyed out HGA will read the station name in each MON file and attempt to find an appropriate station match in the current HGA project database If one is found you may proceed Otherwise the field will display a color and you must specify the appropriate destination station name The color displayed in the information table represents t
181. The selected stations for the cross section are highlighted in this Map preview window e Coordinates Displays the X Z coordinate for the current mouse cursor location e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section window 11 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Cross section editor contains a toolbar with short cut buttons to some of the About the Interface 355 commonly used features Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance For example the option to add a vertex 1s active only when a polygon or a line is selected ll Save button saves the current cross section project Print button sends the current cross section view to the report editor he Selection Pointer feature is used for selecting objects in the active interpretation E ll Draw Polygon feature is used for drawing a polygon or a rectangle in the active layer Draw Line feature is used for drawing a model layer line in the selected layer Delete Selected Object feature deletes the selected object shape from the AL Add Text features is used for adding annotation to the selected layer currently activate layer A Add Vertex feature is used for adding a vertex to the selected object polygon or line This button is activated o
182. XDOPUNS Query Results ciiiecs stericicccsiccesiveeeelcccucusctssuvcctaccceatenissecutasoccuestetevestascvenceneieec 149 Prmtins Chery Results itinerantes ias 149 SA A O 151 TOUCH ASS A A paced pid tph nb dcewh nee 151 Crean a Crossta DUES tn aia cintia MiS 151 LAO olaaa 153 A A E r Seeman abet dean A Gece acaageontumons 156 AUTO BOP dadas eiabis 156 Generale he REDO asiosio a S dile 157 Crosstab Table Display Sein OS ia os 159 Data Marker Sens a r a a S 161 Printing Crosstab Repon S naa E A 162 6 Quality Control rinitis 109 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis ccsssssssscccccccssssssscsscccccccccsssssssssccsssssssess 166 Defining Quality Codes for Data eases eect Aiea howler iii 166 Data REGU It CIC A A 167 Define A New Lab Quality Template sssscssscccssssssssssssccccccccccccssssssssccscssssesees 168 Check Duplicates Seno Sito E A 169 CHECK Spiked SENOS al id 170 Check Blanks SENOS aida diode 171 Applying a Lab Quality Template sscssssscccssssssssssssccccccsccccsssssssscccsssscesssscsecs 172 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Mappins Predial ee eee ne 173 Generate lt A tear EE EET 173 Export Quality Control Analysis Results ccooooooononnnnccnnononnnononononnnnccnnnnnononnononinnccnnannnnos 175 A II aa TT About the Interface caai ait aie 178 Descrpuomor Destener Toolbar Mems sii ibaiois 179 Viewer Window SeN S aaa ii ds 180 ACI MOS T E case aecniaieaene 181
183. _ Odor lithology soil_type formation_name lithology from_ formation_unit F lithology soil_type moisture comment ha Source Condition Project n Advanced Close Help Field Name lithology soil_type Type STRING Rows gen Time 0 0 0 15 Enclosing the two or more conditions in parentheses allows you to further refine the query criteria Use AND or OR operators inside and outside the groupings to combine the conditions so as to obtain the best results For the example above the query will return all stations in which at least one lithology interval begins below 30 meters AND contains clay OR 1f the stations have at least one lithology interval that begins below 50 m AND contains Silt e Press the Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Press the a Save button to save the query e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the figure below Creating Queries 137 E Query Builder Of x xa Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT t0 id AS id t0 x as x t0 y as y tO name as name FROM Station as t
184. a i Apply OF Cancel The Interval Series can be shown hidden and the Fill color and Transparency can be Set 9 2 7 Picture Column x 2 Visible Column Options sv Lithal E ve Pattern Symbol Descriptio OA i Visible i Visible Font Width 72 100 Use numeric format Image Draw Mode Centerec Format Genet Humber of digits Help Apply OF Cancel The Picture column settings are shown in the above screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Picture node from the BHLP Settings window The Picture frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 253 The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the image pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode BHLP Columns 277 The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box Please refer to the Depth Point Based Column page 256 section for more information on this option 9 3 Designing a Borehole Log Plot 278 In Hydro GeoAnalyst only the borehole log plot templates are stored This is done so that the data for th
185. a 24 SACOM A A A A 25 Station TOUDE caa aE a a ee ea 26 Data Cate sones tada E A 28 DAE EM too 30 A A O A EA 30 Station Data Tab o di oia 31 Data Transter Sy ten DTS anti taido 31 Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar sssccccccssssscsccccssssssccccccsssssccccccsssccccccccssscsccees 32 O A eran emt erin nee ee et em onrer nt eee 33 NEW ss ech ccc racine ou il 33 O tang ealra tats luanaavas hed itniecl satenuduantal tite oledea uy sania enn cedias co uuveipideameemnanens 33 OpenT om Back as eds 34 A A rac nea nee tne cha ten cate aceasta a enna mia ae Guan aus hase dacs aks octottnanie ala eames 35 PRO A cot season E E A E 35 A PPP ne he tatn geese aa eeus acacaae ssuraaaeaed laces sate neddu a E ads 35 22101 E AEO EEEE A O I N 4 PODET S a ie Dette Smentace a Sas mame ee dae ues ela au saan sino wtes hanes nad sre ctaneet oan ieee 48 PNE e A pens ances auehds a ataian ta eesahoaiel lt a hoaeaatinaahaneeamamnnenunneatknares 49 A acenasmatananaaeeiecawanense cane beucaber 49 S E oie ch lee la cc ee fa est a Ne dete cesta deh le act rl E hes ceca am 49 OS sre esi sates sa see ws cee E E pate us neato cates een tc nae ounnetcen te ones 49 C Uer tec sel etait cd cicada A Sina doaeG Deane Ga GUM teas iateel apts wardeietalatet am teateasteaiach 50 BAG Ce stata ts eng ahs A a a a tea naa 50 Find ene aa as ses ate ea ea vedere E coe a stand ease nuaneN cane wasn 50 VIEW detente ach old 51 PrO DROW SCL lt A O 51 Well Bronie suspendido ist eats
186. a connection string First a data package must be selected or a new one created from the Package Name field in the first line Then select a folder a file format and enter a filename Once this has been defined Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 4 2 2 Select Tables to Export The second window as shown below requires you to select the tables to export In addition to selecting the source and destination tables this interface also allows selecting the desired destination fields to which data from the selected table will be exported Data transfer system Export OF x Step 2 Data mapping Source Destination Category Source table Destination table Description v station bd test_export csv Select the fields for data exporting M 5 Y Y x DOUBLE degree M x degree y DOUBLE degree M y DOUBLE degree zone LONG f Y zone LONG e X STRING MV ta STRING elevation DOUBLE m IV elevation DOUBLE m oc DOUBLE m Y toc DOUBLE m X depth DOUBLE E depth DOUBLE region STRING M region STRING Total of records 147 lt Back Next gt Cancel EJ Help Unit Conversion By default the data from those fields with units will be exported in the same units as the source However any unit from the same unit category can be selected and the appropriate conversions will be made by the DTS For instance a ground surface elevation that is st
187. a report template e Copy window to clipboard 11 1 About the Interface The Cross Section Editor may be launched from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click Tools gt View Cross Section from the Hydro GeoAnalyst main menu e Select a cross section from the Cross Sections node then click on the Show Create Cross Section button on the toolbar e In the Project Browser double click on an existing cross section from the Cross Sections node The Cross Section Editor may also be launched from the Map Manager in one of the following ways e Activate the cross section lines layer from the layer manager and select a Cross section line by clicking on the desired cross section e To create a new cross section select the Create Cross Section menu option from the Tools menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button on the toolbar This option will create a new cross section based oe selected cross section line e To open an existing cross section based on an existing cross section line click on the Show Create Cross Section button li on the toolbar This opens the cross section editor with the corresponding cross section e Click on the Cross Section tab in the upper right corner of the window see figure below to activate an existing cross section from a list of cross sections that are available for your project The Cross Section Editor window is shown in the figure bel
188. a typical borehole log report BHLP there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of columns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any point thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HGA by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are related to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 247 9 1 About the Interface 248 The BHLP may be launched from HGA in several ways e Existing BHLPs can be opened from the Borehole Logs node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired borehole log plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option e To create a new BHLP template right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser and select the New pop up menu op
189. a using the DTS 117 118 Data Transfer System Import of x z Fields with identical names will be mapped automatically for others select a source field from the pick list Step 2 Data M ore In each source table stations must be identified by an ID Source Destination Table Category Destination table sheet ind Description station Map source fields to destination fields Conditions unknowr unknowr m m qT oc depth DOUBLE 3 CO Requires a unit to be selected C Required field Foreign key O Linked Fields Total of records 15 lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Select the appropriate source field from the list In the example shown above the appropriate field is Elev since it should be mapped to the field Elevation in the Station destination table Select the appropriate Unit for the field if applicable Fields that are shaded orange require a unit selection NOTE The units for station X Y co ordinates will be defined in Step 3 of the import routine Check the Use box beside the appropriate field to include this field for importing Repeat this for other fields until all necessary fields have been mapped to fields in the Destination table NOTE As a minimum one field in the source table must be mapped to the primary key field in the destination table The primary key field is shaded in green and
190. a voce secepcastecseecebecaseasseccanceatwusoeaers 92 Loadine the Project Wizard di 93 Step k Set Database EnvVirOnmMenil ii Ns 93 Option le Selectserver and Database A O A 95 Option 2 Build Connections tano aura aldo col 96 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables ci ita iran 99 Selecting the Database Template for your project ccccccnncnccnnnnnnononnnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnannnnnnno 100 Step 3 5Set Project Properties and Location evito Ee ee 101 Modtiyine Project Propere S aia iaa 105 Connect li a ence teen asuera nna 106 Miscellaneous COLIN OS lo raid 106 4 The Data Transfer System o LOD SARUM CHS DIS aaa ai 109 Importing Data using the DTS cisscevsceessdeescesasiaccesatesssesssteadencdsnsecsastoossenascoosesaceessseasteade 111 Choose a Data SOURCE iio 111 Data Transter Packace DEP cirine inna a o 111 Select Data S OUNCE dd lcd lditca bas 112 Data Mappe a oleae aa R 115 Data Requirements nacos 116 A a a aa A O me ARR naar mC ar 117 Howto Map Held sa ic Scents A 117 WOE CON VELSI ON saraet nEn E O E telex semanoneeonnaneaeneuautoensdaaeuebcsemt doinecus 119 POU SC LCi alsa eats ch sc naeriira des audi coan soma tino an wall uaa esau senses atts idanndaeaic enna batnede sitet ausoead us 119 Station Related SC UU OS casita a E 120 PEOICCHOM SCLIN SS criba lorca llana laica lio ddr dpiio 121 Coordinate Exclusi n Pl A E A 121 Add Stations to TU is 121 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import o
191. ach parameter with available spiked values and calculates the Percent Recovery Records that are less than the specified Percent Recovery will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 174 Chapter 6 Quality Control The results for Duplicates analysis are displayed below EDISE 12 0000 AN PALTA 10000 AM This analysis compares all concentrations measured in the duplicate measured D sample to 1ts duplicate original O sample and calculates the Percent Difference and the CV Records that exceed the specified Percent Difference or exceed the specified Coefficient of Variation will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template 6 4 1 Export Quality Control Analysis Results To export the results of your Lab Quality Analysis to a MS Excel spreadsheet click the Export Results button and enter a filename for your exported data Generate OC Results 175 176 Chapter 6 Quality Control Plotting The plotting component in Hydro GeoAnalyst allows users to create time series plots of data stored in the HGA database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series X Y plots using data from data queries Display X Y plots as a line or bar chart Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Display non detec
192. address http www swstechnology com support_software_faqs php Please consult the FAQ website and the Help User manual as your first resource If you cannot find the answer please contact our technical support and they will be happy to assist you You may contact SWS at Schlumberger Water Services 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws supportOslb com Web www swstechnology com Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 475 14 8 Appendix H Configuring Geotransformation Settings Introduction A Geotransformation is a mathematical operation that takes the coordinates of a point in one geographic coordinate system and returns the same point in coordinates of another geographic coordinate system Hydro GeoAnalyst supports one stage horizontal geotransformations between different geographic coordinate systems This is required for the following two reasons e Hydro GeoAnalyst stores all spatial data 1 e station x y coordinates in the GCS WGS 1984 projection system lat and long coordinates When data is imported Hydro GeoAnalyst converts the spatial data into GCS WGS 1984 coordinates Likewise when data is displayed in HGA it converts the data from GCS WGS 1984 to the original projection system defined in the project settings In order for HGA to store and display your data correctly an appropriate geotransformation has to be defin
193. administrator may also set passwords for various users in the project To load this setting e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node in the tree view e Click on the amp Set Password button The following dialog will appear User Access Level Management 91 Mew pazzword Confirm pazzword OF Cancel Enter the New Password in the first line Confirm the new password in the second line Click OK when you are finished to apply the new password and close the dialog NOTE If an administrator password is lost it cannot be retrieved You are recommended to keep the project administrator password in a safe place or to create multiple project administrators for multiple users for both the projects and on an application level as a backup 3 1 6 Exporting PLSD Once you have defined a security document for a project users user groups access rights these are saved to the project database These settings can be re used in future projects by exporting the current database template Upon exporting the PLSD will be saved and will be included in new projects created with this specific database template 3 2 Using the Project Manager 92 This chapter presents information on how to create new projects and modify the properties of existing projects HGA is designed to manage databases storing data for multiple projects A project in HGA refers to a set of data with common elements Some of t
194. age Silas Viewer Window Design Piol Ceesigreer E PIE maigu multiolepaott Sine Calcium Time Series Plot Sodium Time Series Plot odum Chinle 120 E y a aveo l Suge 110 T Pa 554 de 4 100 rm PH ia 10 S as i 4 th E ae AH i3 J i 1 i rn tr ER 35 ni Iik Aa i i a F H wf it y dd fl i s TE Ea eM T a ia 10 IWS IAI UA VAOD Designer i J Sampling Date Toolbar AE ee Number of Columns 2 Humbe of Rows 2 hlorida Ti aries Pl Sulfate Time Series Plot A 10 240 EX E 22 200 Plot 20 Settings i E and Data a 100 Source w Bll 40 i ARE E noo a say 12611359 Sarpy Cie 100 1260907 12600 1250001 nan S3mplibg_Dato web j The name ol the plot paga zia re fee The plot window contains the following items e Plot Page Design Tree A list of all available plot page designs plots and series such as Lines and Standards e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the plot design e Plot Settings and Data Source Contains the settings for the selected entity 178 Chapter 7 Plotting and data mappings e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the plot page design 7 1 1 Description of Designer Toolbar Items The plot designer toolbar provides the controls for designing the plot page The following buttons are available Leu Save button saves the current plot design H Save As button saves the current plot design as a new name Add button provides two op
195. ain Choose Domain Create Cancel E Help The gridded data can be represented as the following Contour Types e Contour lines e Color shaded map e Color zebra zonations Select the desired Contour type and enter a name for the layer For each type there are additional settings that can be accessed by clicking on the Settings button See the sections below for more details on these settings Data to be contoured e Select a Field that contains the data you want to contour e Define the Min and Max values or accept the defaults Interpolation Settings e Under Interpolator Settings select the interpolation method choose from Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance or Kriging To use the advanced interpolation settings click the Advanced Settings button and advanced options will be displayed as shown below for Natural Neighbor Description of Menu Items 323 324 Interpolator Options ICE Values a P Start 80 5713902578462 End 20 54004651 40058 m Nodes 50 Start r 43 46741103 23148 End Y 43 464907541 59692 YY Nodes 50 Use Log Interpolation Dl Restrict Min Value O Restrict Max Value Dl Value Min Value Max Real Min Real Max Mags Mag r Mag No Value 995 0 Allow Extrapolation Sdip Tautness_1 1 5 Tautness 2 Fi Use Gradient O j OF Cancel Least easting Ast et ooo oS ee ee alta AH You may modify the interpolation settings then click OK to return to the main window For
196. alues into that number of equal intervals Clicking on the symbol beside each interval will load the standard Point Style dialog allowing you to choose a specific symbol and or color for each interval See Properties on page 300 Color may also be specified as a spectrum using the Ramp function Start Color End Color a Start Size 5 End Size 5 OF Cancel Description of Menu Items 317 You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box This dialogue also allows you to specify the size of the symbols or if you wish the start and end size for a range Click OK to return to the renderer screen At the bottom of the Renderer dialog there is a toolbar with additional options These are described below Fx voOo From left to right the function of these buttons are e Add a new row to the renderer table with a new value and symbol color e Delete the selected row from the renderer table e Order the values by Ascending order e Order the values by Descending order e Reverse the order of the colors symbol lowest will be flipped to highest and highest will be flipped to the lowest When you are finished click OK again to confirm the rendere
197. ame for the new query e g TOC Elevation Exceeds 325 m In the lower left corner of the Query window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then the combo box below will become activated From here select the appropriate Station Group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database Expand the tree on the left side of the window Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below XH amp e Station Group Query Data Query Select a Query TOCElevationexceeds325m T Description E Location Station Name T Elevation tag station type total depth depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Source Condition Project v Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression station id station name station station y station toc station elevation ofp X V Wap and BHLP Re ady V Use current projection system elevation Conditions Operator Expression Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters
198. and set for editing Text Provides the option to add text labels to a map layer This option is only available if a text layer is selected and set for editing Information Provides a dialog containing information about the selected station or other objects such as contour lines an example is shown below xj Rec Ho 31 Pe Pigg Sale ee ee ee HID 31 NAME 1831 ELEVATION 346 ETOC a47 TEH Save Close 53 Help To load the Information dialog e Select a layer containing HG Analyst station data e Select Information from the Tools menu or click on the Information button in the toolbar e Click once on any station within the selected layer This window will display Station ID Name Elevation TOC and any other fields depending on the layer type If there are stations that share the same ID and are hidden behind the selected station then the scroll arrow buttons in the lower left corner can be used to view the information for other stations 338 Chapter 8 Map Manager NOTE The information tool can only be used on shape layers that are visible and active Measure Provides an option to measure distances on the map window To use this utility e Select Measure from the Tools menu or click on the 2 Measure button in toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the start point for the line The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair e Click once with the left mouse button to start the line e D
199. and time value The View Settings section of the interface allows all users to define e A name for the selected field A Default value Data display format Unit for data entry whenever applicable Validation Depth rules A list of values to be used for the field Working With the Template Manager 443 The name for the field provided in the View Settings is the one that will be displayed in Hydro GeoAnalyst Whenever the field s data type allows a unit for data entry can be set to something different from that which is in the database For instance 1f a well depth is set to use the British Imperial system of units e g feet in the database and the new data to be entered is in the metric unit system e g meters the unit in the View Settings section can be set to be in the metric system All data entered in this system will be converted to the appropriate unit system used in the database The Template Manager also allows providing validation rules for the selected field If provided these rules will be used to protect the user from entering erroneous data into the database In Hydro GeoAnalyst all data that does not comply with these rules 1s highlighted with a yellow background In some cases it may be convenient to pre define a list of values for some fields For example instead of typing chemical names for each record you may want to pick from a pre defined list In order to link to a field s data source to a lis
200. any symbol from all true type fonts that may be available on your system If the latter is selected you will have to select the desired font from the Font combo box and the desired symbol from the Symbol combo box Choose a symbol size from the combo box in the upper right corner Finally the symbol Fill color may be chosen from a color palette If a border around the symbol is desired select the check box beside Border and provide a border color Statistics Displays statistics for the selected data field of a selected layer These include Count Maximum Minimum Sum Mean and Standard Deviation as shown in the figure below Statistics x Field Count i 8 Masinnum 346 0000 Minircure 3320000 Sum E103 0000 00 Mean 239 0556 o Std Deviation EE OF Description of Menu Items 315 Renderer Provides options for a Map Renderer The Map Renderer allows assigning labels to objects on the map layers B g x BA Pb Background Symbo W Show Background E Cancel A new Renderer may be added by clicking on the H Add button The following dialog will appear with the available Renderers from which you can select Renderer Type Ea Typ C Value Renderer Label Renderer OF Cancel e The Graduated Renderer provides a way of classifying features into categories or classes by drawing different symbols for features based on numeric attribute values and their ranges e The Value Rende
201. apefiles be kept in the same folder as the current map project By default Map projects are created in the Map sub folder of the current Project folder Shapefile Provides options for opening a map layer The Map Manager is able to open any shapefile that has a projection system already assigned to it These shapefiles include all types of ESRI shapefiles polygons lines points and text Once a map layer is opened it will appear in the Layer Manager and is added to the current Map Window If the selected shapefile contains numeric attribute data the Set Field Precision data will appear on your screen For more information on this dialog please refer to Setting Field Precision on page 306 Surface Provides options for importing 3D surface layers The following surface files are supported e Surfer grid grd version 6 and 7 e DEM DEM e ESRI ASCII asc e Text txt Upon selecting this option an Open dialog will display shown below Chapter 8 Map Manager DEM_Canada El AF AL txt E AFA1_grid txt NED E Bedrock txt raw ESRI Format binarw grid File grd Surfer calpts grd Files of type All supported files grd dem asc txt Cancel ZA Locate and select a surface file and select Open The following dialog will display where you can specify a Name Projection Type Projection system and Description The surface projection system must be the same as the project
202. at you may modify the SQL string here and update the report design After the report is saved a node will be created in the Project Browser under the Reports node with the appropriate report file name Currently HGA requires that all reports be saved under the Reports folder which in turn 1s created within the project folder Although the Report Manager allows you to open reports from any folder only those saved under the Reports folder of your project will be displayed in the project browser Creating Reports based on a Data Query Follow the directions below to create a report containing a Data Query e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the project browser 1f no queries are available create a Query using the Query Manager e Execute the Query in order to see the results e Press the Print button ts from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved Creating Reports 225 Creating Parameter Query Reports A parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog box that prompts you for crit
203. ata Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Mag X X co ordinate magnification factor Mag_Y Y co ordinate magnification factor Mag Z Z co ordinate magnification factor No_ Value Value assigned to nodes located outside the convex hull of the data points where interpolation is not performed Allow_Extrapolation Is a flag to use extrapolation for nodes outside the convex hull of the polygon formed by the data points In this case linear regression is used to fit a plane through the data set and calculate the interpolated value This should be used with caution since extrapolation is less reliable than interpolation Sdip Calculate the aspect and slope at each grid node This can be used to augment the elevation information The aspect is measured in degrees or radians clockwise from north and the slope is measured positively below the horizontal plane in degrees or radians Tautness_1 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Tautness_2 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 461 Use_Gradient Blends the gradient calculation and the linear interpolation calculation to produce a smoother surface 14 4 3 Kriging 462 Kriging 1s a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anisotropy and underlying tr
204. ata Click the Create button to create the file The grid file will be created in the HGA project s folder in the Surface sub folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Surface test grd NOTE As with contours you can select an interpolation method and customize interpolation settings by clicking on the Advanced Settings button Display Data This feature allows you to display data in a plot or tabular format on the map for the current points map layer Fields are based on points data loaded from Station Groups or Data Queries created using the Query Builder You may define conditions for fields and highlight rows in the tables that violate the conditions For plots the templates are selected from available Chart templates To activate this feature first select a layer that contains points data 1 e a data query or a station group from the Layer Control When you select the Display Data option from the Layer menu the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 327 328 Display Data i x ei Samplel Table with YOC exceedencez lo F Data Settings Display Settings OK Cancel 53 Help This dialog allows you to manage the various layouts for the map layer In the first column show hide the layout by setting the Visible status Define the Name in the second column In the third you may optionally enter a Description Click on the Add butt
205. ate speed 398 AVI file 400 B Background Color 369 Bar Chart Color Settings 185 Bar Color Schema 185 Best fit lines 193 BHLP Columns Depth 256 Depth Interval 260 Lithology 262 Picture 277 Scale 254 Well Construction 263 Bind to surface 408 Bit 443 Border Line Visibility 261 Borehole Log Plotter Columns 250 Default Settings 252 General 247 Interface 248 Toolbar 250 Boundary Snapping Buffer 368 Breaking Value 191 Buffer Distance 349 C CAD 311 CanGrow 208 CanShrink 208 Caption 207 Casing ID 433 Change Well Width 364 Character Map 269 Charts Manager 235 Index Classification 185 CloseBorder 210 Code Page 348 Coefficient of Variation CV 170 Collapse All 52 Collate 221 Color Rendering Classify 325 Ramp 326 Color Shading 325 Column Options 253 Components Overview 77 Compression 401 Compton 104 Connectivity 48 Contour Line Settings 325 Contours 323 Control Points 310 Cross Section Annotations 390 Export to image 359 Grid 372 Print 360 Vertical Axis 364 Vertical Exaggeration 365 View 3D 366 Cross Section Editor General 353 Interface 354 Toolbar 355 Cross Section Interpretations Drawing 378 Querying 389 Cross Section Layers Edit 381 Cross Section Line Digitize 348 Cross Section Vertices Add 360 Delete 361 Link 361 Cross Sectional Slice 424 Custom values 417 D Data Access Controls 214 Data Categories 28 436 Data Display Controls 215 Data Entry 30 Data Link Properties 97 115 Data Querie
206. ated from within the Plot Designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Plot Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of the Plot Designer window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screen shots NOTE If you select Send all plots to report a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a plot for just the selected station use the Send current plot to report option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template for yourself 196 Chapter 7 Plotting Select Template i x Name v plot report landscape lot report vortrait s OK Cancel Help Click the OK button to load the plot s in the Report viewer The Report may be printed directly by clicking on the 2 Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the j Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the ahs Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designi
207. ategory and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Mapping Mapping fields from the LAS file to the database is described below Select one field from the source file in the left frame Select the appropriate matching field from destination in the right by expanding the appropriate data category and table Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Preview grid at the bottom of the window Repeat these steps for additional fields To remove the mapping for a selected field Select the appropriate row in the Preview grid Click on the Delete Mapping button Units Due to the flexible nature of the LAS file there may exist one or more parameters with units that are not supported in HGA as such unit conversion will not be possible during the import Where the unit categories and units exist HGA will attempt to do unit conversion and import the data If the destination field does not support the selected source units there will be no conversion and the data will not be imported For this reason 1t may be necessary to modify the field settings for your database schema before proceeding with the import For more details see Chapter 13 Modifying Fields and View Settings When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst i Import LAS File Step 4 Select coordinate sy
208. ation listed earlier in this section Properties This menu item will load a window displaying the properties for the current project Once a project is created there are options to modify some of the project settings These are explained below Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivity settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity ME E x Select Server and Database This dialog displays the server and Server stv F database hosting your data eas Although the dialog allows all Y Windows NT Integrated Authorization power users to modify the ema connectivity settings great care nido a must be taken as any improper setting may corrupted your project Passwort Modify these settings only if the Database demo_vow v database is moved to another server is renamed or user access rights are changed Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info False Initial Catalog demo_vaw Data Source srv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible False Help For more details on the Project Properties please refer to Chapter 4 Miscellaneous Settings This
209. ations within a rectangle that 1s drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Polygon button allows selecting all stations within a polygon that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select In Ellipse button allows for selecting all stations within an ellipse that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select Along Line button allows for selecting all stations within a buffer distance of a line that 1s drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select All button selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Select None button de selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations 1s visible and selected from the Layer Manager and at least one station has been 297 selected Cross Section Line button allows the location and buffer distance for cross section lines to be defined This feature 1s active only when
210. ave defined the settings for your analysis Template you can create another template by clicking the Add button delete an existing template by clicking the Remove button or accept reject your changes and return to the HGA main program window You are now ready to apply the lab quality template to your data 6 3 Applying a Lab Quality Template NOTE An example of a Lab Quality Data query is available in the Demo project select the QC_Lab_Analysis query in the Queries node and feel free to follow along with the instructions below To apply a Lab Quality Template follow the instructions below e Select and highlight the appropriate Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA Browser e From the main menu click Tools gt Quality Control and select the Perform Lab QC Assessment option the following dialog will appear 172 Chapter 6 Quality Control Select and configure a template for lab quality validation l loj x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Relative Percent Difference lt 20 a Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 90 Blank lt O Kil Data Sources Data Entity Data Source Station ID id Batch Identifiers BatchID Sample ID SamplelD Sample Date SampleD ate Parameter Names Parameter Parameter Values Value Parameter Identification Information ParameterlNfo Units Units Unit Conversion Factors Quality Code Identifiers QualityCode Dete
211. avic 1252 ANSI Latin 1 1253 ANSI Greek 1254 ANSI Latin 5 Turkish 1255 ANSI Hebrew 1256 ANSI Arabic 1257 ANSI Baltic Rim 1258 ANSI Vietnamese 437 OEM US Latin 708 OEM Arabic ASMO 708 720 OEM Arabic Transparent ASMO 137 OEM Greek formerly 437 G 775 OEM Baltic 850 OEM Western Europe Latin 1 852 OEM Central Europe Latin 2 855 OEM Russian IBM Cyrillic 857 OEM Turkish IBM 860 OEM Portuguese MS DOS 861 OEM Icelandic MS DOS 862 OEM Hebrew 863 OEM Canadian Frech MS DOS 864 OEM Arabic 865 OEM Nordic MS DOS 866 OEM Russian MS DOS Cyrillic II 869 OEM Greek 2 IBM Modern Greek 8859 1 ISO Latin 1 West European Danish Dutch English Faeroes Finnish French German Icelandic Irish Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish Swedish Appendices 8859 2 ISO Latin 2 East European Albanian Czech English German Hungarian Polish Rumanian Serbo Croatian Slovak Slovene 8859 3 ISO Latin 3 Southeastern European Afrikaans Catalan Dutch English Esperanto German Italian Maltese Spanish Turkish 8859 4 ISO Latin 4 North European 8859 5 ISO English amp Cyrillic Based Bulgarian Byelorussian English Macedonian Russian Serbo Croatian Ukrainian 8859 6 ISO Arabic 8859 7 ISO English amp Greek 8859 8 ISO Hebrew 8859 9 ISO Latin 5 Western European Turkish 8859 13 ISO Latin 6 Lativan and Lithuanian ANSI Uses the system code page OEM Uses the OEM equivale
212. ays the final report as per the report design and data 8 3 1 Report Viewer Toolbars The Report Editor Viewer offers an extensive list of navigation tools the figure below shows the toolbars used in the Viewer window jaaa The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the viewer window Report Preview Window 217 Navigation tools Open Static Report Opens a previously saved static report Save Static Report Saves the current report in the Report Editor s native format e Export Report Exports the current report to the desired format Ez Report Designer Displays the Report Designer window Print Report Sends the current report to printer Show TOC Displays the table of contents for the current report Li Show Ruler Displays a ruler Search Text Allows you to provide text to search for Find Text Searches for text provided in the Search Text text box Copy Page Copies the current page to windows clipboard Show Single Page Displays report one page at a time Show Multiple Pages Displays multiple pages of the report at once Zoom in Zooms in to a selected area of the report 100 Zoom in percent Sets the zoom level to that selected in here 218 Chapter 8 The Report Editor EJ EJ P Zoom out Zooms out the report First Page Moves to the first page of the report Previous Page Moves to the previous page in the report 2 3 Page Moves to the page specified in this
213. base structure Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard Creating Projects in Existing Databases At the top of this window there is a list of Projects in the selected Database This option is only available if an existing database was selected in Step 1 If so you may choose from the available HGA projects on this database and select a database template from an existing project If a NEW database was created in Step 1 the projects picklist will be inactive Next to create the project tables and proceed to the next step in the wizard The database settings may be modified AFTER the project has been created using the Template Manager The next step is to define the Project Properties and Location settings 3 2 3 Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location The Set Project Properties and Location window as shown below contains general project information such as project name folder location and soil settings Using the Project Manager 101 102 Project Wizard E 15 x Step 3 Provide Project Location Settings Project Name Sample Project This step allows you to set project ES properties to specify Project Folder C Program FilestHGAnalystiProjectsiS ample_Project E the project location and coordinate related settings Client 8 Define a project name and select Project Location al a project folder all folders and files that will store pr
214. be able to modify the options for managing Application Level objects If you load the User Access Management component and a project is currently opened then you will be able to modify options for managing Project Level objects Chapter 3 Project Manager In both cases the following main window will appear User Access Lewel Management Restricted Users Users have read only access to the objects Administrators Administrators The UALM window contains the tools for managing users and groups The left side of the window displays a tree with the available Groups and Users The main section of the window displays a table containing Name and Descriptions for the selected Group or User In the upper left corner you will find a toolbar with several context sensitive buttons When Groups is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Groups When Users is highlighted in the tree view the controls apply to Users Use the Add button to add a new Group or User Use the Edit button to edit the selected Group or User Use the Delete button to delete the selected Group or User Use the Set Password button to set the password for a User this control is only enabled when a User is selected in the tree view Use the ij Help button to load the Help details 3 1 4 Group Properties The UALM allows you to set permissions to the various modules in HGA through the Group Properties To load these option
215. be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime report designer As in the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once it 1s saved 8 1 4 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images A report for your fence diagrams and 3D views can be created by following the directions below e Start the 3D Explorer and open a 3D project file 3XS or load a 3D project from the project browser in HGA e Create the desired 3D view e Press the Print button je from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for your current fence diagram or add it to an existing report If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your Fence Diagram project s can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current fence diagram to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each view of your Fence Diagram is created with its associated legends As with the previous report types the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 8 1 5 Creating a Borehole Log Report A report for your borehole log plots can be created by following the d
216. be saved as follows e for Station groups the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Selection e for Data Queries the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Data Setting Field Precision If the selected station group or query contains numeric data fields you will be prompted with the following dialog Set Field Precision X Please specify the precision for the numeric Helds Field Name Elevation El Toc 4 OF Cancel The Set Field Precision dialog box lists all the numeric fields in the selected station group or query For each numeric field you can specify the number of decimal places to include when generating the layer s shapefile Enter the desired number of decimal places under the Decimals column for each numeric field and then click the OK button Please note that all contouring of numeric values is performed using the precision specified in this dialog Moreover the label renderer will display all numeric values on the map using the specified precision If you wish to change the precision after the layer Chapter 8 Map Manager has been created you must reload the HGA data into the map project Import This menu item provides options for importing basemap layers to the current Map Project Basemap images may be Raster Images sid bil tif grc bmp jpg tga AutoCAD files dwg dxf or MicroStation files
217. ble check box shows hides the isosurface Semitransparent check box sets the isosurface image as semi transparent The Volume Estimation value represents the calculated volume that the isosurface encompasses for lower isosurface values will result in higher Volume Estimations higher isosurface values will result in lower Volumes The volume estimation works in Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer the following manner When you ran the 3D Interpolation to create the plume data set you specify the grid size grid cells in the X Y and Z direction The volume estimation uses the number of grid cells and the X Y and Z extents to calculate the size of each grid cell The interpolated concentration value is calculated for each node of the grid cell A grid cell in the plume grid has eight nodes with associated values v1 v2 v3 There are three possibilities 1 all values at the nodes are less than the isosurface value a In this case the cell volume is not added to plume volume estimation 2 all values at the nodes are greater than the isosurface value a In this case the entire cell volume is added to plume volume estimation 3 some values are greater than the isosurface value a and some are less In this case the isosurface crosses the cell green polygon on picture and the linearly interpolated portion of cell volume is added to plume volume estimation only a part of the cell volume is added to the plume estima
218. box to ensure that the header text remains visible within the defined column width In the Header Text text box specify a header name for the BHLP column The Column Options dialog is available in the settings for each BHLP column and can be accessed by clicking the Options button shown below BHLP Columns 253 BHLP Settings lt xX Scale e Visible Column Options eaii Tie Men e Visible Major Tic Mark ze Interval 110 Display Unit m ka Color Label Position Left r Minor Tic Mark Font Interval 5 E Background E Color J Help Apply OF Cancel Individual column settings are described in the following sections of the manual 9 2 1 Vertical Scale Column Vertical Scale column displays the vertical scale on the borehole log plot Although a table and respective fields for the starting and ending depth could be provided for this column the BHLP automatically adjusts the scale column so that the scale represents the largest column placed on the borehole log plot One or more vertical scale columns can be placed on a given borehole log plot This feature may be useful in such cases where displaying the vertical scale in more than one unit e g metres and feet and or a combination of Depth from a certain reference e g top of casing and Elevation from a selected datum is desired To create a Scale column click on the op Add icon on the toolbar From the
219. bs depend upon the Provider selected The Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box is used to select the appropriate OLE DB provider for the type of data you want to access Use the Connection tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box to specify where your data is located and how to connect to 1t using an OLE DB provider The connection information can be represented using a common string format This tab opens by default when you double click a data connection in Server Explorer Note that the fields displayed on this tab depend upon the OLE DB Provider selected For example if you select the OLE DB Provider for Oracle the Connection tab displays fields for the server name and login If you select the OLE DB Provider for SQL Server then the server name type of authentication and database must be furnished For more information about the Data Link API visit msdn microsoft com open the MSDN Library Online and then the Platform SDK to find the MDAC SDK which contains the Data Link API Reference or see Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing on page 451 Once the connection string has been defined click OK to accept it e Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping 4 1 2 Data Mapping The next step in the data transfer operation is to match a source table with a destination table The Data Mapping window is divided into two
220. button to create a New SCS e Use the button to save the SCS e Use the button to add a new soil e Use the x button to delete the selected soil e Use the button to move the selected soil type up e Use the 1 button to move the selected soil type down 2 5 1 Creating a New Soil Classification System To create a new Soil Classification system SCS follow the steps below e Click the New button e Enter a name for the SCS e You may now proceed to create or add soil types to this SCS Soil types may be added manually or copied from an existing SCS To add new soil types manually e Press the h Add button in the lower right corner e Enter a Name for the new soil type and select a Pattern To select from one of the available patterns select the button beside the soil type and choose from one of the pre existing images for the soil pattern To use your own image right mouse click on the picture field select Get Own Picture and locate the image file To copy one or all soil types from an existing SCS into the new SCS use the following buttons e Choose the desired SCS from the left side of the window e To copy a single soil type use the button e To copy all soil types use the y button Use the following buttons to arrange the order of the soil types within the selected SCS e To move the selected soil type up use the F button e To move the selected soil type down use the 1 button To de
221. by placing a check mark beside each cross section name Or to select all cross sections place a Check mark beside the Select All check box at the top of the dialog Select any Surfaces you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same mamner Gridded surfaces can be created in the Map Manager see Chapter 10 Create Gridded Data for more details Select any Plumes you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Plumes can be created in the HGA main window see Chapter 2 3D Interpolation for more details When you are finished OK This will load the 3D Explorer window For more details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Information Provides a wndow containing information on the selected station After selecting this option you may place the mouse cursor on a particular lithologic column within a selected station A small text box appears displaying specific information about the layer layer type top and bottom elevations and thickness If the station in question has screens the Information feature can also highlight their pertinent features Preview BHLP Allows you to view the borehole log plot BHLP of any station in the cross section To view the BHLP select this option and click on any station in the cross section 11 2 4 Tools Options Allows setting line snapping options for lines drawn on the cross section If this feature is
222. can use co ordinate systems that differ from those used for displaying stations in the main HGA window NOTE Changing the projection of a map will affect any existing georeferenced raster image layers in the map project If the projection of a map is changed all georeferenced raster images must be georeferenced again in the new coordinate system Print Loads the map view into the Report Editor where the report may be printed and or saved for later retrieval For more information please see Chapter 8 The Report Editor Exit Exit the Map Manager and return to Hydro GeoAnalyst 10 2 2 Layer A Map Layer is a set of points lines polygons or a raster image that have geographic coordinates attached to it A Map Layer may be imported into any Map Project Description of Menu Items 301 302 New Open Provides options for creating a new map layer A new layer may be created as one of the following file types e ESRI Polygon shapefile shp e ESRI Line shapefile shp e ESRI Point shapefile shp e ESRI Text shapefile shp These are Annotation Layers meaning that they can be used to draw various shapes or labels text on your map project The new map layer will use the projection system of the current map project After entering a filename for the layer the new map layer will be created then placed in the Layer Manager and added to the current Map Window HINT For easy maintenance it is suggested that the sh
223. cccccccccccoooonnncnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnanononncnnonnos 228 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section ccccccncccnncnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnononnnanannninnnos 228 Creating a Report Contaming SD indees ii ale ut aed aed 229 Creatine a Borenole Los REPO ooe Ui anvos Mautues lanes que on eta ndocweeneeesaadaeaee 229 Parameter Query REPOSO Rin 230 Manasina Y AA aE 230 Open E asune Repo io 230 Deletine a Report tod 230 DAV Sel REDO 22 Ai 230 EL O A ainsi uur aeneesnee 230 EXPOrtino generated Te POTS lada 230 Creating and Managing Report Templates scsccccssssssssssssssscccccccccccssssssccccosees 231 Creatine A Report Templa aaisen a cacas 232 Opening a Report TemplatEseici iaa 232 Deletmoa Repor Empi nd lsadd bsos da stas 232 Settins Report Template as Detault Template 232 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Import Reports from MS ACCESS aiii inicios 233 Creating Reports with COSF S sisi sicdscciewscdacctenessansedscceseeaiccasssdeceuenedacavavessstenscedsdeacsedss 235 Example eene a a ai 236 9 Borehole Log Plotter esssscssesssseccssecsoscoesscceccesessseosscssocssessceesssse 247 About the Interface cial 248 Description of Designer Toolbar Items ui ie 250 DALPCoOuUMASs alada llei 250 Supported Column TIPS apio el 251 BAL PADS Law setine Sestao od 252 VEC alk Cale COL 254 A PP onsen sanace da asoomacosaacagahanaavansaseudesmanebonsaut 255 Dept Pome Based COMA id is 256 SETS E OE T
224. cccecscsavesseuceeweidesaassseesacvondesaetenssesevesecencsdesesestacceensteas s 394 Rostidmnas Hes Pane Sareo E 394 Mov maa Pane lernen n E E E EN NA 395 A a A sats saanda made Rackaanaagsnatens 395 IDOCKing Panels a e N Ane ed we eRe 395 Clos me Panels a A E ae 395 W CEC ALEK ACCEL AION iia 395 DD Navigation Tools iia 396 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services ea A AE cates eae name uel eermaemneaniennch oes 396 o EE 397 Time PMA OM sar casi csclihas cas 398 Pume TO O eases A So de e ade nace can eet vee 399 Recording A mimiatiom ow Vii 6st oes ao scts san ssc souadse acota 400 OpenGL SENES ii ia 402 LA O detalles 402 Display SETTMOS iia aara aa E EE EEEN 403 DSTA Serie a ad 403 Resen Opus A tenia 405 ProjecEDISPlAES SUS a Nit 405 ARIS DISPLAY SEUS di dndolcia 407 Sitemap Display SEUS ads 407 Surtaces IB YES 0 Fe SOS iii ica iia 408 A A 409 Flames Display Selia o a 410 ES OSUELACES ao ld anios 411 Color Maps aa 413 o o PE e 415 TMeColor Palette no III alice 418 The Color ee Cen criaron a ad rai tetas 420 Cross Section Data Display Settings stated 420 COSS Se CLIOM SENOS tl ica 421 Stal Ons AA A o lee doo ULeS 421 Bayer interpretation etunes a 421 Creating Slices and Cross Sections sscccssssccsssssssssssssssccccsccssssscsssscccssscsssccsssssccsses 422 Creatine a Vercelli dadis 423 Ereatinesa Hon ZOMU ALS MICE pita iia 424 Selectno 4 Cross Sectional Gee a epa 424 Delttine Sic ti O AS 425
225. ces Other properties of model layers such as name pattern and description can be edited by using the Tools gt Model Layers menu option described in the Model Layers section on page 374 Linking Vertices between Model Layers Once Model Layer lines are drawn their vertices can be linked following the procedure described in the Link Vertex section on page 361 in the Edit menu 388 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor 11 4 5 Remove Stations from Cross Sections When working with a cross section in the Cross Section tab one or more stations can be removed from the cross section line by right clicking on the cross section and selecting the Remove Stations option Then simply click on a station to remove it from the cross section Stations can also be added to removed from a cross section line in the Map tab as described in Defining a Cross Section Line section on page 348 11 5 Querying Cross Section Interpretations In previous versions of HGA the cross section interpretations were saved in shapefiles and along the cross section line The cross section editor now saves the interpretation results to the database for various uses including e displaying the results of each interpretation in HGA e querying the interpretation table for any desired surface s or thickness data that can be used for groundwater modeling applications The final interpretation results may be queried for information such as layer thickness
226. ch the source field to a field in the HGA database template Therefore a field must be manually selected from the available list and mapped to the appropriate source field The Destination frame contains the data categories and tables in the current database structure From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Data Requirements In the previous version of HGA the DT S required all source tables to contain a numeric Station ID in order to map data to the correct stations in the stations table The benefit of this design 1s that the database could support duplicate station names the disadvantage was that in many situations numeric station ID was not available and had to be manually added to the source tables either by hand or through the use of queries Although numeric Station IDs are still the ideal unique identifiers for stations this is no longer a requirement You may now use Station names as a unique identifier in source tables in order to map data to the correct stations When you import stations and only the Station Name is mapped the following confirmation message will appear before Step 3 in the DTS Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System CA Station ID not currently mapped is used to uniquely identify stations in HGA 2 Would you like to use Station Names as unique identifiers For this transaction You will be
227. cing technological requirements of today s groundwater and environmental professionals Schlumberger Water Services software consists of a complete suite of environmental software applications engineered for data management and analysis modeling and simulation visualization and reporting Schlumberger Water Services software is currently developed by SWS and sold globally as a suite of desktop solutions For over 18 years our products and services have been used by firms regulatory agencies and educational institutions around the world We develop each product to maximize productivity and minimize the complexities associated with groundwater and environmental projects To date we have over 14 000 registered software installations in more than 85 countries Need more information If you would like to contact us with comments or suggestions you can reach us at Schlumberger Water Services 460 Phillip Street Suite 101 Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2L 5J2 Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 General Inquiries sws info Oslb com Web www swstechnology com www water slb com Obtaining Technical Support To help us handle your technical support questions as quickly as possible please have the following information ready before you call or include it in a detailed technical support e mail e A complete description of the problem including a summary of key strokes and program event or a screen capture showing the error m
228. ck OK to return xi E ES BHLP Well Constructio ES Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc Symbols Data Labels Data to Displa Label rT All Mini EJ Visible Font l Horizontal First Ej Max J 0O Center Jw Last En Aver 5 Vertical Top Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Data Labels tab the Data to Display frame allows you to select which water level s to represent on the BHLP Choose from the following options e All e First e Last BHLP Columns 269 270 e Min e Max e Average The color of each option can be changed by clicking on the corresponding color box Finally the Labels frame allows you to specify the Visibility Font and Alignment settings for the data labels NOTE In order to see the water level dates displayed beside the symbol you must map the appropriate Well Construction Drilling Water Level Entity fields as shown below the data source may be a table or query E5 Scale 3 6 Well Construction Scale 3 6 Drilling Lithology B E WaterLevel E WaterLevelEntities 5 Pump 6 Plug 6 Filling 5 Casing ES DrillingEntities H E Lithology gt BH EX AAS Name Value DataTable Water Level DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField E TextEntity
229. cle on top of the station s symbol Rectangle Allows to select stations within a drawn box To draw a rectangle place the cursor in the map window click once with the left mouse button in the area of interest and drag a window around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the box will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Polygon Allows to select stations within a drawn polygon Place the cursor in the map window at one point of interest click once with the left mouse button and digitize a polygon around the area of interest To add a vertex to the polygon continue to click with the left mouse button To close the polygon double click the left mouse button at the final vertex All stations within the polygon will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Circle Allows to select stations within a drawn circle To draw a circle place the cursor in the center of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and drag an expanding circle around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the circle will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Line Allows to select stations near a drawn line To draw a line place the cursor at one end of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and digitize a line through the area of interest To add a vertex to the line click with
230. clusive groundwater monitoring network system that integrates high quality field instrumentation with the industries latest communications and data management technologies All of the Diver NETZ components are designed to optimize your project workflow from collecting and recording groundwater data in the field to project delivery in the office Mark of Schlumberger V1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA 1s the most comprehensive and yet easy to use environmental data management system providing data validation analysis and visualization The HGA package integrates a list of flexible and customizable database structures used around the world complimented by state of the art tools for data interpretation statistical analysis GIS mapping data charting and two and three dimensional visualizations For most environment related projects whether they are contaminated sites or municipal water supply projects there is often an abundance of data that has been collected over the years How many times have you had to sift through several paper reports for that one piece of information when compiling monthly summaries on a project Can you be sure that you have not misplaced a report or failed to mention an important piece of data The HGA package addresses these and many other needs in the industry The system enables you to create a project specific database or enhance and build upon your existing database It can c
231. creen labels NOTE In order to see the well screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities e Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screens table that contains an image e Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screen that 1s type string and contains the descriptive information on the screen type material e ParentID use this option to define what casing each screen belongs to You must select a field from the screen table that is field type double and contains values for casing ID in most cases select the Casing ID BHLP Columns 267 Lithology xi E BHLP Well Constructio ES well Construction I Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology water level Reduc_4 pon p R Fn Borde e Show Width f el Calor Help Apply OF Cancel The Appearance frame allows you to change the position of the lithology images layers within the cell construction column Choose from Right Left Both on each side of the well drilling The Border frame allows you to define the lithology border settings You can set the visibility using the S
232. cribes the data extent New Brunswick From the Please Select Area dialog choose the geographic area which best describes the data extent Click Ok to save the settings In subsequent scenarios when this geotransformation is required Hydro GeoAnalyst will automatically perform the geotransformation on the fly In other words geotransformations only need to be specified once for the Hydro GeoAnalyst project In some cases such as importing data into HGA or loading a shapefile in Map Manager if the geotranformation has already been defined you may be prompted to confirm the default geotranformation shown below e The default GeoTransformation for transformation between coordinate systems q y NAD_1927_UTM_Zone_17W and GCS_WG5_1984 is NAD_1927 To _WGS_1984 11 Do you want to accept this setting Jj we When presented with this dialog select Yes to accept the default geotranformation Otherwise select No to return to the Please Select Area dialog shown at top of page to select a new geographic area Appendix H Configuring Geotransformation Settings A477 478 Appendices Index Numerics 3D Interpolation 58 3D Explorer Display Settings 403 General 393 Interface 393 Legend 406 A Add Entity 257 267 Align Controls to Grid 222 AnchorBottom 210 Animation Controls 397 Animation Properties 397 Annotation Layers 302 Application Level Security Document ALSD 84 Auto Intervals 417 AutoRot
233. crosstab format For example if you want to generate a crosstab report of groundwater chemistry results over time at several stations you may want to include the following fields e station name e sample name or code e screen location e sample date e chemical parameter s e result value concentration e units e method detection limit Crosstab Queries 151 Once you have created a data query you are ready to create a Crosstab query This can be done in several ways e Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA project browser then select Tools Crosstab Report from the main menu or e Right mouse click on the Data Query and select Crosstab Report from the pop up menu A dialog will appear prompting you for a name for the Crosstab report enter a name then click OK TE New Crosstab Report x Mame TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year200d OF Cancel Help The DataCube Wizard window will then open as shown in the following screenshot E DataCube wizard x A Layout Style sheet M Source fields DataCube fields M Inactive fields x dimension fields chemical_name Concentration Facts fields M Y dimension fields Cancel The DataCube Wizard window contains two tabs with options that can be configured e Layout Select which fields from your data query should be used in the crosstab report
234. cssssscsees 447 HydroGeoAnalyst Matt Module serria Solier 447 Map Mana taa 447 Cross SECO EMO lt A 448 SD EXPO ino 448 O ne Menten TOE en E re rent ye eet rr een rereseren 448 Appendix B Project Files and Directory Structure oommossis 449 Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing rrrsssssees 451 Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings ssscccssscccssssssssssssscccssccsssseees 459 verse DISTAMCES nedaro ir rotna E daar iiss ean aes rasens 459 A aes ances geceaec to atiapussecca cout serusancamesescacntanse a act capes oes cassecmoaeds 460 A RON 462 Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes scccccsssssssssssssscccccccccssssscssccccscssssssscsees 466 Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources cccccccsssssssssssscccccccccccsssssscssccccssssesess 468 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQS cccscssccssssssssssssssccccsccessssscsees 475 Appendix H Configuring Geotransformation Settings cccccccccccsssssssssssssssssscees 476 rodicio 22 3290 c0ctedcnccadoncsareoncnd sacar a iS 476 Conn eurineCreO Gans OFIMALLONS sis aia 476 A A Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Copyright Schlumberger Water Services Preface Schlumberger Water Services SWS is a recognized leader in the development and application of innovative groundwater technologies in addition to offering expert services and professional training to meet the advan
235. ction Limit Lelslelelelelelelelels Required for Lab Quality validation Help Cancel A From the Select and configure a template window select from the list of Lab Quality Templates Once a template has been selected the Template Description field will be completed with the description entered when the template was created The next step 1s to map the fields in your data query to the fields required by the QC component 6 3 1 Mapping Fields In the Data Source frame the Data Entity must be matched to the Data Source for all required fields required fields are marked with a and are also listed in previous section In most cases HGA will be able to automatically detect and map the fields however 1f you have created custom fields or renamed existing fields in your database structure you may need to browse through the list and select the appropriate Data Source in your project using the pull down menus that corresponds with a Data Entity NOTE A field in your query must be mapped to each of the required fields as listed above see the section Data Requirements on page 167 for more details 6 4 Generate QC Results Once all required fields have been matched in the template the OK button will become active Clicking OK will run the Lab Quality Analysis and once completed the Lab Quality Validation window will appear If your template included more than one Check Type you can use the pull down m
236. ction node from the BHLP Settings window The Well Construction frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by selecting the Options button see page 253 General BHLP Columns 263 264 BHLP Settings xx Well Constructio Iw Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc4 Wisibilit e Drilling details Iv Water Levels Iv Casings details e Scale iV Screen details e Pumps e Lithology Reducer TF Flush Mount Help Apply OF Cancel The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the various components of the Well Construction column Drilling BHLP Settings i x E ES BHLP Well Constructio ial e Visible Column Options HE well Construction General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc4 E ES Plot a Show widthf Color Line Style Straight Z Straight f Use Image Use Color The Drilling tab allows you to define the appearance settings for the annular filling Use the Border frame to set the Visibility border Width and border Color The Line Style dropdown box allows you to select between a Rough irregular border to a Straight flush border The Filling frame includes a Show checkbox which allows you to set the visibility of the annular filling You can display the annular filling in one of two ways Use Image
237. d e Fit width to page Select this option to fit your BHLP columns to the entire Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter width of the BHLP Viewer Window e Print Scale Factor The default setting of O will fit the BHLP onto your page However using a whole number for the scale factor no decimal or negative numbers will scale the BHLP in the following manner A Print scale factor of 1 100 would mean that 100 units on the BHLP would correspond to 1 unit on the printout 1 e 1f your BHLP units are in Feet then 100 Feet measured on the BHLP would correspond to 1 Foot in the actual printed results so on an 8 1 2 by 11 page 100 feet measured on the BHLP would take up just over 1 page when printed in portrait mode The scale factors must use the same units For more information see Generating a borehole log report on page 289 Column Options Column Options E x Heade Bod Color E Color E E Widthy 5 El Header Tex E Header text Font J Angle 0 y Scale rj Align Center ki e wod Wrap Cancel The Column Options dialog allows you to specify unique display settings for each column in your BHLP In this dialog you can modify the Header Color and Body Color by clicking on the appropriate color box Use the Width vertical scroll bars to change the width of the column Under the Header Text frame specify the Font Angle and Alignment of the column header text Select the Word Wrap check
238. d Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 To display the value intervals in discrete color zones rather than continuous shading select the Zebra checkbox Once the color settings have been defined click the Ok button Chapter 8 Map Manager y The grid size For the selected surface exceeds 300000 nodes 4s a result loading and displaying the surface may require several a minutes Click OK to continue or click Modify where you can coarsen the grid size in order to improve loading and processing times Modify A surface file with a large grid size may take several minutes to load depending on the performance capabilities of your computer For example a DEM surface file that 1s approximately 9mb may take up to 10 minutes to load If the grid size for the selected surface file exceeds 300 000 nodes the message shown above will display and you can choose to accept the original grid size or modify its di
239. d into the Display Fields at the top of the window If your data 1s contained in different fields and or tables select these fields now Once you are finished the Query Builder window should be similar to the one shown below Query Builder E ay lol x xr Station Group Query Data Query SEN SQL View Preview l Select a Query m Display Fields chart tvoc_ F Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics T X J_ Map Ready Well History Function Expression station name name chem_test_results0 sample_date sample_date chem_test_resultsO result_value result_value Conditions _ Expression _ Expression FSource Condition Advanced Close Help Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 gt Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning gf Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below Creating Reports with Charts 237 238 7 Query Builder XHA Statio
240. d the CAD file will be loaded as a new layer into the map project Save Saves the selected layer Delete Deletes the selected layer A layer cannot be deleted while it is in Edit mode Create Intersection With this option you can create a new map layer from the intersection of any station points polyline polygon layer surface layer or color shade zebra layer with another polygon layer First select the map layer that will be intersected from the Layer Manager Toolbar Next select the Create Intersection option from the Layer menu The following dialog will appear Name of the new layer Sy OK Cancel EJ Help Select the desired layer from the combo box and enter a name for the new layer Click OK when you are finished and the new layer will be added to the Layer Manager panel Note When clipping color shade and surface layers the Name of the new layer field will be greyed out as it is not required Properties Provides options for modifying the symbol for the shapes point line polygon on the current active layer in the Layer Manager The options dialog is shown below 314 Chapter 8 Map Manager Point Style E Pattern eee ld Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol E Fil Boder E Sample x OF Cancel The dialog shown here is for point shapes There are similar dialogs for line and polygon shapes The available symbol Patterns include circle square triangle cross or
241. d to yellow However the user has the option to modify the Font the Background Color and the Border Color of the record by clicking on the appropriate button s 6 2 2 Check Spiked Settings 170 A matrix spike is an aliquot of sample that is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte s prior to sample preparation Ideally there should be 100 recovery of the spiked concentration or very close to this The following settings are available Chapter 6 Quality Control Spike Settings Minimal percent recovery 35 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e Minimal Percent Recovery The percentage of the substance added to a spiked sample that 1s detected It is the difference between the concentration detected in the spiked sample and that detected in the un spiked sample divided by the concentration of the substance added to the spiked sample Minimal Percent Recovery measures accuracy the higher the percent recovery the greater the accuracy must be to be considered acceptable NOTE The analysis assumes that the sample that 1s being spiked is a blank and does not contain any detectable concentrations of any of the contaminants You may not use a field original sample for a spiked sample analysis e Highlighting The options are the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 169 6 2 3 Check Blanks Settings A blank is a quality control sample used to detect and
242. d1 Upper Unconfined etc for the displayed stations e Model layers that define unique model layers eg Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers may be used in numerical groundwater flow models For more details please refer to Chapter 11 Cross Section Editor 7 3D Explorer The HGA 3D Explorer provides a three dimensional view of one or more cross sections defined in the Cross Section Editor Specifically this can be Major Components 79 used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats Additionally base maps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for viewing geology and hydrogeology data The HGA 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using e 2D and 3D views of the grid e Bitmap overlays on surfaces e Enhanced label positioning and controls e Light source position control e Transparent objects e Animation sequence pausing and looping e Auto rotate tools to continuously rotate the model image around the X Y Z axis e and much more For more details please refer to Chapter 12 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer 8 Report Editor The Report Editor provides an interface to create reports and report templates containing a variety of data f
243. data from various sources into any HGA database table The DTS allows importing data only for selected fields in the selected destination table however some tables have required fields such as ID from to etc which must be mapped in order for each record to be imported To load the DT S for importing data Project Import Data from the main menu The first window of the DTS will be displayed as shown below Data Transfer System Import E y i E Of xj Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name y gt g Description TS package Select data source o Specify import file name Note The Data Transfer System DTS allows you to import data from external sources such as text files excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a three to four step process In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations The figure shown above depicts the interface that is provided to specify the data source for importing 4 1 1 Choose a Data Source The first step in the DTS Import process is to select a data package and the data source file Data Transfer Package DTP A Data Transfer Packag
244. dded to the GroupFooter1 section of the report design Ti Chart Object button from the toolbar Using your mouse draw a rectangle in the GroupFooterl area of the report design that nearly fills the allotted space A sample plot image will appear as shown below 242 Chapter 8 The Report Editor New Report O a DAE E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeader1 H Detail DA GroupFooter1 H PageFooter sample date E GroupHeader pes E JEE f aey E GroupFooter E PageFooter To modify the chart settings er fia Charts Manager button from the toolbar The dialog shown in the figure below will be displayed Series PlotSeriesOn SeriesLabel X Axis Field Y Axis Field 1 Primary Axis Seriel 2 Primary Axis Serie2 3 Primary Axis Serie3 4 Primary Axis Seried Add Remove Ok Cancel Apply Custom Name Chart2D1 Height 2409 Left 213 Tag Top 142 Visible True Width 6874 This dialog allows you to add as many series as desired and select the fields that will be used as the data source for the horizontal X and vertical Y axes For this example only one series is required Use the Remove option to delete Series 2 3 and 4 For Series 1 define the following settings Creating Reports with Charts 243 244 For the Series Label type TVOC ug L For the X Axis Field sample _date from the combo box For the Y Axis Field result_value fr
245. displays all stations in the Destination in your project database whose names are the same as the station selected on the left Stations will be sorted by ID in ascending order In the right side of the table you can select only one station to match to the station selected on the left side The left grid will contains the column Operations that will display combo boxes for each row The combo boxes contain three options e Append Import the station as a new station in the destination table e Update Map the correct station ID in the destination table to a Station name in the source table e Reject Reject the station The DTS will not import rejected stations By default the operation will be set to Append i e duplicate stations will be imported as new stations If Update is selected for a station on the left grid the right grid will display the first potentially duplicate station Using the right grid you may select the appropriate destination station to be updated If the destination contains more than 1 station with the same name you must choose the appropriate one by selecting the appropriate radio button Above the left grid you will see the All Stations combo box with four items Append Update Reject and blank This combo box will control the group operations and allow you to apply the same operation to all stations listed on the left grid The default selection in this combo box will be the Append option Chapter 4 Th
246. dragging the mouse pointer in the desired rotation direction Animation Controls The tools located on the right hand side of the Navigation frame may be yg gt alo used to continuously rotate the image around the X Y and Z axes and z ee animate plume objects i Browser W Time Simply select the desired axis and click the Play button to start rotation a You can record the rotation as an AVI file by pressing the Record button For more details see Recording Animation to AVI file on page 400 below al The rotation can be stopped by clicking the Stop button The Browser check box when selected will activate the player controls for static animation of the selected color map or Isosurface For color maps the map position will span in a loop along the specified plane through the project extents Isosurface values will be animated similarly in a loop however as the scroll bar moves the isosurface value will change The Time check box when selected will activate the player controls for time animation Both color maps and isosurfaces may be animated in time Clicking on the Options button displays the Animation Properties window as shown in the following figure Working with 3D Explorer 397 Animation Properties x Rotate Time Flume Browser SutoRotate Ares SutoRotate speed O Screen Aves amp Model Aves alow fast Cancel Automatic rotation can be performed around the Screen Axes or
247. ds Function Expression Alias Order by station id id station x x station y y station name name chem_test_sample0 date_ Y date_ gt chem_test_results0 chemical_name chemical_name gt chem_test_results0 result_value Concentration chem_test_resultsO result_unit result unit station elevation Y Elevation gt chem_test_sampleD screen_from_ Screen_from gt station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ viz The last display field in the screenshot above combines the sample elevation and the screen depth from fields the screen depth is subtracted from the station elevation or station TOC elevation if desired using the Expression below station elevation chem_test_sample0 screen_from_ and entering Z for the Alias Executing this query will produce the results shown below Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 59 60 The last column displays the calculated sample elevations Z This value should be mapped to Z in the 3D Interpolation to generate your plume NOTE It is recommended that the X Y and Z fields all be displayed with the same length units Interpolation method Available interpolation methods include e Krigging default and e Inverse distance Advanced Settings Press this button to see advanced settings for the selected interpolation method For more details see Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings on page 459 e Interpolate log values This option
248. e Y ASTM Descriptor M Color M Odor IV formation_name IV formation_unit V moisture Y comment M Chemicals Result_Values Result_Units H V Hydrogeology H Modelling H features Well Construction 4 Soil Testing H Soil Sampling 4 Monitoring Event H V Mining Exploration FXA4QE I ra ta ra A Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM X T sy m Use as project default 10 x Linked Fields Settings Description Database settings Value field name Unit field name Parameter field name Chemicals Result_Values Value field name Unit field name Default value Data format Default unit Unit category FO View settings Parameter field name Chemicals Get names from list A Result_Values Result_Units Close EJ Help e The names of one or more fields involved in the linked fields set A new database template may be created during the project creation phase using the Project Wizard The new template will contain only the Stations table The template can be further enhanced using the procedures listed above It is not possible to create a new The default unit A default value Data display format An option to link the first field in a three field linked fields to a list 13 4 Managing Templates 13 4 1 Creating a new template blank template using the Template Manager Once a project i
249. e DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import export operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing lab analysis results to the database which follow a consistent format The DTP contains Importing Data using the DTS 111 112 information about the data source the selected destination table matching between source and destination tables and fields and a number of other settings All Data Transfer Packages 1f any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the DTS loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation Data Transfer System Import Be o x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name Description Select data source f Specify import file name At the beginning of the import export operation you can select the option which saves the changes you made to the package in each step of the procedure Specify a data transter package Package name Description I Save changes to this DTS package A new data transfer package can also be created in which case all information provided to the DTS during a specific data transfer operation will be saved to the package once the transfer operation is completed successfully Select the Data Source
250. e Custom Values setting is used to assign custom contour values in addition to or in replacement of the regular interval contour values Press the browse button to load the Custom contour values window as shown in the figure below Display Settings 417 e Click to add a value e Click E to insert a value e Click W to delete a value This setting is commonly used to set logarithmic contour interval values for concentration data Labels Semitransparent Max value Min value The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels e Visible shows or hides the labels e Text color controls the color of the label e Text size controls the size of the labels e Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value e Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels e Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label The labels are plotted on the top and bottom surface of a flat 3D rectangular box The size of the box will be automatically adjusted to fit the text size but the Box color and Box depth can be customized The Color Palette The color Palette is used to customize the range of colors used to represent the values of selected model elements for each display object this includes the color maps isolines and isosurfaces The color Palette settings will govern t
251. e Data Transfer System Above the right grid the Filter controls can manipulate what stations will be displayed in the destination right grid By default all stations with the same name will be displayed However you may select any field an operation e g gt Like Is Not and a criteria that will be used to retrieve stations from the destination This feature allows you to locate Stations that may be already in the database but with names that were misspelled or entered incorrectly e g MW 1 MW_1 MW1 etc 4 1 4 Data Validation Report and Finalizing the Import The last step in the DTS involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Data Transfer System Import Step 4 Data Validation Errors Warnings ErorlD Description Field Name of records Preview Latitude 2 GB02 3 GB03 4 GBO4 5 GB05 6 GB06 7 GBO 8 GBOS 9 GB09 10 GB10 11 GB11 12 GB12 13 GB13 14 GB14 15 GB15 16 GB16 17 GB17 18 GB18 19 GB19 16801 80 5547287617745 80 555419821155 80 5563705286688 80 5579316744066 80 5592272673159 80 5605248334986 80 5616525616792 80 5635559603042 80 564939432078 80 5660664890569 80 5668473471 792 80 5545485331505 80 5557312812136 80 5
252. e Sample Date or Time e Value for the parameter of interest e g water level chemical concentrations temperature pH conductivity etc The following fields are not required but are recommended for plot and series grouping and to take advantage of additional plot options e Station ID e Station Name e Chemical Parameter name e Measured parameter units e Non detect ND factor e Method detection limit MDL e Uncertainly factor e Water quality standard 7 2 1 Add Plot To add a new plot to the design click the E Add button in the toolbar or right click on the Plot Page Design node in the tree view and select the Add plot menu option The following Add plot dialog will appear Adding Plots 181 Plot Details xX Hame Flot Type Time Series Template M Set as Default Template Ok Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the plot The Type combo box contains the supported plot type currently only Time Series scatter plots are supported In the Template combo box select the desired plot template that should be applied to the new plot The plot template contains numerous pre defined settings for axis data series style settings etc If you want to re use the same template again in the future select the Set as the default template check box For details on creating plot templates see Saving Plot as Template on page 195 Click OK when you are finished to display the new plot in th
253. e View Ed Window width 2733 m Map Scale IE 17935 Center pu 535903 85 m Y 481 3903 23 m OF Cancel Provide the desired viewable width map scale and X Y coordinates of the map that will be repositioned at the center of the map window As the Zoom window width changes the Map Scale changes and vice versa The Zoom window width has equal proportions left and right of center TIP When you save the map project the view extent is saved together with the map project The next time the map project is opened the view extent will be restored Turn on All Layers Makes all layers visible Turn off All Layers Hides all layers View BHLP Allows the you to view the borehole log plot BHLP for any station To view a BHLP make sure that you are in the HGA data layer select this option and click on any station An example taken from the Demo project is provided below Description of Menu Items 341 Map Project Demo Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help JARA ZONA OS MA OF MEDD A4SAN EG SE BHLP 67 GB 44 All Stations o BHLP Template TI CrossSectionLine5 Boreholes AS dep a a ad AirPhoto_Bw _gr bm p Coarse 4 AirPhoto_Color_gr b mp xl Water Courses xl Contour Lines xl Airports 1 xl Major Railroads xl Urban reas xl Trees xl Grasslands xl Boulder Croplands xl Layer Informatio Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 198
254. e View menu provides options for changing the appearance of the HGA window by showing hiding selected grid columns and showing hiding the interface components Project Browser Hides or displays the Project Browser Well Profile Displays the Well Profile Viewer The Well profile is a borehole log plot BHLP viewer integrated into the Station List grid Select any BHLP template that 1s created and select a station from the Station List The button in the toolbar performs the same function To hide the Well Profile Viewer click View on the menu bar and then select Well Profile Hide Selected Columns When this menu item is selected any columns that are selected in a grid will be hidden from the current view This can be useful for focusing on a selected criteria for a selected group of stations This item is only available if one or more columns have been selected in an active grid Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 51 Show All Columns Use the Show All Columns menu item to display all columns in the active grid this will any hidden columns to the current view This item is activated only if a grid is active and one or more columns are hidden Collapse All Use the Collapse All command to collapse all nodes of the project browser The selected active node will remain active after collapsing Expand All Use the Expand All command to expand all nodes of the project browser The selected active node will remain active after expa
255. e displayed by clicking on the desired item A description of the interface that is provided to view or edit these items is provided in the following sections Data Categories As mentioned earlier in this document a fixed number of data categories are provided in Hydro GeoAnalyst in order to help group similar information There are nine pre defined categories and one user defined category The categories are created based on those groups that are common in environmental data management systems These categories include e Description information related to site and stations e Geologic Description information related to subsurface geology e Well Construction information related to drilling methods casing filling etc e Soil Testing information related to geological investigations such as penetrometer tests e Soil Sampling information related to soil investigations such as soil vapor coring etc e Monitoring Events sampling for chemical information as well as water levels and any other data resulting from monitoring events e Geophysics resistivity and gamma readings e Well History historical information on wells e Mining Exploration results from any mining and exploration activities 436 Chapter 5 Template Manager e User Category Any of these categories can be renamed as desired and used to store any information Selecting a category in the Template Manager displays an interface where the name of the categ
256. e grid in the middle of the dialog select which stations should display the BHLP on the cross section selecting too many stations may result in a crowded display 11 2 5 Help Contents Launches HGA Help placing the focus on the Cross Section Editor section 11 3 Creating the Cross Section As mentioned earlier cross section locations must be drawn using the Define Cross Section Line option or the CrossSection Line button 3 in the Map Manager See Chapter 10 Defining a Cross Section Line for details on this procedure Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created from the Map Manager as follows e In the Map Manager select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button MH on the toolbar e Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used as the cross section name Creating the Cross Section 377 e If surface layers are present in your Map Project you will be prompted to select a surface layer Please see Loading Surface Layers section on page 378 e The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole lithologic columns on the cross section plane By default the top of model layer 1 ground surface will be drawn in for you The starting point of the cross section lin
257. e has slope continuity everywhere The advanced settings parameters for the Natural Neighbor method are described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Appendices Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting 1s useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other wise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated d
258. e main interface is separated into three tabs that are described below Stations List Tab This tab hosts a grid displaying a list of stations for the selected station group Only a few selected columns are displayed in this tab including Station Name X and Y coordinate Elevation and TOC Top of Casing elevation The purpose of this list 1s to provide an overview of multiple stations and to perform general operations based on one or more selected stations For a more detailed view of an individual station the Station Data tab should be selected Data Query Tab This tab displays results from an execution of any selected data query It can be activated by double clicking on any query under the Queries node on the Project Browser or by directly clicking on the tab itself In addition through this interface you may delete all records from a selected table Note Use this feature with caution as records will be permanently deleted from your database For more details on creating and editing queries please see Chapter 5 Queries Station Data Tab This tab allows the user to enter and view the data for a single station This tab can be activated in two ways e Select a data category in the Station Data node in the Project Browser this will activate the selected data category and the related tables will be loaded for viewing and or editing e Click directly on the Station Data tab and the most recently used category will load
259. e necessary connection string e Database Template Properties Select a database structure from a list of available templates or create a new database template e Project Information In this window specify the project name project folder and clients e Project Settings Specify the project location projection system units and specify the SCS soil settings for the project For more details please refer to Chapter 3 Project Management 2 Major Components Template Manager The Template Manager provides tools to modify the HGA database structure and define user level views The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and user settings Some of the features in the Template Manager are available only for database administrators referred to as Power Users in the context of HGA These features include all operations that alter the database schema and table and field designs Features that are accessible only to Power Users include e Adding deleting tables and or fields defining primary keys defining relationships between tables e Save user templates as a new database schema structure e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats T11 e All features that are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 13 Template
260. e plots will not be duplicated HGA reads the necessary data for a borehole log plot from the database when displaying the plot To design a borehole log plot template select at least one borehole in the Station List grid Alternately activating a Station Group suffices for this purpose as all boreholes are assumed selected if there 1s no specific selection made in the grid Once a station group containing the desired boreholes is opened and at least one borehole is selected right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Browser Select the New pop up menu option as shown in the following screenshot to design a new template EN Sorcha H E Plots E New Import Design Export Design Refresh e Refresh all In the New BHLP Design window that appears enter a name for the new borehole log design 1 New BHLP design a x Name Sample OK Cancel EJ Help Note that the background color of the text box turns red if you type the name of an existing borehole log design indicating that you cannot have two BHLP s with the same name Modify your new template name slightly and the OK button will be re enabled In the Borehole Log Designer window that opens the borehole s you have selected previously will be made available in the Select Station combo box at the top left of the borehole log designer You can now add the desired elements to the empty BHLP template as shown in the following screenshot
261. e right frame allow you to set and modify the text characteristics of the selected style 8 4 1 Printing Limitations Although the Report Designer provides a detailed interface for customizing reports and templates it is limited in the following ways e You cannot print multiple copies within one print event e You cannot select specific pages to print e You cannot select a page range to print If you wish to print your reports using these settings you can always export the report 222 Chapter 8 The Report Editor as a PDF and print the report s from a PDF Reader Using non default page dimensions If you wish to print to any non default paper size e g plotter paper you must first specify the page dimensions in three different areas within the Report Desinger To do so follow the steps below 1 In the Report Designer select the Page Setup button from the main toolbar e Select the Printer Settings button e Specify the page size from the PaperSize dropdown box Alternatively define the page dimensions by selecting Custom Paper Size from the PaperSize dropdown box and then entering the Width and Length values below e Click Ok 2 Select the Printer Settings button from the main toolbar e Select the desired plotter from the Name dropdown box e Again specify the paper size e Click Ok 3 Manually define the page size within the Report Desinger by increasing decreasing the page extents with the mouse curso
262. e see Chapter 6 Quality Control Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 61 Unit Converter Use the Unit Converter to convert commonly used units from one form to another For more details on this tool please see the Unit Converter section in this chapter BackUp Database Use this option to create a backup copy of the SQL Server database used by the current project A backup of the database is helpful in order to preserve data or to detach and send the database to colleagues or SWS Technical support Select this menu item and provide a name and directory path for the file It will be saved with the BAK extension If the entire project is to be backed up simply make a copy of the project folder however 1f you have map projects in another directory then copy these additional folders as well NOTE Backup and restore works only if you are running HGA on the system that also hosts the server the server can be MSDE or SQL Server NOTE SQL Server does not permit saving the back up copy of the database to a mapped network drive it can be saved only to a local drive Restore Database Use this option to restore the SQL Server database in case of accidental data deletion or loss due to mechanical failure Before selecting this option ensure that the appropriate HGA project is open Then select the Restore Database option and locate the BAK file which was created using the Tools Backup database option NOTE If you are using SQ
263. e the Adobe Reader a link has been created in the interface to download the appropriate software for free The Installation button will initiate the installation of the software on your computer HGA must be installed on your hard disk in order to run Please read the section on hardware requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Ensure that you have administrative rights for the installation and software registration NOTE If the installation interface fails to load automatically you can e Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the DVD ROM drive e Open the Installation folder e Double click on the installation file to initiate the installation Please follow the installation instructions and read the on screen directions carefully Although the HGA Software needs to be installed on a local hard drive the location of the database will depend on e the expected size of the data e the number of anticipated users and e data and system security 8 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst SQL Server 2005 Express can be installed on your hard drive as part of the installation process If the WHI SQL Express is installed it will be setup as the default database server SQL Server 2005 Express 1s a database engine built and based on core SQL Server technology NOTE Previous versions of HGA have used Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine MSD
264. e values V to i EA Description Data type Unit oi type STRING 1 a Es Patten Unit categor V Consistency gory V Structure z V ASTM Descriptor V Color View Settings Z vaa Field name v formation_name V formation_unit soil_type J Read only IV moisture Default value Unit Y comment II o 4 Hydrogeology 4 Modelling Format Depth rules H V features y 4 Well Construction HM Soil Testing Get values from list 4 Soil Sampling Saut y aera cep maa ONS Soil List Y E Allow values only from list H V Monitoring Event ai A H Mining Exploration Validation rules H Geophysics Left Right 4 Well History v X M User Category x FXAQE I Last Change 06 18 2004 2 44 34 PM Close Help The Database Settings section of the interface allows all users to define Field name this name will be used only for identification in the SQL Server database Data type Unit Category applicable for Double data types only Units applicable for Double data types only The following field types are available e Long Field must contain an integer value e String Text or numbers use for descriptive items e Double Real numbers used for storing measured values such as measurements or concentrations e Bit Field contains a tick box e Image Field can be used to store a raster image e DateStamp Field contains date value e TimeStamp Field contains a time value e DateTimeStamp Field contains a date
265. e viewer window The next step 1s to map the fields 7 2 2 Field Mappings Under the Data Source tab you can define the field mappings for the plot as shown in the screenshot below Settings Data Source Query Plot Grouping Series Grouping Le Time Value Units Label ND_factor Detection Limit Uncertainty Standards Multiplier Bar Color Schema 182 Chapter 7 Plotting Adding Plots Query select the data source for the plot from the combo box currently the data must come from data queries Plot Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping plots Series Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping series at least one field must be selected for grouping the plot series Time Axis specify a field to be used for the Time X axis This should be the date field from your query Value Axis specify a field to be used for the Value Y axis This will be observed result value for the parameter s of interest Units loads the following dialog allowing you to make unit conversions unes x Unit category TE Units sec y Unit conversion C None Constant Conversion Factor Factor Label From field YaxConversionF actor Ok Cancel Select the unit category then the units from this category If the units categories are not compatible for instance Time and Length then the buttons are disabled You may also select a field to be used for
266. e will appear on the left side of the cross section window the end point of the line will appear on the right side of the window Locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section NOTE Each cross section has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 13 Profile Settings 11 4 Drawing Cross Section Interpretations Interpretation of the cross section is a considerably creative process however the cross section editor makes it easy for you Once the selected stations have been loaded into the cross section editor the appropriate layers must be manually drawn and interpreted Start the interpretation by selecting the layer type from the layer manager Choose from Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model Each of these is explained below Hydrogeologic interpretations can be copied from geologic interpretations As such it is a better practice to first perform geologic interpretations of the cross section 11 4 1 Loading Surface Layers 378 Surface layers e g DEM Surfer GRD in a Map Project can be used to generate a detailed topography model line for a cross section Note A surface layer can only be defined for a cross section line when the cross section is being created in the Map component of Map
267. eatures such as the water table Integrate with IsatistM geostatistics software The HGA Map Manager provides a direct link to Isatis allowing you to perform in depth data analysis and interpolation using advanced geostatistical techniques Improved labeling on Maps and Cross Sections Hydro GeoAnalyst now provides more flexibility and control for displaying point labels on the maps and cross sections With the new label renderer you can show a primary and secondary label prepend and append text set the desired rotation and specify the default label placement Support for Microsoft Office 2007 Import data from Excel 2007 xlsx worksheets and Access 2007 accdb databases 1 2 About Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA is implemented through a number of modules each performing a specific task This approach allows HGA to be memory efficient flexible and expandable In addition with most of its data and settings implemented in the Extensible Markup Language XML there are unparalleled and unlimited possibilities to develop third party components to work with the software Some of the modules that come with HGA include 2 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst e Data Transfer System e Template Database Schema Manager e Query Builder e GIS Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e Borehole Log Plotter e Report Designer e 3D Visualization A brief description of each module is provided in the following sections while a more deta
268. ect the Line draw button x from the toolbar As soon as this option is selected the following Model Layers dialog will appear Topography Topography Topography Layer O Slice 2 BottLayert O Slice 3 BottLayerz a a O Slice 4 BottLayers Edit Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog choose the desired model layer by selecting the radio button from the first column in this grid Each model layer may be selected and assigned only once Interpretation layers that are already drawn in the cross section are colored in orange and are not selectable Click OK to continue Place the mouse cursor at the left boundary at the desired depth of the intended model layer when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the cursor will snap to the boundary Click once on the left boundary to add a vertex at this location and start the line Slowly move the mouse cursor to the right across the cross section to the interval in the first station which represents the model layer When the cursor 1s within the specified buffer distance from the station s lithology interval snapping will be activated With a left mouse click add a vertex at desired and appropriate locations both within and outside station intervals Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor e Continue to move the mouse cursor across the cross section using the left mouse button at each station to add a vertex at the desired location for the model
269. ecting the Show Labels checkbox You can also change the label color by clicking on the Color box and change the font by clicking on the Font box Label Direction can be modified by making a selection from the combo box choose from horizontal or vertical direction BHLP Columns 275 BHLP Settings i xj Flot re General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend i Background Color e W Outline Colar Shadow Color Under the Legend tab there are settings that control the Visibility and the Background and Outline visibility and color The specific settings for the Depth sub node are shown in the following screenshot x E Es BHLP Depth Series ES Scale e Visible J E Plot F pop oe Plat Style Line x Jepth Seri Line Style Solid mn E well Construction Line width 4 ES Lithology ES Interval Line Color I Symbol Rect E Symbol Size 3 Symbol Color E Horizontal scale Primary axis Plot Line and Symbol options can be configured and the Depth Series can be shown hidden using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Horizontal Scale for the plot series choose from Primary or Secondary axis 276 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter The specific settings for the Interval sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings E x E ES BHLP Interval Serie ES Lithology 7 Visible ES Well Construction l i Scale Fill calor Ml EES Pt Trans El 5 parency 50 B E Plot Are
270. ection contains all the measurements for each channel ordered by date and time To import MON file data into your database follow the steps below e STEP 1 Select MON Data Files e STEP 2 Map Data Fields e STEP 3 Import Data into the Database Please note that the MON data import procedure can accommodate multiple MON files simultaneously However for demonstration purposes only one MON file will be used in the following guide Also before you import data from MON files the water level values need to be compensated with respect to the top of the well casing This can be done through SWS datalogger software Diver Office Data Logger Manager by performing barometric compensation on the MON data using the Top of Casing method Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 41 Step 1 Select MON Data File Select MON files The first step requires specifying a MON data source Click the Open Folder button Locate and select a MON file s and click Open MON ASCII Standard File MON E The selected MON file s will now appear under the Select data source frame shown below 42 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst A eee lol xi Select data source MON Files C Documents and Settngs ayne Desktop CTOD 070503132027 61667 MON MON File Information TableNiame FieName Das Um Desin Loger stings Intente CTD Dwe Sos pea a a EIA EIN EAN IN ooo ogg stings Istunentnunbe
271. ed e In some cases it may not be possible to obtain certain geographic data in a coordinate system that is consistent with the rest of your project data In this case a geotransformation can be applied to express the data according to your project s coordinate system Note Currently Hydro GeoAnalyst does not support vertical elevation datum shifting Please ensure that your elevation data is consistent before importing into HGA Geotransformations can potentially occur in Hydro GeoAnalyst in any of the following scenarios e When station data is displayed in the main Hydro GeoAnalyst window e When data is imported into Hydro GeoAnalyst e When data is displayed in Map Manager e When data is imported in Map Manager e When a projection system is defined in the new project wizard As such you may be prompted to specify geotransformation settings in any of the aforementioned scenarios Configuring a geotransformation is very simple and is described in the following section Configuring Geotransformations When Hydro GeoAnalyst detects that a geotransformation 1s required it will check the internal geotransformation settings to determine if the geotransformation has already been defined If not it will prompt you with the following dialog 476 Appendices Please selectarea TST A geotransformation will occi between the following coordinate systems NAD_1927_UTM_Zone_17N acs_wGs_1984 Please select the area that best des
272. ed plot The line settings can be modified as described below Line Settings When a line is selected for a plot the Settings tab will display the appropriate Line Settings as shown below Settings Mapping Name Ef Line Visible True Width 1 Color MA Red Style Solid El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serif Spt Font color MM Blac Symbol Triangle Color Gl Blue 5 4 4 Name set the line name Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Show hide markers on the line using the Visible option Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 7 5 Saving and Exporting There are several options available for saving exporting and printing your plot page design 194 Chapter 7 Plotting 7 5 1 Saving Plot Page Design Once you are satisfied with the current plot page design click on the Save button on the toolbar The new plot will appear under the Plots node in the HUA tree 7 5 2 Saving Plot as Template Once you have designed the current plot to your style and data needs you can save the design as a template for re use in future plots To do so Right mouse click on Plots and select Save as a plot template from the menu Enter a name for the plot template and OK The template will be available
273. ed to smooth the transition from one time to the next or 1t may be decreased to make the browsing proceed faster The Start value indicates the value at which the browser will begin must be a value gt 0 The Finish value indicates the value at which the browser will end must be lt 100 The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish values Recording Animation to AVI file Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer supports recording any animation rotation plume animation over time isosurface or color map spanning to an AVI file for playback during presentations and demonstration using any compatible AVI file player 400 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer To record the AVI locate the Record button in the lower right corner of the window Click on this button and a Video settings window will appear as shown in the following figure e Yideo settings El E 2 x Custom frame size Awl File name A Projects a0 SH G430 1 yl pe Frame size Full window size Compression Full Frames Uncompressed Height 240 Frames per second i 0 OF Cancel The default AVI File name is the address of the V3D folder for the current project plus the name of the 3D project and a sequential number of the video made for this project followed by the AVI extension The AVI File name can be modified to any path and filename required by clicking the
274. ed using the 3D Interpolator tool then displayed with the 3D Explorer The following section describes how to interpolate 3D points data in order to create 3D plumes for details on viewing the plume see Chapter 12 Plumes Display Settings The 3D Plume generation starts with a data set the data set must be generated by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the 3D Interpolation The following are required fields for the 3D interpolation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e X e Y e Z elevation of sampling point e Value concentration value for one or more contaminants e Sample Date if transient plume display is desired Once you have created a data query you may create a 3D Interpolated volume plume of the data To access the 3D Interpolation tools select Tools 3D Interpolation from the main menu and the following dialog will appear 3D Interpolation 1 al 15 x 30 Plume Project Name tce_exceeds_1 0 mo_per_kg Grid Region A of Nodes Min 535231 0 Max 535680 0 E r 40 535231 O 535680 0 i of Modes Min 4914365 0 Max 4814635 0 ly g 40 481 4305 0 481 4635 0 Z of Nodes Min 302 00 Max 324 00 lz 5 302 00 324 00 Interpolation method Inverse distance Advanced Settings F Interpolate log values
275. ee to four step process Data source details Name Value In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Next Cancel i The DTS also allows exporting data from a project to one of the following formats e Text files CSV e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Other databases For more details on how to import export data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System 2 2 Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar The HGA menu items have been specifically designed for optimal flexibility and ease of use The items in the menu bar are context sensitive this means that one or more menu items may be greyed out if a specific feature is not applicable for a particular view The top menu allows access to all of the functionality of the project browser tree view and all of the tabs Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help The following menu items are available in HGA e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings 32 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst e Tools e Help The following sections describe the items which appear in the main menu 2 2 1 Project New Open Selecting the New menu item will launch the Project Manager with the option to create a ne
276. efers to the page footer for the current report Any item placed on the page header and footer of your report will be displayed on all pages of the report In addition to these sections one or more sections named Group Headers and a corresponding Group Footer sections can be added to the report In the figure depicted above the data on the report is grouped by stations That is the data for each station is displayed together Group Headers can have their own header and footer that will be displayed above and below each group s data respectively Chapter 8 The Report Editor Data Fields Explorer For most report types the Report Editor takes data directly from the database based on the design and generates the desired report Access to the data in the database is provided through the connection string and SQL Statement These inputs result in a list of fields that are available for the current report These fields are listed in the Fields Explorer as shown below that can be displayed by clicking on the Fields icon on the toolbar Sr Retresh the fields Station list Mame chemical_name sample_date result value result _unit List of available fields One or more fields in the fields explorer can be selected and dragged and dropped into the desired section of the report 1f displaying data from these fields 1s desired Report Properties Toolbox The Report Properties toolbox as shown in the figure below provides the tools tha
277. egory e Description e g station name location coordinates elevation site etc e Geologic Description e g lithology soil properties hydrogeologic properties etc e Well Construction e g drilling protocol annular filling monitoring points casing materials well dimensions etc e Soil Testing e g SPT pocket penetrometer vane shear test dynamic cone e Soil Sampling e g Rock Coring Soil Chemistry results Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distribution Atterberg Standard Proctor Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Consolidation e Monitoring Events e g weather conditions bailing field properties water quality groundwater levels groundwater chemistry e Mining Exploration e g Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics e Geophysics e g Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density e Well History e g Pumping Rate Pump Screens Top of Casing status e User Defined Category Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts 29 All of the above data categories may be renamed and used differently 1f desired For example the category named Geology could be renamed to Surface Water and tables such as Catchments Surface Water Monitoring Locations Rivers etc could be organized under it Placing tables under any one of these categories does not have any effect on how the tables are stored in the database 2 1 2 Data Entry T
278. emoved e Click on the pointer button in the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor on this vertex which has been separated e Click once on this vertex and drag the mouse away from its position and place the polygon vertex in the new position 1f desired Set Features The Set Features option allows for modifying the display properties of most layers in your map project and other cross sections that intersect with the current cross section If this option 1s selected from the Edit menu a dialog similar to that shown below will be displayed ho x Set Features Fiver 77 0 az Highway lw NAME T well iY ID OK Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more features that are displayed in one or more layers in your map project For instance one or more rivers from the Rivers layer may intersect with a given cross section at one or more points Other features of importance may include roads railway lines lakes etc Features from selected map layers that intersect with a cross section may be displayed as a symbol and or label on 362 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor the cross section line NOTE The intersecting items display options can be defined only at the time when the cross section 1s created currently it is not possible to set these features later on once the cross section has been created Also intersecting items must be selected in Map Manager before the cross section is created Please
279. en and well casing materials Map Manager button loads the Map Manager by default the most recently used map project will be loaded View Cross Section button launches the Cross Section editor and displays the last edited cross section if any Data Import button launches the DTS for importing data into the project Data Export button launches the DTS for exporting data from the project 19 1 6 4 Project Browser The project browser tree lists the following items 544 Station Groups dl Project e Station Groups all Monitoring Wells a Boreholes e Station Data Data categories eab Soil Borings gt ll 0_ Stations e Queries 8 OC_Monitoring Wells a Boreholes_with_plot_data Crosstab fl clay thicker than 2 m o Maps e ll soll_borings_with_tce_exceeding_10_mg_kg H E Station Data e Cross Sections il Queries H E Crosstab e Reports T a e 3DView a BI Cross Sections Reports e Borehole Logs BASE BDView H Borehole Logs z Plots ee Plats These items may be part of any project Each item is organized as a node in the tree view with one or more items under each node If there is no item under a given node there will be no branches available Station Groups The Station Groups node contains the Station Groups in your HGA project By default all projects will contain a station group named Project that lists all stations in the database belonging to the project All station groups that are created for a
280. ends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deustch and Journel 1998 The program kt3d from GSLIB performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIB If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Exponential Gaussian Power and the Hole effect models If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 The Interpolator Options window for the Kriging method is shown in the following figure while each of the settings parameters is described below dE Interpolator Options HEO O a Nodes w IE Sar End Y Hodes Use Log Imterpolatior ___ Aestict hin Value __Flestict Max Vake _ Value Min Value Mas Real Hirn Real Has TEn Mir bimmingimt Max trimming limk Ponts per Block along Block size along Y 11 Block size along gt Min ponts for block kriging Max paints for block
281. entification When you select this option you must map to this field and you will then see the min and max available for this field as shown below You can then define the number of classifications default is 3 and the data range will be separated into equal number of parts At this point you can specify the color and the label HE Bar Chart Color Settings ae E a Ee x Define Color Settings i Graduated Color Classification Select a field that contains the classification pH Min D Mas 7 96 Number of Classifications 3 Color Break Value Label 2 65333333 0 265333333333333 MA 520666666 2 65333333323333 5 SUBBGEBREEBRE MA Oe F SOBGGGEG66666 7 96 OF Eancel Upon clicking OK the entire bar chart will be colored with the appropriate color based on where it lies in this criteria 7 3 Plot Settings Once a plot is selected and visible there are several settings that can be modified These settings are sorted into several groups explained below 7 3 1 General Series Settings Some of the most frequently used general plot settings are available when you right mouse click on a plot window that contains a data series and select Edit General Settings The following dialog will appear for line chart 186 Chapter 7 Plotting Plot Settings Line Width fi Line Style Solid y Label Visible Y Marker Visible Preview 10 3
282. enu in the upper left corner to switch Generate QC Results 173 between each type and the Lab Quality Validation Results table will automatically update The results for Blanks analysis are displayed in the screenshot below l Parais IC CO A terore P ELA ESO vanes atoanan COI IS CS COR LO LS IE CEEE EE ES IE C E E LS IES CEEE pere Jr fs ff AE LE CONEA EA a e Se L IE EEE O LN OO AHHH asas bia ense rzooo1an Ettore gt Jr Se fr CA ca CE 7 COIE EE Etybercene TOU ug Sz CA CC COIE EA IS ug Se Cs coa rar 3 Ja 9 f L waansass e anenserzoooran rober gt fr fs ff eee ee a a a A CONEA EA e CS CENA E A E e RS LL E LU CENENA IE CC fe COI A C J C J E IE 20000 CS EI 0 IE Sri are safe RC ff L CEA LEE Mpeg ae PEE C EI IE CS LIA EII LS IE COIE Ec CC EIA L IEA Ie EM O E A LE EE e 5 fg Sd EA EI IS foot DEE EA EI MA WALTER bie ET TEA A we E Records that exceed the method detection limit will be highlighted with the color and font specified in the Template The results for Spiked sample analysis are displayed below AA ELE SM Eyre 0 wad ug oo CA E ia ica su tae fei ALEA EIA EA LIM EC 200000 E 00 E CE CA E o OE IEC EII LCR LI 190 ot EIA TOO EC E ALEA EEE EI CIA CIA E E E AS A 1 This analysis compares the spiked measured SM sample to the spiked theoretical ST sample for e
283. eotseensesesns 7 System Requirements arrere class 7 O E NIEREE 8 Uninstalling Hydro Ge Analy Sl tail 9 Sarine Hydro GeEOANAly St sciecner O i iai nidc eat a ethane aed 9 Hydro GeoAnalyst Demo Pro Ed ia 10 Updaatmo Old Projects ciao 11 Learning to use Hydro GeoAnNalysSt cccscsssscsccccccccccsssscscssssssssssssssssssssssccccccssssssees 12 Hydro Geon malyst Orie Laie lO A A ia 12 COMES a lr 13 1 16 A A Te es ee Ee tear Peer en OO 13 A O A ee ee eT ee 13 PAVOS SA A side telat Mea ua tia A AAA Be atest alee A Ai 13 EN A ERa 13 DADAS AAA AAA A E aeeasn aes 15 Stations last LD ads 15 Dair Ouere A sarendeahancal aE sea E as taseataaes tencasanenca seas saaates sms nantasnasasahanss 15 Station Dala TD ica 15 Man ME oa 17 TOO DANG A E 0 N ais dott oatuenaea aoa eco sans 17 Projec CBTOWSC sda sh a elt aes rasa eet E 20 AA PS A A 20 Station ata Oda Caves ONS aorta tacrbesteaguenasactstaqunewannenduaunscinersessuninensnndaa test 20 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services QUEME St Das 20 CTOS ADA AAA A EA TETA EAA EAEE AEA AA 21 O a N 21 CLOS ECUONS e a ee DR a e E E iban 21 A made vy ouieeadiede 2a BI NC WS a did 21 A A Seucstannes uted saad beach banat cnasatnoat bacuaceawacuemoddargan sce O EAT E 21 A NA 21 Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts ccccccccsssssssssscsscccccccssssscssccccssssesscees 24 oduc HOn eraan sys Crouse Ourcr tence Satara yc mr wre rmne encom Ver rerne ren ny S 24 SAMOA VCS a
284. epth Interval Plot Propertie Description Category Time a Unit Pumping Rate Conductryity Concentration Recharge Choose the Plot Series Type enter Plot Properties as required then click OK to create the plot column Next the Plot Entities must be defined Click on the Plot Entities sub node to expand the Entities options as shown in the following figure Borehole Log Designer Sample l E oO xj Select Station lt m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 ES Design E5 Lithology ES LithologyEntities Well Construction E3 Plot DepthPlotEntities Coarse Gravel H Sp z e rx DataTable DepthEntity Caption Depth Description Depth DataField WalueEntity Caption Sample Description E x DataField i Fine Sand tj IV Live update Close Export v Print y Help For a Depth Plot you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select 286 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the DepthEntity select the field containing depth values from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu For an I
285. epth interval information from to fields are depths not elevations Therefore the BHLP requires that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark Note When Queries are selected for the data source all Queries in your HGA project will be listed in the corresponding pull down menu i Queries i ice exceeds 10 mg per kg DataT able Quenes Using a Query instead of a Data Table provides more flexibility in the type of information that can be added to a BHLP For more information on developing a Query to use in a BHLP please see Chapter 5 Queries Please be aware that not all queries will be appropriate for use in a BHLP and that in some cases e g Lithology a query cannot replace a data table As well queries cannot be used if images are to be added Designing a Borehole Log Plot 283 NOTE When a Query returns more than 1 record for a selected station e g time varying concentrations at a single borehole over various depths the BHLP will automatically use the first result value in the query If using another value 1s desired then the Data Query should be modified with the appropriate conditions 9 3 2 Add Well Construction Column Next add another column type to the BHLP by right clicking on the Design node and selecting Add Column In this example Well Construction has been added to produce the design shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Samp
286. er interpretation 1s set to edit mode in the layer manager Update Cross Section Use this option to update the screen water level and intersecting layer information displayed on the current cross section The corresponding map project should be open in order to update information from intersecting cross sections Cross Section Info Displays summary info for the selected cross section Information for DD A El x Cros Section Line Length 1513 1 m Butter 200 0 m Starting Point Coord 536467 48174824 Ending Point Coord 536598 4813316 Vertical Exaggeration 23 8 Well Numbers 2 Display BHLP Use this feature to display a borehole log plot directly on the selected cross section when displaying elements such as geophysical plots and well screen intervals the borehole log plot can be a valuable asset when creating a cross section interpretation The BHLP layout settings is shown below 376 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor BHLP Layout Settings x TP Visible Horizontal Offset E p lt OF Cancel In the BHLP Layout Settings dialog there are several display options available BHLP Template select the desired BHLP template from the list e Visible show hide the BHLP on the cross section e Horizontal Offset set the horizontal position of the BHLP a positive offset will shift the BHLP to the right of the selected well a negative offset will shift the BHLP to the left of the selected well In th
287. er Access Level Management Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 55 Change Password This menu allows you to change the project password this feature 1s available for administrators only The following dialog will appear lala Old Password New Password Confirm Password Enter the Old Password in the first line Enter the New Password in the second line Confirm the new password in the third line When you are finished click OK For more details see Chapter 3 User Access Level Management User Preferences In this dialog specify the user preferences There are several tabs explained below AquiferT est AquaChem Select the location of the Aquifer Test application exe file C Program Files 4quiferT est41 VAquiferT est exe El OK Cancel In order to use the AquiferTest analysis feature you must first have AquiferTest 4 1 installed on the local machine and specify where the AquiferTest exe 1s located 56 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Preferences UUU J AquiferTest AquaChem Select the location of the AquaChem application exe file C Program Files 4quaChem51 AquaChem52 exe SS Select the location of the AquaChem database aqc file C Program Files 4quaChem51 Demo aqe S x ce ee In order to use the AquaChem Water Quality Analysis feature you must first have AquaChem 5 1 installed on the local machine and specify where the AquaChem51 ex is located
288. ered the necessary input fields for a new project and you can finish the Project Wizard and create your new project Finish to create the project and close the Project Wizard A new project will be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Please be patient during this process The new project should then appear in the main HGA window The first time the project loads the settings for User Access Management will be presented As the creator of the new project you will have Administrator rights where you can add remove users and assign access rights For more details on this feature please see User Access Level Management on page 83 You may return to the Project Manager settings window at any time 1f you need to modify any of the project settings defined above To do so select Project Properties from the main menu of HGA This is explained in the following section 3 2 4 Modifying Project Properties Once a project is created there are certain settings and properties that may be modified some critical settings may be available as read only Using the Project Manager 105 To view the project properties select Project Properties from the main menu of HGA In this menu there are two options Connectivity and Miscellaneous Settings Connectivity This option allows you to check the database connection settings for the current project If the connection is lost or the server is modified the connectivi
289. eria You can design a query to prompt you for one piece of information for example a station name or for more than one piece of information for example two dates starting date and end date The report component will then retrieve all the records that contain that station name or all the records that fall between those two dates You can use criteria in a query to restrict the set of records that the query returns You can then send the query results to the report component for generating a report If querying the data for different records each time you generate a report is desired you may want the report component to prompt you for criteria to enter for example Station name A query that prompts you for criteria is called a parameter query The following paragraphs show you how to create a dynamic report based on parameter queries The following 1s the format of the parameter query that you can create for use in the reporting component SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table gt WHERE lt value gt lt Key Required Optional Caption Optional Default Value gt The following table summarizes the parameters that are typically included in a parameter query Default Value Sets or returns a string expression containing the query parameter s default value Select a station Select DISTINCT Name as Name from station in the query shown below Key Sets or returns the query parameter s key name Station Name in the q
290. eries this is read only and cannot be modified The plotting component supports display and manipulation of multiple plot windows in the viewer window Number of columns controls how many columns will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots Number of rows controls how many rows will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots 180 Chapter 7 Plotting For example 2 columns X 2 rows means that 4 plots may be displayed simultaneously in the viewer window Spacing width controls the amount of space between each plot in the horizontal direction Spacing height controls the amount of space between each plot in the vertical direction 7 2 Adding Plots The data source for the plots must originate from a Data Query before you create a plot you must build and execute a data query using the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set you are interested in analyzing along with the fields for a time series plot TIP If you are plotting a large water level dataset which was logged using a small time interval e g 1 sample per hour over many days use the average aggregate function in the query builder to query the daily average water level By doing this you will lower the number of data points in your query and thus lower the drawing time when displaying the time series plot The following are required fields for the Time Series plots and as such must be present in your data query
291. erties of features that intersect with cross section lines when viewing a cross section in the Cross Section Editor Selecting this option launches a dialog similar to that shown in the following figure The dialog makes a list of all line type layers available for selection Intersections With Cross Section Lines a X M River IL Sample Fa M Highway ID Sample w 0 T Contour Mas TCE Mas CONC Sample o 0 M CrossSectionLine2 name Sample m 50 OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more cross sections or any line type features such as rivers and highways in this dialog it is possible to specify the features to be displayed on the cross section plots The dialog also allows you to set display properties of these features The following options are available e Name Name of the intersecting layer read only e Field Select a field to represent the layer typically Name ID Text e Font Select a font for the label e Symbol Define symbol properties for the selected layer e Angle Define label angle The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view The Symbol column contains the symbol options for the selected layer Double click on the field in this column to load the options shown below Description of Menu Items 345 346 Point Style Ed Paten wie Font WHI_Symbol ka Symbol x bl Fil
292. erver The next step 1s to select or create the Database Template for the project 3 2 2 Step 2 Create Project Dependent Tables The next window in the Project wizard contains the Database Structure settings This includes tables fields and relationships In this window choose from one of the existing database templates or create a new one as shown in the figure below Using the Project Manager 99 10 x Step 2 Create project dependent tables Select a Project E This step allows you to create the Templates tables that will be used to store your data The tables will be Environmental metric created based on a selected template that defines th Database Structure Preview TARRA kaai y Tables Fields Please select create a template y browse through the tables and Location fields that will be created and click description_addins on the Next button to proceed Geologic Description Lithology Hydrogeology Modeling features Well Construction Drilling Protocol Casing Screen hd Description Copy All Stations to Project lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Selecting the Database Template for your project In this window you may select from a pre defined Database structure or create a new database structure for the project For your convenience there are several Database structures included with HGA which include the necessary tables for storing and managing envir
293. ery such as Vinyl Chloride gt 10 ug l The chemical name Vinyl Chloride may be selected from the combo box since this chemical name is part of a linked list See the example shown below 138 Chapter 5 Queries OXEHE A Station Group Quen Data Query Design SQL View Preview Display Fields Select a Query VCExceeds20 HH Function Expression station id id i soil_samples station x igo ee a sys_sample_code Sample_name sample_date from to chemical_name result_value result_unit conc_ppm fractioncode interpreted_qualifiers reporting_detection_limit result_comment y Source Conditio Project X X J Map and BHLP Ready JV Use current projection system Conditions soil_chemistry chemicalname F soil _chemistry result_value cis 1 2 dichloroethylene Tetrachloroethylene Trichloroethane Trichloroethylene TYOC Vinyl Chloride Advanced Close Help Field Name soil_chemistry result_value Type DOUBLE Rows pils Time 0 0 0 15 Likewise 1f a date 1s necessary for one of the Expression fields simply double click on the date field or press the button and a mini calendar will appear as shown below xa as Station Group Query Data Query Design SOL View Preview Display Field Select a Query station id EH Che
294. es A A O o PE RO 298 A E E O RT 298 A tenant ened balan A V T E A E E AE E 298 ET h IENE AIEE A E E A NE II T 298 E T AT E E A TRETE T E A A T TAA 298 E EE EAA IEAA EAS FE EE EESE AEE E EA A TA NEATE EEEE ENNEN 299 FRC ODE asa tad isis 299 EXPOR PTOJECL rar ARA E E E EA E 299 EDON I a E E A T 299 Prop ioo onee a A a N 300 Pi aa aaa a a a a E N 301 Pa A e a A A IA 301 A A TAER scenes I E AE AE E AE IEE E anon tics bank aaa AEE ET O canes EAE EA 301 A EE IE A A 302 OPEM A soazaa E E E a e AOS 302 A T E E EAE E ATE EI TEEN err TEE Te TAE FETT 305 AO 307 AO 314 A O O 314 Bs CU a a E AE IESE A EEEE EE EE A ERE EE IE ES 314 a S e A E E a E 314 SSES a a do a a 315 Rondelet nera e Er 316 Exrcate Thema Mp aae NEN E ET 320 Modit y rhematic Map tl 322 EAE r AATE E T E EEAS ENE aldo adas 323 Era NG o Da oa a o o eet o o host esane 326 NIG AyD AL eit estate crashes Scan Satie cana lw ad di ici 327 A O PCR Ey Oe See Cetera Eee nee oe Ce EMER Se eee Seen SCPE Te See 334 OMe ates vest A E AE IEA Oana ACE E PONER PESAN 335 A ane ea lamin ea ictal nase 335 IPAS Ue reeset seas O A tenn leet se aan tise cade ate ated ae hg ease aclieea neatacet nants Miehe elites ciate teed it 335 DES e o le e O 335 Delta e o ee 335 LN Ne A A A A seats 335 Delete VE Na SETE 335 Copy Mapto COpbOard tt naaa ci 336 A A A A A A EN Eee OTe 336 PON ON A e ce ee gra sca tse gcse oj bein oe a oe epee tnaaioastey eatin 336 Recta ora el e eno dio 337 o A OS 337 RE A 3
295. es in the Map Manager e Layer Manager Manages activating a layer visualizing and or editing layers e Map Window Contains the visible layers for the map project e Layer Information Displays the system for the selected layer e Coordinates Displays the X Y coordinates for the current mouse cursor location and the Map Projection system e Scale Displays the scale for the map window e Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section Editor window The Layer Manager allows you to manage the layers in the map project The icons at the top of the Layer Manager provide some insight into the functionality Layer Manager These features include Toolbar Y 7 LineLayer Y PolygonLayer E Group Control Expand and collapse group layers e Visible Set the visibility status of the selected layer Station Layers Monitoring Wells MD TextLayer Y Contour Layer e Editable Make the echo com selected layer editable or O not by checking or AA ee unchecking the check box A a Currently only those ee oe shapefiles created in the Map aan i Manager are editable Aunort color bmp e Label Displays the ee Layer name 329 9 330 14 O e Symbol Edit the a e symbol identifying the layer pp on the map DEM_UTM17 356 0289 The Layer Manager will contain a Layer ID 12 Image Layer numerous types of layers each represented by a different symbol type In the
296. es of depth dependent graphs It supports both the Depth Interval as well as the Depth Point based data types The following are some example data that may be displayed using this column type e Geophysical investigation results e Analytical results chemical concentration e Analytical results for soil physics moisture content bulk density etc e Soil testing results pocket Penetrometer SPT BHLP Columns 271 Various plot settings are available For Depth Point based graphs the plot column supports the following plot types e Points e Connected vertices line graphs with or without points e Bar charts For depth interval plots the area under the plot may be filled in To create a Plot column click the Add icon and select Plot from the combo box provided A new Plot column will be created in the designer window To create specific plots within this column select the newly added Plot sub node from the Designer tree and click the op Add button again The Add a Plot Series window shown in the following screenshot will open Add a Plot Series xX Flot Series Type f Depth C Interval Plot Properties Label Description Category Time Unit Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration tei From this window you can define the Plot Series Type and select a plot Category and Unit to use The categories are based on the unit categories available in the current database template Enter a Label
297. essage where applicable e Product name and version number e Product serial number e Computer make and model number e Operating system and version number e Total free RAM e Number of free bytes on your hard disk e Software installation directory e Directory location for your current project files You may send us your questions via e mail fax or call one of our technical support specialists Please allow up to two business days for a response Technical support 1s available 8 00 am to 5 00 pm EST Monday to Friday excluding Canadian holidays Phone 1 519 746 1798 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws supportO slb com Training and Consulting Services Schlumberger Water Services offers numerous high quality training courses globally Our courses are designed to provide a rapid introduction to essential knowledge and skills and create a basis for further professional development and real world practice Open enrollment courses are offered worldwide each year For the current schedule of courses visit www swstechnology com training or e mail us at sws training slb com Schlumberger Water Services also offers expert consulting and peer reviewing services for data management groundwater modeling aqueous geochemical analysis and pumping test analysis For further information please contact sws services O slb com Schlumberger Water Services Software We also develop and distribute a number of other useful software produc
298. ex e Model layer lines cannot intersect each other e Model layers need to be drawn in the order they are created For instance the bottom of model layer 3 can not be drawn between model layers one and two Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines While drawing a model layer interpretation line it is possible to snap to part of or all of the vertices of an already drawn model layer line This can be helpful for defining geologic layers that pinch out 1 e have zero thickness in some parts of the site Snapping between two selected vertices Whenever a model layer line is drawn and the vertex of the line is within the buffer for a vertex of an adjacent model layer line a blue box will appear outlining the vertex on the adjacent line If the mouse is clicked on this vertex the vertex will snap to the existing vertex The line vertex will change to an orange color to indicate the vertex is linked shared between the two model layer lines You can link to as many vertices as desired by repeating the above step However if snapping to a series of consecutive vertices is desired you may click on the first and the last desired vertices The cross section editor will create the necessary number of vertices on the model layer line being drawn and link them to their respective vertices For instance if there are five vertices on the existing model line layer between the selected first and last vertices six vertices will be created on the
299. example shown here the layer types from top to bottom are as follows e PointLayer Point shapefile represented by a point symbol These include station groups and data query layers imported into the map project About the Interface 293 294 e LineLayer A line symbol indicates a cross section line contour line layer or annotation line e PolygonLayer Polygon shapefile represented by a polygon symbol e TextLayer Text annotation layer represented by a T symbol e Contour Layer Contour line layer e Station Layers A group layer containing several component layers e Boreholes and Monitoring Wells Station group layers e vc_exceeds_1 mg per A data query e CrossSectionLine2 Cross section line layer e Color Shade A color shade layer e Airport_color bmp Georeferenced raster image e WO Stations A station group layer with graduated rendering e DEM_UTM17 A surface DEM layer Grouping Layers Group Layers help organize map layers that share similar characteristics in a map project For example if your map contains a railroad layer and a highway layer you may choose to group these layers into a single group layer called Transportation Network Group Layers behave similarly to other layers within the Layer Manager panel If you turn off the visibility for a group layer the component layers will also turn off You can also move a group layer up or down the layer list change its draw order and ungroup layer
300. ey In cases where the primary key is composed of two or more fields a button is shown in the cell where the foreign key is to be entered and clicking on this button launches a separate dialog similar to the one given below Set Foreign Key In the above dialog a matching field must be provided for each field in the primary key Working With the Template Manager 441 of the current table The selected matching fields will form a foreign key in the child table When entering data into child tables Hydro GeoAnalyst limits the values for the fields in the foreign key to only those that are present in the primary key of the parent table This 1s done by using the distinct list of values in the primary key as a pick list All parent tables to the current table 1f any are listed along with the primary and corresponding foreign keys in the read only grid Table is CHILD to located towards the bottom of the main window An example is shown below Template Manager Demo Of x Environmental y x fh or Use as project default Database structure Table Settings Descriptions IV Description ES MEA Database Settings H Geologic Description Table type 4 Well Construction Table name ow_level YP 4 Soil Testing Global Y Soil Sampling Example Global Time 4 Monitoring Event E Depth Interval 4 Chemistry_Sample Examination Event H Chemist
301. f the georeference points is deleted and a new georeference point is assigned A box will appear in the map window defining the image corners The image region can be modified as explained below To delete a georeference point e Click the Delete Point button in the toolbar e Select one of the georeference points to delete it NOTE When a georeference point is deleted a new georeference point must be added since two georeference points are required to create a coordinate system Once the Georeference points have been defined the map region may be modified In the Select Map Region window the map region is represented by an outline of a box with circular nodes at each corner and with arrows pointing along the X and Y axes The map region box can be shifted or expanded to any alignment on the site map using the toolbar options described below These options may also be accessed from the Options menu on the Main Menu bar Resize Region Click and drag a corner of the map region box to stretch or shrink the size of the map region The new map coordinates will be updated to display the new map region Description of Menu Items 309 Rotate Region Rotate the map region Align Rectangle Align the map region with the x axis Maximize Enlarge the map region to the full extents of the basemap m le la e HINT If it is desirable to use the entire image for the map use the Max imize option to expand the map region to the full exten
302. f the soil type names and patterns for each classification The Material Specifications Editor may be launched from two locations e Select the Material Specifications option from the Settings menu or click on the lt j button in the toolbar e In the Project Wizard click the button provided in Step 4 Provide Project Settings The Material Specifications Editor will appear as shown in the following screenshot Material Specifications Editor Demo_Project 3 Of x MEsisting Material Specifications Active Material Specification DIN 4023 y Name Name Picture Gravel Coarse Gravel Medium Gravel Fine Gravel Sand Coarse Sand Medium Sand Fine Sand Silt Clay f XHA FX rt ss The left side of the window displays the soil types belonging to the selected Soil Classification System SCS which may be chosen from the combo box in the upper left corner The right side of the window provides the interface for editing an existing custom material specification or creating a new one Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst In the lower left corner of the window there are four buttons e Use the button to modify the selected SCS e Use the scl button to delete the SCS e Use the y button to set the selected SCS as the project default e Use the fi button to export the SCS In the lower right corner there are several buttons that control the soils belonging to a SCS e Use the
303. face 13 Data Tabs Menu Bar ee f iydro eo Anabat Demo Ci Program Pies HGAnshat Projects ema Project Project Edt ew Bed Settings Tee Help 6 8 aS te XR AROS 5 COs EE F T a Station Giowps Profle 68 01 al Soon Let TE Dota ao Staten fata P n t r fea bhipd_ intervals Tinh Liv Jiws TOC rojec de Fomebeder FGH m LIZ 6d SHS AA 3450 all Sod Bourg arme 53515669 4014050 00 326 00 1270 Browse a WO_Stutions GE Se sano EDO zri A ARAS re 4 535040639 401406000 2400 12500 DES AENA 0150 3 i 5565269 401402000 300 34 00 ai DC Mirdi Wik ll leho ih po dsa ty heki hari a aidl_baergn vath ben emere DAEA A 24 Gti pei 5510669 401405000 2150 20 50 Lee E BATE ANI FAO AO nF Ge eq pea tae RAR diaii 350 MOE Well Profil A a cea Es 60 12 55 dw NA 136 a a Sectors ped pe G aad Aa SMBS AA at less HS Th 104200 210 1406 Se 44S LA Th Taha A AR ohh Dh 7 Sh 0776 66 4042100 120 11 Sh AAA Se Rete Fy SS 40142500 0013 411 1 DATE AAA FAL 350 7 Ta E EE AE pir de SASL AAA TA FAS A AAA A pr Er 53616106 401464150 15 Ti TSR AMARA A AH hal A AMARO A 27 12 SIE ALTO A IA Toe me ARS oe a Lhi 555 6 4014501 80 14 23 15 2 DAA A AAA A a a vid JAH eo La DAT AA OO TEA prir Darii Ad A ag 4145 563039 401406150 321 00 12209 AR AMA A Tah Ae AI ADA 1 2 Data Grids Data Loading Options 5 y TST aH Ag ZA ar Eat i 5007 19 AHL 27 10 391408 4814 2130 72
304. fault 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name the checkbox in the Y CTD_070503132 CTD Diver 13 Station X a 8056322954265 4 import column see CTD NO1 61667 312 4 01 Renate bola 3 Click on the Import button when ready C Documents and Settings Wayne Desktop CT D_070503132027_61667 M0N Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected CO E III III IIIT o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination y station b o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there y Cancel E Help Upon clicking Import a progress bar will display shown above If the import is successful a confirmation message will appear similar to the one shown below 46 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst i The Following files were imported successfully Ci Documents and Settings WaynelDesktopilTD_OF0503132027_61667 MON 83 Records Export Use the Export option to export data from the HGA project data may be exported to external files in various formats using the DTS Export Data This menu item will load the DTS with an option to export data from any grid to one of the following file formats e Text
305. figuration for E 2 pal x Configuration Hame Ad Cancel Type the desired name of the scene in the Configuration Name field and click OK This scene configuration including attributes rotations and shifts can be loaded during a later session by selecting File Load scene configuration from the main menu bar or by clicking the A Load scene configuration button in the toolbar 12 6 Saving and Exporting Options The displayed image can be saved by selecting File Export Diagram from the top menu bar or by clicking the EH Export Image button in the toolbar The following Save picture as graphics file window will appear Width Height In the Image Size field opening the combo box shows a list of several different sizes for the image size to be saved The desired size of the image may be selected or customized by entering new Width and Height values The image can be saved to three graphics formats e GIF e Bitmaps bmp e JPEG Image File jpg 426 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Any of these graphics formats can be imported into most word processing software packages Alternately the image may be copied to the Windows clipboard by selecting Edit Copy from the menu This image can be pasted into most word processing and graphics editing programs NOTE The resolution of the graphics file image will depend on your screen resolution and on the size of the Display Window In order to maxim
306. files from other applications In addition to loading base maps the Map Manager tool also provides the following options e Georeference and import raster image maps e Create Annotation layers for drawing and labeling e Display Station Groups or Station Queries from the HGA project as a Map Layer in the Map Project e Create contour maps of selected fields eg Elevation GW Elevation concentrations e Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields e Send maps to the Report Editor for printing e Created girded data file GRD For more details please refer to Chapter 10 Map Manager 6 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor provides an interface for viewing two dimensional geological cross sections for borehole data and creating and interpreting cross section layers Cross sectional layers can be digitized using conventional GIS drawing tools Once the cross sections have been defined the images may be loaded into the Report Editor for printing or the cross section image may be exported to a graphics file format Additionally one or more cross sections may be sent to the 3D Explorer for viewing site lithology in a fence diagram format The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of layer interpretations e Geologic layers that define the geologic layers eg sand clay till bedrock etc for the displayed stations e Hydrogeologic layers that define the hydrogeologic layers eg Aquifer Aquitar
307. frames e The Source table and fields found on left side of the window and e The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Data Mapping window is displayed below Importing Data using the DTS 115 116 Data Transfer System Import Al E Step 2 Data Mapping Source Destination Table Category Destination table hga_stationst Description station b Map source fields to destination fields Use Name Type Unit Conditions M stationid LONG E m M stationname STAING M x_utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr x DOUBLE degree M y utmnad83 DOUBLE unknowr y DOUBLE degree E X e zone LONG ft jug m oo tag STRING iM elevation DOUBLE m elevation DOUBLE m X n toc DOUBLE m L depth DOUBLE L export DATESTAMP E region STRING Total of records 147 C Primary key O Requires a unit to be selected lt Back Next gt Cancel Help The Source database table which contains the data to be imported can be selected from the list of tables available on the left side of the window Note that 1f the data source 1s a text file or a spreadsheet only one table will be available for importing The DTS makes an effort to automatically map fields from this table with those in the selected destination table If the field names are identical then the fields will be matched automatically Unmapped fields will appear blank this indicates that the DT S was unable to mat
308. from the menu and the following dialog will appear 57 29578 degree 57 29579 degree MESA EAT Rower iii Angle degree 1 Angle degree 1 a ES e oil y y ki 444 4 4 4 4 4 4 44 444 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 444 4 4 4 4 4 4 44 a ig Conversion OF 76 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst To use the Unit Converter e Select a unit category from the left side panel e Select a unit for this category e Then select a unit category from the right side panel e Select a unit for this category The conversion factor will appear in the fields at the top of the dialog 2 7 Major Components The major components of HGA have separate chapters devoted to an in depth discussion of the features and capabilities of each component The following components are discussed at length in subsequent chapters 1 Project Manager The Project Manager provides a wizard for creating a new HGA project and an interface for modifying the properties and settings of existing projects For existing projects the Project Manager can be called to see the project properties When a new project is created the Project Manager is called in the form of a Wizard To load the Project Wizard for new projects select Project New from the main menu The wizard displays several windows in an easy to use interface as described below e Database Environment In this window specify the database which will be used for the HG Analyst project and th
309. g 8 5 1 Example 236 The following example illustrates the procedure for creating a time series chart in the Demo project For this example you will chart the TVOC chemical concentrations observed at the Monitoring Wells The first step is to create a data query which will contain the fields of interest To do this open the Demo project then load the Query Builder For help please see Chapter 5 Queries Tools Query Builder from the main menu Data Query radio button E New button Define a name for the query in the dialog that appears type Chart TVOC OK In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Project Station Group and Database Station Groups Monitoring Wells Next add the fields for the query For charting purposes it is not necessary to define conditions for the fields simply add the fields to the Display fields Also the coordinates are not necessary so the Map Ready option can be disabled Check the box beside Map Ready to turn OFF this feature The fields for the query can be selected from the tree structure on the left side of the window beside Monitoring Wells Chemistry Results Sample_Date Click once on the field and drag this field into the Display Fields at the top of the window Chapter 8 The Report Editor Repeat this for Result_value field Result_Value Click once on the field and drag this fiel
310. g unselecting the desired value checkboxes The following buttons are available jul a Select all field values Unselect all field values OO o e eo Invert selected field values Filter by Condition When this filter option is selected the Filter by Condition frame will become active Here you can access the Expression Editor by clicking on the button Within the Expression Editor define a filter condition For example this method would be useful for a Date field when you would like to only show the dates that fall within a particular time period e g between Jan 1 and June 1 Please see Expression Editor on page 155 for more information on using the Expression Editor Chapter 5 Queries Once the filter settings have been defined click Ok to apply them to your crosstab report Data Marker Settings e Use the 4 button to load the Data Markers Editor where you can highlight data in the crosstab report Edit Marker Fact Field JHCO3 ini Maximum o Minimum J22 Masimum 340 O Hcos J22 340 Cell Style BackColor MA Red Content ligament MiddleCenter Font Arial 10pt ForeColor B black Gradient None GradientBackColor Ml Black ProgressBarColor MN Blue BackColor Determines the cell text background color In the Data Markers Editor window there are several options available for setting the display properties of data fields and defining colors for conditio
311. ge The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation After selecting the package select the Data Source please note the following limitations e HGA currently supports LAS v 2 0 e Third dimensional data array handling 1s currently not supported e Multiple log runs is currently not supported When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping Import LAS File Step 2 Data mapping 7 oe Select Section Field Select Table Field The second step requires field aan mapping from the source file bo Well l Description destination fields in one or more Log H Geologic Description HydroGeo Analyst database Parameter la ell Construction tables Sed Testing Sed Samping m Monitoring Event E Mining Exploration Map Select the appropriate E l Geophysics matching field fom destrabar E Well History in the right Click on the Map button Mapped fields val then be added to the Preview grd a the botban af the window To remove the mapping for a selected field select the appropriate row in the gid then click on the Delete Table Field Source Unit Table Field Uit ooo Mapping button Select one held from the souce file i the left frame Well lw ELL L ocation Station Hame Location 5 Location Y resistrriy_oh depth resishvity_oh resistivity
312. ge around the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Shift tab controls the location of the 3D image along the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e The Light Position tab controls the location of the light source for the 3D image e The Time tab allows you to adjust the animation time when viewing Plumes The Plume Browser tab is used when displaying Plumes and provides a summary view of plume data using planar slices or isosurfaces Rotating the Image The Slider Buttons are used to rotate the display window along the selected axis or shift the view within Display Window The X axis is oriented horizontally left and right across the Display Window Y axis is oriented vertically up and down the Display Window and the Z axis is oriented into and out of the Display Window 396 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer The image orientation and location can also be changed by right clicking anywhere in the 3D Display window and selecting one of the following options w Shift Rotate Screen and 7 Rotate Model and Y e The Shift option allows translation of the map region in the plane of the screen by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired direction e The Rotate Screen X and Y rotates the display around the fixed axes of the Display Window by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer along the X or Y direction e The Rotate Model X and Y rotates the display around the 3D image axes by clicking and
313. get units NOTE For station X Y co ordinates the AquiferTest project units must be the same as the unit system used for the HGA project for example if your HGA project is using UTM set the AquiferTest units as meters for some State Plane set the AquiferTest units as feet Currently there 1s no conversion for these units Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 65 Aquifer Test ate pumping_rates ATI ual O e Nee id F Paige pumping rate E start_date_time l 1 15740740740741E 05 DAT E TIME STAMP 86400 DATE TIME STAMP name start_date_time end_date_time pumping_rate E E ome 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw l In the Pumping Rates tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name pumping rate and the start and end interval Aquifer Test Y co ae H Observation Time __ Water Level la a 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 3 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW1 A 98 316728 3268 2703074 082 OW 8 98316728 3268 2703074 082 OW hoa Fy re EZ E R FG re ES Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst In the Observation Wells tab the workflow 1s the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map t
314. gn a data aggregation type for a field This property only applies to the Fact fields The following aggregation types are available Sum Count Min Max Avg Standard Deviation Estimate of Standard Deviation Variance Estimate of Variance Median Skewness Kurtosis DisplayExpression Use the Expression Editor shown below to create an expression property for a field header Expression Use the Expression Editor to create an expression property for a field Chapter 5 Queries Expression Editor E Expression editor E Ioj x Operators Functions E Operators E Arithmetic H Comparisons H Boolean E Strings H Other OF Cancel Line 1 Column 1 The Expression Editor allows you to construct logical and arithmetic expressions for determining values for both facts fields and dimension fields in your cross tab report The editor provides a list of source fields from the data query and various Operators and mathematical Functions You can define the expression by simply arranging the source fields and operators functions into the space below using the drag and drop with the mouse Once the expression has been defined click Ok The following buttons are available in the Expression editor Check Expression Use this button to Verify that the expression does not contain any syntax errors e 2 Open Expression Use this button to Open an existing expression from a text file e Save
315. go back to previous tabs and specify a new data source and or table for importing To close the DTS and return to HGA Close button at the bottom of the DTS window 4 2 Exporting Data using the DTS HGA supports exporting data to other destinations in two ways e The first and more direct way of exporting data uses a gridded data format This option is available under the Project menu Export Grid The current active grid can be saved in CSV XML MDB SHP or HTM formats e The second method of exporting data allows data transfer from a selected table to practically any OLE DB supported destination These destinations may include MS Access database SQL Server database Oracle databases and many others A dialog similar to that used for importing data into HGA database is launched whenever this feature is requested To export data using the DTS select the menu option Project Export Data and the following window will appear Data transfer system Export Step 1 Data source Package name Description IM Save changes to this DTS package Select data destination Specity evport he nene Neyt Cancel Help Exporting Data using the DTS 125 4 2 1 Specify Data Source and Package Similar to data importing the first step in the data transfer operation is to provide the desired destination The Destination can be provided either as a file name wherever applicable or as
316. grayed out The functionality of all Edit menu items are limited to grids In a grid only individual cells may be selected and copied cut and or pasted not the entire record Copy The Copy command adds the selected item to the Clipboard Use copy to move objects to another grid or to copy the selected grid value to another application Data may be copied from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be copied with a Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 49 50 Cut Paste Find single operation The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a document with the Edit Paste command The Cut command moves the selected item to the Clipboard Use cut to move objects to a different grid or to move the selected values to another application Data may be cut from a grid cell or from a text box the entire record may not be cut with one operation Cut deletes the selected object after copying it to the clipboard The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into a grid with the Edit Paste command The Paste command copies the Clipboard contents into the selected grid cell If no field is selected then this menu item will be inactive In addition if there is no data in the Windows clipboard then this menu item will be inactive Data may be pasted into a erid cell or a text box An entire record may not be pasted in a single operation This menu item loads the Find window with an option to search for records which sa
317. hat are available to all users For more details please refer to Chapter 13 Template Manager 2 4 List Editor The HGA package includes a List Editor tool that provides the ability to create and customize lists for any field allowing for efficient and effective data entry A list in HGA may be considered as a lookup table 68 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Linked Lists contain a specific list of values that may be used to supply a list of potential values for one or more fields Linked lists are especially convenient if the number of values for a field is fixed and limited Linked Lists may be created manually generated from existing data in the project or may be imported from an external source text spreadsheet or another database In HGA there are several examples of linked lists One example can be found in the Soil Sampling category in the Soil Chemistry table A combo box populated with a list of chemicals is provided for each cell under the Chemical Name field column Simply click on the combo box in any cell under this column and a list of chemical names is displayed for the selection This field is linked to a list of chemicals This eliminates the step of having to re enter chemical names in this field for each sample and minimizes any error that may occur as a result Below are some examples of using linked lists that you may create for the demonstration project 1 In the Stations table loca
318. hat only data with a warning message may be accepted Erroneous records will not be accepted for importing unless the errors are fixed The values that cause the errors are highlighted in different colors Records shaded red indicate Errors that must be addressed before the Import can continue Records shaded yellow indicate a Warning or Caution with a corresponding message To accept the posted warning messages and import these records select the items and click the Ae Accept button To reject the posted warning messages and ignore these records from the import select these items and click on the xl Reject button To view the error report click on the Display log file button Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Pa Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information a O records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted 124 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System If all desired data transfer operations are done the DTS can be closed by clicking on the Close button If however that is not the case the Back button can be selected to
319. he INLET ACO criar 354 Description or Toolbar Has iii 355 RR Menu ems sirce arseen EENE KN ESSE 358 a AIEE EA E E EE E EE A AE A ANA TE A ENEE E E T ETE E ee TS 358 E e E E E A E sake bareusseienatcen 358 E N E EEE E E N neice ee E AE E 358 EXPO Mode LAY TS aran a dai E E ces 358 EXPO IMASE ar di 359 A A telat a oils Ghdunaratiadies 360 A A A O A A 360 58 e PA PP A gu A O ad TEGO A EE 360 PO Ay ES o A e en don E E nantes sa maaan AT 360 Delete AM aaa ae caratceons as oteneseatad bent bons a a E N 360 A O A Soaea eae 360 DEE ls de e 361 o Xe iss tect R AE E E E E akue E suet ahaa nen N S 361 is E E A T E ENAA 361 CL PCALUEES Sesh E a r A 362 Chanse Well Width dat A aSalaaddeegteaeaca Sek 364 Chance A a a a nun e scumualaaantu tee 364 Change Vertical EXACTO ios 365 COPY WINDOW ama lam want EOE OOA A O 365 ews eects saa al an tence ee UNS 365 EOE E I e E ee vedere as aiec optawe Me eu nota a T mare senceanteaeatoae 365 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services LOO A A E a cate nates eI a oe ee oe 366 LOMA laa E E E 366 ANS Ex D ar a E E A ON 366 Next A a ion era E E AS 366 A E E dae enautaasetn seca ec inaneules 366 A 367 Proview BEHLP cases Gntautasasbanas oncbesenssmient aan oscar ooo ipod 367 LOS a cd 367 OPTIONS A o 367 A A OS 374 A weer steer te cerveee tutte ver rte ere Teer tte ee ee ret entree retire ten a axe rreer ee 374 Update Cross Second es 376 TOSS DECO MALO a A Eaton 376 Display BH ass 376 HI Di is 377
320. he color scaling used on each display object The color Palette settings can be modified by selecting one of 418 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Display Settings the display elements and clicking the button in the Palette field of the Display Settings table The Palette window will appear as shown in the figure below 4 Palette xj 0 Value 399574 5 a l COLOR Reset Change color A O a OF Cancel The default color setting contains a gradation of seven colors ranging from a dark blue at the minimum value to a dark red at the maximum value This range of colors and the values associated with each will be reflected in the Color Legend for the selected display element Changing Color Values The parameter values associated with each color can be changed by typing in a new value or by clicking on one of the color boxes beneath the color bar and dragging the arrow to a new location on the color bar Changing Colors The color for each color box can be modified by selecting the color box and then clicking the Change color button or by clicking the button for the color you would like to change Each color can be selected from an RGB 16 million color palette Adding Color Intervals In order to display more than seven color increments additional colors can be added to the color scale by clicking on one of the colors in the color value table and then clic
321. he number of station names that can be matched with the location information in the MON file White indicates that a single station name has been found Red indicates that a matching station name could not be found Yellow indicates that two or more matching station names exist in the database Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 45 If a row is either red or yellow click the fj button and manually specify a destination station name from the database Get Station amp Screen E Pleaze select Station and screen joj x List Matched 10 Pi mun 43 48358042 E EE 2 Persea Raster 1 E E 7 ESA EI E a 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pa cy cy co L mm Po Po Boy Poy Poy Poy Poy Ca Oo p a oy oy oy oy oy EIN EE a Lo e apo a 20 56134351 4340442141 L 0 wee 12 1 10 20 80 55930275 43 48331684 gt Ok Cancel re From the Get Station amp Screen dialog select a destination station and a screen id Click the List Matched button to open the List Matched dialog This dialog will display all the possible station and screen_id combinations that match the MON data After selecting click Ok Click the Import button to finalize the data import Import MON file data EM 101 x m Import data Notes M Select Channel IV Level J Temperature 1 Select one or more enabled channels TF Conductivity F Flowmen selected by de
322. he text field to become smaller if the text does not fill up the allotted frame DataField Allows you to attach the field to a datafield in a project through a DataControl e g ADO If the field is linked to a DataControl select the desired data field from the drop down menu All fields linked to a DataControl in a current report are listed in the Fields window under the Report Navigator tree Chapter 8 The Report Editor SummaryDistinctField Specify the field name of the field used in a distinct summary function SummaryFunction Set the function to be used for aggregating data SummaryGroup Set the name of group section for summarization SummaryRunning Determines whether the summary is a running value or not SummaryType Determines the type of summary to be used Check Mark Value Allows you to determine whether the starting condition of the checkmark is True checked or False unchecked Image LineColor Style Weight Set the properties of the lines borders for the object Picture Select the picture you wish to display in the frame Supported graphics formats are bmp ico cur jpg gif and wmf SizeMode Specify how the picture will be displayed in the frame Clip will display the picture at original size and if the frame is larger than the frame it will be cut off Stretch will adjust the image proportions to fit the frame even if 1t means distorting the p
323. he well name X Y coordinate and the observation date time and observed depth to water level Once all the required fields are defined click the Analyze button to send the data to AquiferTest For more details on how to use AquiferTest please refer to the AquiferTest User s Manual Water Quality Analysis Use this feature to analyze water quality data in AquaChem Select a few stations or a station group from the station list then select the menu item and AquaChem will launch with the selected stations Note The HGA database must be linked using the Link to External Database option in AquaChem This procedure is described in the AquaChem User s Manual When using AquaChem with HGA keep in mind that AquaChem is intended only for 1ts presentation and calculation features Data entry and maintenance operations should be performed centrally through the HGA interface and not the AquaChem interface The operations that must be performed in HGA include e Creating or modifying parameters e Importing data e Creating new samples or modifying sample information e Creating new stations or modifying station information Also the following operations are unavailable in AquaChem e Creating a new database instead the aqc file can be simply copied and distributed e Compressing the database if required this can be done by opening the database in the MS Access environment 2 2 7 Help Contents Displays the HGA On line Help
324. hematic map would be displaying the distributions of multiple chemicals 320 Chapter 8 Map Manager To create a Thematic Pie Chart for Hydro GeoAnalyst station data A Hydro GeoAnalyst Data layer from the Layer Manager to ensure that this layer 1s active e g a Station Group or Data Query layer such as Boreholes Monitoring Wells etc Select the menu option Map Create Thematic Map Pie Chart from the Map Manager main menu A Thematic map window will appear as shown below Create Thematic Map Fields in Table Fields for the Theme ELEVATION TOC Be rz Hent Cancel H Help Enter a name for the map in the Name field This name will appear in the thematic map list should you choose to edit it later From the left panel select the fields for map Move fields to the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button Next to proceed to the next window ELEVATION TOC Max Size Min Size Preview Description of Menu Items 321 In this dialog specify the field color by clicking on the colored rectangles to the right of each field and specify the chart size in the Max size and Min size fields A preview window in the lower right corner displays a preview of the true size and color of the thematic map as it will appear in the Map Manager OK to create the map The thematic map is an entity of the selected layer when this layer is hidden the co
325. hemistry An observation well is installed in a borehole by casing the borehole and Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst developing the well Station attributes for an observation well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation well depth screen locations casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type water level measurements and groundwater chemistry analysis results Surface Water Observation Point This station type may be a point on a river or a stream equipped to take water samples and measure river discharge and water level Station attributes include Station ID site ID river ID coordinates elevation type of observations type of equipment water chemistry flow rates etc Weather Station This station may be an observation point equipped to measure weather characteristics Station attributes include Station ID site ID coordinates elevation construction date type of measurements observations start observations end temperatures precipitation solar radiation air quality etc Stations Table The Stations Table stores all the station location information for all projects residing in the database All additional tables you create in your database are directly or indirectly linked to the Stations Table The Station Table may contain an unlimited number of fields Though as a minimum the Station Table must contain the following fields e Station ID 1D e Station Name
326. here are two locations in HGA where data can be manually entered and or edited the Station List and the Station Data tabs If the source data 1s available in a text file spreadsheet XLS or database the data may be imported using the Data Transfer System DTS Station List Tab The Station List tab provides an overview of the available stations in the selected Station Group As such only a few basic Station attributes name X coordinate Y coordinate Elevation are displayed in this tab These fields may be modified for a selected station or a new station may be created here and the values for these fields may be defined The Station List tab may be used to quickly enter numerous stations and define the basic attributes for each station HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalystProjectsiDemo_Projecti a 5 x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help ESAGERARE Halen Faas ix Station List EA Data Query Station Data wij Station Groups J E Station Data a ee Station Name Elevation B4 Description E Geologic Description 535250 19 4814315 00 332 10 S Well Construction 536668 12 4814036 00 334 80 E Soil Testing E 53553550 4814905 00 333 90 e i saeig 53548 40 M4814637 0 23100 pei 535459 40 481470490 330 90 l F 535476 10 4814781 10 330 90 E Geophysics 535469 50 4814652 70 330 60 E Well History 535484 70 4814546 50 329 90 0 E Queries 535626 80
327. hese common elements may be location nature of the data or the purpose for which the data is collected and stored A project can be created in an existing HGA database in which case it will be able to share some of the available existing data For instance if the new project is created in an existing database containing all groundwater monitoring locations in a Province State where the project is located the project may share all or part of the information stored in this database A project can also be created in a completely new database in this case HGA provides a step by step Project Wizard that assists with the project creation process Chapter 3 Project Manager Loading the Project Wizard The Project Wizard can be launched in two ways e Select Project New from the Main Menu OR e Click on the E New button on the toolbar A prompt will appear for the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials xX User Name Fassword OF Cancel HGA includes a default user Admin with no password If you have modified this user or added additional users with permissions to create projects then login now with the appropriate credentials The Project Wizard will then appear The Project Wizard contains three steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project These include e Step 1 Set Database Environment In this window specify
328. his example select Microsoft Excel Driver as shown below Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 453 Create New Data Source Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase YFP Driver dbf Microsoft dB ase T reiber dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xls Microsoft Excel Treiber xls Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf Microsoft FoxPro WFF Driver dbf hairs FR ODR ort irac DataSourceName e In this dialog enter a name for the new Data Source in the Name field e Click Next to proceed 454 Appendices Create New Data Source x When pou click Finish you will create the data source which pou have just configured The driver may prompt you for more Information File Data Source Filename DataSource ame Driver Microsoft Excel Driver xls Te i Cancel e This dialog displays a summary of the data source information e Click Finish to close the dialog and the following ODBC Setup dialog will appear ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup RAEI Wate Source Hame Description Cancel Database Version SE eit Workbook Select Workbook Use Curent Directory Options gt e In this dialog select the Excel version from the combo box e Press the Select Workbook button and the following dialog will appear Select Workbook Database Name Directories mm OF ch odbedata sou
329. hot below CEET 2 a Jana EE ai mul jes E Coriaria Stigation ero ON Date d ns 1 2004 ae ee a C T I ea A Start 1 a BM Sector ER 2 Microsoft EJ total Comma MH Parameter q ff Adobe Fram ie reparatos EJ desc Paint Sh A RT Creating Reports 224 8 1 2 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project Follow the directions below to create a report containing one or more map layers from the Map Manager e Start the Map Manager and open a Map Project e Show hide the desired layers in the map project all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button 4 from the toolbar or select Project Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for the current map project or add it to an existing one If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your map project s can be sent to a report one by one Each view of your map project is created with its associated scale bar The map project can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime Report Designer Note that resizing a map project on the
330. how checkbox change the width of the border using the Width vertical scroll boxes 0 10 and change the color of the border using the color box Water Level xi E BHLP Well Constructia Ens ES Well Construction e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc Symbols Data Labels Appearance Water level position for multicasing Inside Use Marker i Use Fort Size 10 Chace Style HZH Line Color E Fill Color Font Char Map Help Apply OF Cancel The Symbols tab allows you to define the symbol to represent one or more water level measurements on the plot 268 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Under the Appearance frame you can specify the water level position for multicasing wells from the dropdown list box You can also select the type of symbol to represent the water level positions e Select the Use Marker option and you can select from a list of symbol markers where the size style and line and fill colors can be defined e Select the Use Font option and you can select from available fonts size color etc After the Font is selected load the Character Map to see the available characters for the selected font character O Font ESRI Environmental amp Icons Oje elvlailoleolo tosco BOOS slave a sjelsmejola y d amp Selected char 0 OK Cancel Simply click on the desired character then cli
331. icable when displaying time varying plumes Title field allows for modifying the time label Visible shows hides the time label Text color sets the color of the time label The default is white Text size sets the size of the time label text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Visible shows hides the legend Title changes the legend title Text size changes the legend text size Text color changes the legend text color Frame allows to decide whether there is a frame around the legend Frame line color sets the legend frame line color Frame fill color sets the legend frame fill color Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer 12 3 3 Axis Display Settings Stay on top M The Axis display element controls the appearance of E Default Settings A E E YBx3D the lines and labels for the X Y and Z axes The axes ee are primarily used to indicate the total dimensions paa size of the 3D image and to orient the image when it E Surfaces H 6 Cross Sections Data has been rotated EM AA Ea Stations Fl Interpretations E Model Layers i E Geology Layers The default axes labels indicate the axes direction and doado Lauer the units but this can be customized to display alphanumeric text A new name may be defined for each of the axes along with label
332. ick on the chart tvoc query Execute from the menu that appears The query will be executed and will be displayed in the Data Query tab Chapter 8 The Report Editor HydroGeo Analyst Demo D Program Files HGAnalyst ProjectsitDemo_ Project Project Edit View Record Settings Tools Help asa ORn t xXBAaAREGBRS BOS das ini P sa Station Groups B Station List k Data Query Station Data ES Station Data Query List Station Group Data Category chart tvoc y 1 0 Hl ee Cross Sections result_we Reports P Station Groups gt q aA E 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 P Cross Sections 08 09 1996 02 017027 199 E Borehole Logs a x z 3DView 04 16 1996 4 1 Borehole Logs T 08 09 199 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1939 01 08 1996 02 12 199 04 16 1996 08 09 1 99E 01 02 199 01 08 1939 y P Rows 230 Time 0 0 0 40 Borehole Logs OD ODOOO 50000000000 000o00o0 0 eH fa aonNnno Project Report from the HGA main menu bar A prompt will appear to select a Report template this is optional OK The report preview window will be displayed In order to add the chart you must return to the report designer Return to Designer button from the toolbar The designer w
333. icture Zoom will adjust the size of the picture until the entire image is visible in the frame and there is the least amount of unfilled space possible Report Designer Window 209 210 Line AnchorBottom Anchors bottom of vertical lines to section bottom x1 yl x2 y2 Specify the coordinates in pixels of the start and end of the line Shape Shape Specify which shape you wish to display rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle Rich Text MaxLength Specifies the maximum number of characters a user can enter in the control The default for MaxLength is 0 indicating that the text is limited only by available system resources Any number greater than O indicates the maximum number of characters Frame CloseBorder Specify whether or not the bottom border line will be displayed if the frame spans across multiple pages Sub Report ReportName Sets gets name for the sub report Page Break Enabled Allows you to enable or disable the page break Chapter 8 The Report Editor OLE PictureA lignment Set the alignment of the contents within the frame Barcode BarWidth Set the width of the thinnest line in the code Caption In barcode the caption is the set of symbols alphanumeric you want to code Direction Set the direction in which the code will be written EnableCheckSum Set whether the checksum is used when the code 1s rendered ActiveReport DocumentName The documen
334. identify contaminants introduced to samples during the measurement process A laboratory blank is an analyte free matrix that is carried through all or part of the analytical process for identifying contamination introduced during analysis Types of laboratory blanks include method blanks carried through the entire preparation and analysis sequence calibration blanks matrix matched reagent water used for calibration and storage blanks placed in sample storage areas In the field an analyte free matrix is carried through a portion of the field process to identify contamination introduced during field or transportation operations Types of blanks associated with the field are trip blanks these accompany samples through the transportation process equipment rinsates collected after decontamination and field blanks collected on site during the sampling event Ideally analysis of the blank samples should return no detectable concentrations of any of the analytes 1 e concentrations are below the method detection limit MDL Define A New Lab Quality Template 171 Blank Settings Any concentration above the sample detection limit will be highlighted Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color e The detection limit for contaminants can be specified in HGA and must be added to your data query e Highlighting The options are the same as described in Check Duplicates Settings on page 169 Once you h
335. ies window You can add several plot series depth and interval to one plot column All lines and shapes will be drawn in the default color and will be semi transparent so that when they overlay each other every plot is visible Be careful however with displaying plots with vastly different scales on the same plot column The plots will be shown on the same scale relative to each other so it may appear that one of the plots is hidden from view BHLP Columns 273 274 Settings The Plot column settings are shown in the following screenshots As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Plot node from the BHLP Settings window The settings for the Plot node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings g xj e Visible Column Options Help Apply OF Cancel The Plot frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can modify the general column settings by clicking the Options button see Column Options on page 253 The Settings for the Plot Area sub node are shown in the following screenshots Plot Area General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearance E Background Color E Page Background Color Bottom Apply OF Cancel In the General tab specify the backg
336. iled discussion 1s presented in later chapters 1 2 1 Data Acquisition Data Entry Most environmental data 1s inherently spatial as observations are taken at specific map coordinates over time In HGA these sampling locations are referred to as Stations HGA comes with standard easy to use data entry grids equipped with drop down combo boxes and many other features to facilitate data entry and validation for virtually any type of Station data Importing and Exporting Data The Data Transfer System DTS 1s designed to assist in the process of importing exporting data to from the database Using the DTS station data can be imported from practically any source including delimited text files MS Excel spreadsheets MS Access Databases SQL Server Databases and more 1 2 2 Data Management HGA supports virtually any database structure including those with multiple levels of relationships among two or more entities This provides an unparalleled flexibility for projects that may have variable needs For example the project database structure may need to satisfy requirements of the United States Environmental Protection Agency US EPA or Ontario s Ministry of the Environment MOB For these and many other needs HGA comes with a number of customizable templates implementing various commonly used database structures These structures include e Generic Environmental Metric e Generic Environmental Imperial e Ontario s Minis
337. image was georeferenced Export Map Provides options for exporting the current map view to a Raster Image file Supported file types include Bitmaps BMP JPEGs jpg and Enhanced Meta Files Description of Menu Items 299 EMP Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file as shown in the following figure x Scale Factor Quality l l l l Li Li Li Li l Li l Ba 100 Falette i Default C Half Tone Export Depth 256 Colors Scale Symbolo f No Symbology Scaled Line Symbology Not Scaled C Source Depth O Web Safe Grays With System Colors All Symbology Scaled 24Bit Color DK Cancel H Help There are several options for modifying the image Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEG export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Colo
338. importing all fields and their settings into Hydro GeoAnalyst The created table will have the General structure The Template manager does not attempt to capture primary key settings so this must be defined after the table and its fields are imported In addition as with any table the user has the option to modify the properties of the table All newly imported tables automatically become child tables to the Stations table Deleting Tables A table can be deleted by selecting 1t from the project browser and then either by clicking on the x Delete button at the bottom of the window or by right clicking and selecting the Delete table pop up menu item NOTE The stations table is required in all projects and may not be deleted However it is possible to modify some of the fields in this table with the exception of the station ID name and X Y co ordinates Defining Table Relationships Once the primary key is set for the selected table a relationship between the current 440 Chapter 5 Template Manager table and other tables in the database can be established To create relationships in the Table is PARENT to grid select one or more tables to which the current table would be a parent table Then for each table select one or more fields that will serve as a Foreign key in each table An example is shown below
339. indow should appear as shown in the figure below Creating Reports with Charts 239 New Report HECEECAIIAA Ae Ea Il If I O Re BEEDLE EME BOCA o SRE rea E eegee A A A A A A O perty ToolBow i E B MainReport Detail H PageHeader 3 Litt Detail H 5 PageFooter z Name Detail BackColor BackStyle O ddBKTrar CanGrow True CanShrink False ColumnCo 1 Lere eE EE Column 0 Downer ColumnSp 0 height 223 KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Visible True For display purposes 1t will be advantageous to add a group header to group the data by station name To do this Right click on Detail in the report design window as circled in the image above A pop up menu will appear Insert Group Header Footer A new Group Header and Group Footer will appear in the Report Designer window GroupHeader1 in the report design window a Properties button from the toolbar The Property Toolbox frame will appear as shown below 240 Chapter 8 The Report Editor New Report El Y fie O AAA Do cer E B MainReport H PageHeader H GroupHeaderl H Detail H GroupFooter1 a PageFooter E GroupHeaderl le sa si J S Ree 4 Ze E RN 4 E ea e GroupHeader 1 Name GroupHeader1 BackColor BackStyle 0 ddBKTrar CanGrow True CanShrink False A URGE i U height KeepToge False NewColurr 0 None NewPage 0 None Repeat 0 None Underlayh False Visible True
340. ine map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Color fill will fill the space between contour lines with a solid color where the color between lines is scaled according to the lower contour line value Line properties Setting Value Name Contour map 3 Iw ml ml 39339 7852 0 0 Slice SEE E Color from palette r L 1 Solid E Huuto intervals Custom Values Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color e Width is the contour line width e Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Contour map 3 Iw C C 39339 7852 0 0 ElLine properties El uto intervals Visible e 40000 Lower limit 0 500 H ElCustom Values e Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted e Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted e Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Custom values Th
341. ine the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series labels will appear using the selected settings When you are finished with the Label options you can click on the Symbol tab to modify the symbol options as shown in the screenshot below Marker Size J Proportional Height js Width ja Min Value jo Minimum Height p Width JO Max Value 1120 Maximum Height E Width E Preview Min 0 Max 120 F x Apply Close The following settings are available Symbol marker select the symbol marker type from the combo box Marker Size Height specify the symbol height Width specify the symbol width Proportional use this option to create proportionally sized symbols dependent upon the result value Min value specify the min value for the smallest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value Max value specify the max value for the largest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series symbols will appear using the selected settings Chapter 7 Plotting 7 4 Adding Lines to a Plot Best fit lines or lines calculated with user defined formulas can be displayed on
342. ing complex overlapping Zig zagging interpretations these types of interpretations are not suitable for the purpose of saving and later querying in the database As such the following rules limitations are enforced to avoid saving such results in the database e A given layer may not be allowed to intersect a given station more than twice When this rule is violated HGA will consider the two top most intersection points as defining the layer e All layers in a cross section must be uniquely identified by the layer name HGA may pick the top most layer and ignore all other layers with the same name e If a station is removed from a cross section related saved interpretations contacts are removed as long as this station 1s not involved in any other cross Sections e Ifa layer is deleted from a cross section all related interpretations contacts are removed from all stations that are involved in the cross section as long as this layer does not appear in another cross section for any of the stations involved in the current cross section e Ifa given well appears in more than one cross section interpretation results are updated with interpretations from the cross section that is last updated Model Layers Before drawing model layers the model layer attributes must first be defined in the dialog shown below Model layers can be added deleted or edited in this dialog 374 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor LEA Topography Topograph
343. ing the current template The functions of the buttons are described below The Copy Template As button allows you to make a copy of the selected template Clicking on this button displays a dialog where a name for the new user template can be entered x The Delete Template button removes the current template from the collection of templates available for the project and loads the default template in its place Te The Save Template button saves all changes made to the current user template About the Interface 431 432 Profile Settings The Set Profile Settings button allows you to provide information that will be used for displaying well profiles BHLP in Hydro GeoAnalyst as well as the Map Manager and the Cross Section Editor Clicking on this button launches the window shown below that can be used to specify which tables and fields are to be used to obtain information related to geology and well construction details Define Well Profile Parameters Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Filling Hydrogeology Wi aber Level Pump Select table lithology T Soil Description Field zoil _type T Table description Field description o Y Hote Requires a depth interval dependent table with at least twa depth fields named from_ and to with type double one material specification field with type string This window contains several tabs e Lithology e Drilling e Ca
344. ion details and developing contour maps elevations concentrations water table etc The GIS Map Manager is an integral part of Hydro GeoAnalyst and is ideally suited for analyzing and presenting the spatial orientation of your groundwater or borehole project data Some of the key features of the Map Manager are listed below Import vector maps into a map project Import BaseMap Layers to the Map Project DXF Raster and Shapefile formats including high resolution MrSid image files Georeference and import raster image maps Display Station Groups or Data Queries from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project Edit map layers labels order style visibility Draw and edit a point line polygon or text on a map with Annotation tools Create contour color shade and zebra maps of a desired data set Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields Select stations using a rectangle polygon circle line or a single point Create new station groups with stations selected in the map project Send a Map view to the Report Editor Export Map view as Raster images Create a legend for the Map Project Turn layers on off and set their properties using Layer Manager Define locations for cross section lines View Statistics for selected data or station group layers Min Max Sum Standard Deviation Mean Label and symbol renderer allows for creating color ramps gradients shading etc based on specified sta
345. ion of the BHLP Zoom out button returns to the original BHLP view 9 2 BHLP Columns The Borehole Log Plotter supports a number of column types that can be presented on a typical borehole log plot A borehole log plot consists of a set of desired columns selected from the list of supported column types The plot does not save the data being displayed and as such avoids data duplication A borehole log plot is generated in real time using a BHLP template and data for the selected borehole s 250 For each column displayed on the borehole log plot it is possible to Specify the column type image text plot symbol scale as explained below Select one or more fields of data to display in the column Select the start and end depth for the data being displayed Set the property of the column depending on the selected data type For Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter example if a depth dependent graph is selected it is possible to set the properties of the graph If a text column is selected the font attributes can be set Note that each column may utilize different data fields for its start and ending depth information For example the start and ending depth information for Lithology patterns may be different from that of the well construction and may come from different tables Supported Column Types BHLP supports many data types including e Scale e Lithology eg geologic formation details soil patterns descriptions etc
346. ion system defined for the Map Project For example if your Map Project is set to the NAD83 projection system you must select NAD83 for the surface layer Map Project f x Name Description DEM_UTM This iz a zamplel Projection Typ Geographic f UTM State Planar f Non Earth Projection Unit f Others NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17H meters DK Cancel H Help Once the surface layer settings have been defined click Ok The Color Settings dialog shown below will appear Description of Menu Items 303 304 Color Settings 3 E x Color Palette 330 3549 356 0289 Zebra 333 56415 336 7734 339 99265 343 1915 ad ddar d xX a S Transparency 2 JO al as ee METE La The Color Settings dialog allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of elevation values e The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals e The Ramp option loads the following dialog Ramp ie xl Color Ramp z kd Start Color oOo End Color oOo Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and En
347. iple fence diagrams Finally use the AVI recording tools to record the auto rotation of the 3D fence diagrams for presentation purposes 1 2 4 Reporting and Printing Report Designer HGA features a state of the art report generation tool that is equipped with a robust and easy to use runtime designer A Report Wizard provides steps to simplify the report creation process the results are high quality and professional reports containing company headers footers and company logos Reports can contain images and data from any module Map views cross section views 3D views data grids query results charts etc The final reports can be printed or saved in a number of formats including PDF HTML RTF XLS TIF or TXT as well as in a binary format Report Templates The Report Designer includes several pre defined Report Templates which can be used to quickly generate a professional report 6 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Borehole Log Plotting Borehole log reports can be prepared using the Report Designer A report for multiple boreholes can be generated at once by selecting one or more boreholes in the database and opening the borehole log report generator Borehole log reports may display information such as depth lithology water level screen locations sample results both as values and in charts geophysical data and more Time Series Plots HGA comes with a powerful and easy to use charting interface that is c
348. irections below e Select one or more stations from the Station List e Select then open a BHLP template from the Borehole Logs node of the Project Browser e From the BHLP designer press the Print button e Select the desired report template e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications e Print the report as is or save to one of the supported formats Creating Reports 229 8 1 6 Parameter Query Reports For details on this option please see Creating Parameter Query Reports on page 226 8 2 Managing Reports 8 2 1 Opening an Existing Report All reports saved in your project are listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser To open a report you may either double click on the desired report or select the Open Report pop up menu item by right clicking on the desired report All reports are opened in the Report Designer by default The designer displays the report layout and allows you to modify it before generating the report The print preview of the report can be generated by clicking on the Print Preview button on the toolbar 8 2 2 Deleting a Report To delete a report that is registered with HGA select it in the project browser right click on it and select Delete from the pop up menu The selected report will be deleted both f
349. ired line location in the cross section window and simply drag and click to create a line with several vertices A vertex can be added to an existing line by right clicking on a line and selecting the Adding Annotations to the Cross Section 391 Add vertex option A line can be deleted by right clicking on a line and selecting the Delete option All lines added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Polygons To add polygons or rectangles e Select the Edit Polygons option from the pop up menu e Click on the Mi Draw Polygon or Rectangle buttons on the toolbar e Insert the mouse cursor at the desired location e Click and drag the mouse to create the desired shape double click in the case of a polygon to finalize the shape Settings The Settings dialog for Annotations is displayed below Annotation Settings x Please set annotations for Model layer e Line M Poly Cancel For each Amnotation type you may show hide using the Visible check box or edit the display properties by clicking on the preview in the Symbol column You can modify the standard properties for Text Line and Polygons as described earlier in Chapter 8 To save the annotation changes you have made you can either deselect switch annotation types or click the Save button from the button bar 392 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D
350. isfy the query criteria All station groups created for a project are listed in the Project Browser under the Station Groups node Clicking on any of the sub nodes corresponding to a station group will load the Station List tab and display the appropriate stations belonging to that group An example is shown below Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts 27 28 HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalyst Projectsi Demo_Project Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help J ea7 Sh XRaAlRPBBORS BO SM a ini Ml Station Groups M Station List BP Data Query Station Data s Project Station N Elevation 414 Monitoring Wells 5 MM Boreholes E 535250 19 4814315 00 332 10 E Soil Borings 536668 12 4814036 00 334 80 J W0_Stations 535535 50 4814905 00 333 90 a OC_Moritoring Wells 536720 69 4814826 00 335 40 535548 40 4814637 30 331 00 gt rag cates 535459 40 481470430 330 80 ad A E 535476 10 4814781 10 330 90 if soll_borings_with_tce_exceeding_1 0_ma_kg 7 53546950 481465270 330 60 H A Station Data 535484 70 481454650 329 90 El E 4 Queries 535626 80 481465290 329 50 H E Crosstab 535545 90 4814553 50 332 10 Maps 535637 70 4814582 90 330 20 535800 00 4814637 50 329 90 Cross Sections E Reports 535674 60 4814800 00 330 40 ls 535687 40 4914665 30 330 50 fe IDView E 535390 00 4814741 90 329 90 2 Borehole Logs i 535577 40 4814477 10 329
351. it meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Click once on the field and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the Expression column The selected field will be added automatically to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the window to add conditions then define them manually ixi EIEEE Station Group Quen Data Query Select a Query Description El Location Station Name station type total depth depth to bedrock description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing E E F M hianikarnsa Ci mist TOC_Exceeds_320m y Soil Sampling y Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Function Expression igs Order by al station id id station x x station y y gt station name name dp E Y Map and BHLP Ready JV Use current projection system Conditio eater Expression Operator Expression q Fi station toc X Source Condition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 e Under the Conditions select an Operator for the field A combo box with several options will appear gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt LIKE IS IS NOT amp For this exam
352. it Line Edit Polygon Move Up Move Down Settings To add an annotation select the appropriate option from the list to enter Edit mode then click the corresponding button from the toolbar You can then user your mouse to select the location to add your annotation After adding an annotation you will need to click on the corresponding button again to add another annotation of the same type NOTE If you are adding editing deleting one annotation type you must right click on the selected layer and either switch between annotation types or de select the current annotation type otherwise you will remain in Edit mode for the selected annotation type Upon deselecting switching annotation types you will be prompted to save your changes Add Text To add text e Select the Edit Text option from the pop up menu e Click on the A Text button on the toolbar e Click on the desired text location in the cross section window e Enter the text in the Input text window that appears Once a text box has been created it can be moved by clicking and dragging or edited by double clicking on the existing text Text can be deleted by right clicking on a text box and selecting the Delete option All text added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Lines To add Lines e Select the Edit Lines option from the pop up menu e Click on the Draw Line button on the toolbar e Click once on the des
353. itable e Select an object that is a polygon or a line depending on the active interpretation type e Click on the a button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex e Repeat the last two steps to add more vertices at other locations on the selected object 360 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex e Activate the desired cross section interpretation e Select an object that 1s a polygon or line e Click on the Be button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu e Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be deleted the mouse cursor will change to an X e Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object e Repeat the last two steps to delete more vertices from the selected object Link Vertex The Link Vertex option allows for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines It is intended to assist in filling in gaps between adjacent polygons or lines thus creating continuous interpretations The end result is that polygons or lines will be able to share a common linked vertex or vertices To Link Vertices on polygons or lines Select the desired interpretation layer and make it editable Select
354. ithology column will be added In the Designer tree expand the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities Using the combo boxes provided select the data table top bottom image and text entities Lithology column is a specialized version of the Interval column which is described on page 260 Settings The Lithology column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Lithology node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings xj F Visible Column Options Border Line isibilit Outline W Grid Pattern Symbol Description 7 Visible 7 Visible Font width 2 40 E Help Apply OF Cancel The Lithology frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button see page 253 The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter The Pattern Symbol frame includes a Visible checkbox which allows you to show hide the lithology patterns and a Width vertical scroll box which allows you to set the width of the lithology pattern as a percentage of the total column width Under the Description fra
355. ition Project y Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Unit meters Rows 14 Time 0 0 0 47 NOTE The Map and BHLP Ready option ensures that the query will contain the required fields enabling it to be plotted on a Map Manager BHLP project The required fields are Station ID X and Y and Station Name If this option 1s checked the required fields must be added and cannot be modified NOTE The Query Builder allows you to create map ready queries in the project s projection system When the queries are executed X and Y coordinates are displayed in the lat long format however when the query is executed through the main HGA window or exported to CSV MS Access or XML the X and Y coordinates will be displayed in the current projection system Creating Queries e Press the F Generate SQL Statement button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string 1s invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the f Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to 135 136 execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query The results of this query are shown in the window below Query Builder Xa HEA Station Group Quern Data Query Select a Query Toc Exceeds 320m y Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing
356. ize the image quality you should maximize the Display Window to full screen 12 6 1 Saving Project The 3D project can be saved to file by selecting File Save As from the Main Menu or click the H Save As icon from the toolbar The following Save to file dialog will appear a AB 3xs aa VEX3D 3x5 sa All Sections 3x5 la BE 3xs lam CC 3xs laa cube 3xs save as type Visual Borehole Cross Sections file Ses Cancel 4 The 3D image is saved with the extension 3XS and will be saved in the HGAnalyst Projects Project_Name V3D folder by default Save an existing project by selecting File Save from the Main Menu or by clicking Ss Save icon from the toolbar 12 7 Printing the 3D Image To print the desired 3D view select File Print or click the El Print button from the toolbar This will load the Report Manager where the 3D image may be placed into a Report template or printed as is For more details on modifying images in reports please see Chapter 8 The Report Editor Printing the 3D Image 427 428 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer 13 Template Manager The Template Manager is one of the most powerful tools provided with Hydro GeoAnalyst It allows you to edit the structure of your database as well as set an unlimited number of user level views of the database The Template Manager provides the tools to e Add delete tables e Add delete fields e Alter the proper
357. king the Add button A new color entry will be added with a value midway between the previous and next value Deleting a color To remove a color increment simply select the color from the Color Value table and click on the Delete button Resetting the Color Palette The color settings can be reset to the initial default values by clicking the Reset button 419 The Color Legend The Color Legend is a scale of the element values associated with each color The values and colors shown in the Color Legend are defined by the Color Palette settings for the selected data type element see previous section Other display settings including Title Text size Text color and Frame color can be customized using the display settings options shown in the figure below Setting Value a TYOC Palette o Auto reset palette ElColor legend Visible a Oo Title Textsize 0 015 Textcolor O O Z o Frame Frame line color Framefillcolor EL The color legend will automatically appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen whenever a display object using the color palette is plotted e g color map It can be moved to any other location in the Display Screen by dragging and dropping it at the desired location 12 3 7 Cross Section Data Display Settings The Cross Section Data tree contains the properties of the cross sections loaded in the project e Stations e interpretations Each of the
358. kriging 47 blas radiis Min radus _ West radius Angel Angle Angles 1 Engngbps o o SE Mean O Ga Dit ll Vatiable Trend estimate Estimate vanable Nugget constar 02 Else Wa ograms MT OF Cancel Least easting TA Appendices Start X End X X_Nodes Start Y End Y Y Nodes Use Log Interpolation Restrict Min Value Restrict Max Value Value Min Value Max Real Min Real Max Min Trimming Limit Max Trimming Limit Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the X direction Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting 1s useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting 1s selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other Wise Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Minimum value of the interpolated data Any inte
359. l cross section through the site domain click the Cross section tab to open the Cross section window as shown in the following figure This window displays a list of the available cross sections for the current 3D project 424 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Sjselectcreate slices a xi Slices CroseSechons Cancel Help Simply select the cross section from the list then click the Select button 12 4 4 Deleting a Slice If many different slices have been defined during the current session and the list is becoming too long and cumbersome to work with any entry in the Surface list can be deleted by highlighting the slice in the list and clicking the Delete button 12 4 5 Modifying a Slice The location or orientation of any slice can be modified by highlighting the target slice in the list and clicking the Modify button This will open the Slice Properties window where the desired changes can be made 12 5 Scene Configurations When using 3D Explorer to display and animate data it is important to be able to save the various display settings for fast and easy recall during a presentation or for comparing different views 3D Explorer is able to save the display settings by selecting File Save Scene configuration from the top menu bar or by clicking the ss Save Scene configuration button in the toolbar This will load the Save Scene Configuration dialog Scene Configurations 425 se Save scene con
360. larger projects that may involve stations from various sites If you attempt to import duplicate station names or import a station name which duplicates one already existing in the database the DTS will present the following interface Importing Data using the DTS 121 122 Preferences for Stations with Conflicting Names 5 E x M Stations in Source Choose the Matching Station from the Destination Table All Stations y Filter Name y y BH11 a Operation name x y Match ID Name X ES Zone Append BHG 535646 83 481332023 a 153 BH11 80 56553 43 47207 _ Reject BH 536892 4813306 Update BH8 536420 15 4813671 51 Append y BH9 5371735 48139643 2 Update gt BH10 535369 6 48147391 2 f Update BH11 535141 1 49131165 2 Update y BH12 5363095 48147083 Append y BH13 536267 7 48128388 Append gt BH14 5357728 48140083 Append y BH15 534994 4 4814246 7 Append y BH16 536063 1 48139149 Append y BH17 536174 31 48134969 Append BH18 535789 8 48146004 Append BH19 536724 1 48140789 Append BH20 536746 69 49145075 4 gt 4 gt OK Cancel EJ Help If the DTS finds one or more stations in destination with same name as in source they will be displayed and managed in this table All Stations in the Source table with conflicting names in destination will be listed in the left grid sorted alphabetically by station names The right grid
361. lated Settings Coordinate system in source Projection type Projection UTM State planar NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N y Geographic Others Ten Coordinate exclusion filter x 99999 0 i 99999 0 Note This step allows you to specify the Add all new stations to coordinate system used in the data source All coordinates will be converted to WGS 1984 for internal use You can also provide missing coordinate indicators if any All new stations will be included in the PROJECT station group These stations could also be added to one or more of the existing station groups You can also use the last row to add a new station group and include these stations in it Boreholes_with_plot_data E O 00 0 on Lo Jn Please check the boxes next to the station group you would like to group these stations in CO Current project O Existing group O New group lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 120 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System Projection Settings The DTS requires you to define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HGA project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HGA is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 101
362. le Y E ioj x Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 3 6 Design E3 Lithology ES LithologyEntities Well Construction Coarse Gravel Medium Sand bon H P gt A I Name Value Caption Well Construction Gravel 5 E 7 l JV Live update Close Export y Print y Help 9 3 3 Add Plot Columns To add a plot column to your BHLP right click on the Design node and add a Plot column Once the Plot column has been added the Plot Series options must be defined 284 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Add Plot Series To add a plot series right click on the Plot column in the Design tree Alternately you can click on the Add button on toolbar after having highlighted Plot in the Design tree Select the Add Plot Series option as shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample Select Station x m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 53621269 4814030 00 323 50 324 50 E E Design E ES Lithology ES LithologyEntities H E Well Construction Coarse Add Group Cane Add Column Add Plot Series Medium Sand j gt i tj IV Live update Apply Close Export y Print y Help The Add a Plot Series window will open as shown in the following screenshot Designing a Borehole Log Plot 285 Add a Plot Series xj Plot Seres Typ f D
363. le data series for the selected plot You may also Add Data Range series and specify Data Series options for this Series This is useful if you want to identify data on the plot that exceeds a guideline or standard value and assign unique symbol or label properties to this data set only e Click on the Add button to add a new range e Click on the Delete button to delete the selected range When you add a new Range enter the Breaking Value this is the upper limit for the range For the example shown in the screenshot above there will be two ranges e Within guidelines Values O 100 inclusive will have unique symbol and label properties e Exceedences Values greater than 100 to 120 inclusive will have a different set of symbol and label properties so they can easily be distinguished on the plot The Labels provides options for the data series labels Text Select the Font Color and Alignment options for the text Custom There are several options available for defining custom label Use different label source allows you to select a field from the list for the labels from a list 191 192 Include pre fix provides the option to attach a text string in front of each label Include post fix provides the option to attach a text string at the end of each label NOTE If the Label options are inactive you must set the Labels to Visible load the General Series Settings and enable the Labels Visible option As you def
364. lect the Project vbh file e Beside the Backup File field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the SWS_ Demo _DB bak file e Finally click the Ok button to open the demo project 1 4 Updating Old Projects HGA is fully compatible with projects created in earlier versions of HGA The first time you open a project from v 1 0 v 2 0 or v 3 0 you will be prompted to convert your database to the new format A dialog similar to the one shown below will display xi y For optimal performance one or more system tables need to be upgraded lt It is strongly recommended that you make a backup of your database before you proceed Would wou like to make a backup now Yes Mo Cancel At this time you will have the option to create a back up copy of your database which is highly recommended Click the Yes button to create a back up copy of your database Otherwise click No to continue with the table upgrade In addition it is recommended that you create a backup of the Projects directory before you open projects in the new version of HGA This can be done using the options in My Computer or Windows Explorer NOTE Projects from v 1 0 and v 2 0 used Project Manager passwords for controlling access to the project Once a project is upgraded to v 4 0 this password will be ignored and replaced by a username Admin with no passwo
365. lected layer stations or contour map for example Description of Menu Items 319 Label Renderer Mame Field Mame Fropert M Allow Duplicates Font e Spline Text Sample Text Jw Flip OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field Name which will be displayed as a label Customize the settings as desired Please note that for numeric fields labels will be displayed using the precision defined in the Set Field Precision dialog box when the HGA data is being loaded into the map project For more information please see Load HGA Data on page 305 Click OK to accept the settings Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer You can add delete and edit different renderers using the toolbar located under the renderer list x 4t tL Background Symbo OK Cancel H Help The renderer may also apply a background to the data symbols this background can be modified using the standard Point Style dialog Create Thematic Map This menu item allows the user to create a thematic map for any of the active Map Layers containing numeric data A thematic map shows the spatial distribution of one or more specific data values in the form of a Pie or Bar chart Thematic Maps can only be drawn on layers that contain data such as stations contour maps etc They are not applicable to annotation layers A common example of the applications for a t
366. ler distance values will result in more labels e Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 12 3 6 Plumes Display Settings 410 HGA 3D Explorer is capable of displaying and animating 3D Isosurfaces volumetric plumes of soil or groundwater chemistry data The 3D Plume must be generated from a data query in the main HGA window before displaying it in 3D Explorer For details on how to generate the plume please see Chapter 2 3D Interpolation The plume can be added to the 3D Project when working in the cross section editor for more details see Chapter 11 View 3D You may also import a plume into an existing 3D project to do so select File Import Plume from the main menu The plume may be visualized with one of the display formats shown below when you right mouse click on any data plume in the model tree Region a po Add Isosurface E A Add Colormap a E Add Isolines Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer e Add isosurface see Isosurfaces on page 411 for more details e Add color map see Color Maps on page 413 for more details e Add isolines see Isoline Maps on page 415 for more details Refer to the respective sections for instructions on how to create these display elements and for details on the display settings associated with each one The display settings shown below controls the global settings for all Plume display elements E Setting Name result_value Paete Z
367. lete the selected soil type within a SCS press the x button Press the Save button to save the current SCS settings Material Specifications Editor 75 NOTE If you want to re use this new SCS in a new project you must save the current database template Then create a new project with this database template and the SCS will be available For details on saving database templates see Chapter 13 Exporting the current template as a Database template 2 5 2 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System To modify an SCS select the desired SCS then use the button to load this into the edit window on the right To delete an SCS select the desired SCS then use the x button on the lower left corner of the window NOTE Only user defined Soil Specifications can be modified or deleted The Default Specifications USDA USCS DIN 2043 Compton s IAH may not be modified or deleted from the project 2 5 3 Changing Soil Classifications Once a project has been created it is recommended that the SCS not be changed the reason for this is that existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted by changing the soil names and patterns However if it is necessary to change the SCS this may be done in the Miscellaneous Settings dialog available under the Project Properties menu 2 6 Unit Converter The Unit Converter may be used to convert commonly used units from one form to another Select Tools Unit Converter
368. ll always be added to the Project Station Group and will also be added to any station group that is active and selected at the time After a record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using either the Te Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu Delete Use the Delete option to delete the selected record s from a grid A station record may be deleted from the Stations List or a data record row may be deleted from the selected grid in any of the data categories The x Delete button in the toolbar performs the same function NOTE Use caution when deleting stations from the Project station group as they will be permanently deleted from the database Duplicate Use the Duplicate option to create a duplicate of the selected record in the active grid the new duplicated record will be added to the last row of the grid This can be used to quickly copy existing records and make minor modifications After the new record has been added to the grid the changes should be saved using the Post Data button in the toolbar or the Post menu item in the Records menu Post The Records Post item saves all changes made in a grid to the database The Post item is activated only if the cursor is located within a grid and there has been a change made to the grid The Te button in the toolbar performs the same function Filter by Value The Filter By Value option will locate and display
369. ll be retrieved from the database and are listed in the Project Browser when your project is loaded into HGA 8 4 Report Settings The Report Settings dialog can be accessed by clicking the Page Report button a from the Main Toolbar This dialog consists of four sections Page Setup Printer Settings Grid Settings and Styles Each section is described below Report Settings E MAN Top Margin Bottom Margin Left Margin Right Margin Gutter qF Mirror Margins Cancel The Page Setup section allows you to set the page margins of your report page Set the Top Bottom Left Right and Gutter margins by using the appropriate vertical scroll bars Margin values can be set in quarter increments 1440 1 inch You may also choose to mirror the margins of facing pages by selecting the Mirror Margins check box 220 Chapter 8 The Report Editor Report Settings Paper5ize Default Printer Z width pl Height Printer Default Portrait Landscape PaperBin Default Printer ki Cancel The Printer Settings section allows you modify the printing options Here you can select the paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box You can manually specify the paper size by using the Width and Height vertical scroll bars The Orientation frame allows you to specify the paper orientation You may also choose to set the options for Collate Duplex and PaperBin by using the appropria
370. ll to the clipboard Paste button pastes text from the clipboard to the active cell Add button adds a new record this feature is available only if a grid is active Delete button deletes the selected record this feature is available only if a grid 1s active Post Data button saves posts all changes made to the project this button 1s activated 1f changes to a record have been made Find button displays a dialog for searching in a grid with a user specified criteria Filter by Value filters the grid using the value in the active cell Hide Selected button shows only the selected data records rows Inverse Selection button will select all records that are not selected and de select all records that are currently selected Sort Ascending button sorts records in ascending order based on the selected column Sort Descending button sorts records in descending order based on the selected column Template Manager button launches the Template Manager Chapter Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 114 11 About the Interface List Editor button launches the List Editor Material Specifications button launches the Material Specifications Editor Query Builder button loads the utility for building simple and advanced queries Well Profile Viewer button loads a window displaying the profile view of the selected station This includes data for Lithology and Well Construction drilling procedure filling materials scre
371. lor maps or isosurfaces for a preliminary assessment of the plume As such there are basic options for color maps and isosurfaces Once you have a better understanding of where the contaminants lie and at what time steps you can use the more advanced options in the Plumes node in the tree including e advanced isoline maps with color fill and line settings e color maps with clip at cut off options e display color maps on cross section lines e isosurface options including color from palette show borders and display volume estimation When Plume Browser tab is selected the following options will appear El Rotate Shift Light Position Time Plume Browser F Fleala Y Flume result_value J E Options y gt 2 i style Colormap on Plane l Position 50 100 E Browser Save Colormap Time Visible fy When the 3D project was created 3D Explorer will display the plume in the form of an isosurface by default The default isosurface value will be 5 of the maximum concentration value calculated as a result of the 3D Interpolation In the Plume combo box you may select the plume data field used for visualization you will recall that 3D projects supports multiple plumes for one or more contaminants In the Style combo box select the desired display element Select from Colormap on XY XZ or YZ planes or Isosurface The Visible checkbox shows hides the current plume browser display element To the
372. losely linked to the reporting component Unlimited numbers of charts can be placed on the reporting component s runtime designer The time series plotting control can then be linked to specific parts of the database to retrieve the source data HGA generates an unlimited number of pages with one or more charts with a single click of the mouse The time series plotting module allows plots to include regulatory limits As such 1t allows users to define a range of values referred to as the Alarm Zone that may be used to indicate a range of values in exceedance of selected regulatory limits or intervals 1 2 5 Interface to Visual MODFLOW and other SWS Software ESRI GIS SHP files and databases have become two of the main sources of data for groundwater models and HGA makes it easier to incorporate these data formats directly into your model In addition HGA through the use of the cross section editor enables you to create and export layers created from 3D Model interpretations of your geological data in the database You can directly link HGA station data with AquaChem and AquiferTest for in depth water quality analysis and pumping test analysis respectively Also HGA is now available as a conceptual groundwater model builder for FEFLOW 1 3 Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst 1 3 1 System Requirements Please refer to the Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the system requirements for HGA If you have any problems with your par
373. lots node contains a list of all plots that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a plot will load the Plotting component About the Interface 21 2 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Using Hydro GeoAnalyst The following topics will be discussed in this chapter Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts e Introduction e Station Types e Stations Table e Station Groups e Data Categories e Data Entry Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar e Project e Edit e View e Record e Settings e Tools e Help Finally a description of the major components which make up the HGA package is provided These components simplify the task of managing analyzing and visualizing the data stored in the database and include e Template Manager e List Editor e Material Specifications Editor e Project Manager e Data Transfer System DTS e Query Builder e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer e Report Editor e Borehole Log Plotting 23 e Unit Converter 2 1 Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts 2 1 1 Introduction 24 HGA is designed to manage databases with any structure and any level of referential integrity constraints As such a project database is not limited in the number of tables it may contain nor in the relationship between the tables A HGA database is designed to store any type of environmental data Most environmental data is inherently spatial as samples and
374. ls Horizontal X Axis The Settings for the X Axis are identical to the Y axis with the following exceptions e Log Scale is not available e Min and Max values when you define the min and max format you must select these values from a calendar e You can specify a Date Time format from the following options m d yyyy e MMM yyyy MM yyyy Yyyy e MMM e hh mm ss tt tt AM PM e hh mm ss e You can set the Tick Interval by selecting one of the following options e Min e Hour e Day e Month e Year Series Type Line displays the plot as a line chart Bar displays the plot as a bar chart 190 Chapter 7 Plotting NOTE You can also change the Series Type by right clicking on any data point on and plot and selecting Change Series Type 7 3 3 Data Series Settings Plot Settings Data Series Range settings can be accessed by right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Edit Range Settings from the pop up menu The following Series Settings dialog will appear Name Breaking value Labels Symbol Within guidelin 100 Text p Exceedences 120 po Font Color Alignment y M Custom Use Different Label Source Label Source Include Pre fix Pre fix IV Include Post fix Post fix Exceedence m Preview Sample Preview Exceedence Min 0 Max 120 AP Xx cue On the left side of this dialog there is a list of availab
375. ly Do not use characters such as lt gt 1 etc e In the lower left corner of the Query Builder window select the Source Conditions The options are Station Group Project and Database If Station Group is selected then a second combo box will become active From here select the appropriate station group to query If Project is selected then all stations in the current project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database e Expand the tree on the left side of the window e Locate the desired data category table and field For this example select the Description category then the Location table and locate the TOC field An example is shown below 133 134 AA Xe A Station Group Quen Data Query Select a Query TOC_Exceeds_320m E Description B Location Station Name x Elevation tag station type total depth depth to bedrock H description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling MH hd A Ci misk Source Condition Project s Design SOL View Preview Display Fields Expression station id id station x station y y Y station name name dh X J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Conditions Expression Expression Advanced Close Help Field Name station toc Type DOUBLE Un
376. lyline or polygon while you are in edit mode When double clicked a blue box will appear around the vertical and horizontal extents of the digitized shape indicating that the whole shape 1s selected as shown in the image below Chapter 8 Map Manager Map Project tesimap Proje Layer dk Took View Seed Jaith Help Ex hal k HO A Deo gt PE A a 1435 Bai You can scale the polyline polygon by clicking on one of the vertices located on the blue box and moving it to a new position holding the left mouse button You can shift a polyline polygon up down left or right by placing your mouse cursor inside the blue box mouse cursor symbol will change and then clicking and dragging the entire shape to a new position Note These features are only available for polyline and polygon layers which have been digitized created in Map Manager Rectangle Provides the option to draw a rectangle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Circle Provides the option to draw a circle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Description of Menu Items 337 Line Provides the option to draw a line This option is only available if a line shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Point Provides the option to add points to the map layer This option is only available if a point shapefile layer is selected
377. m ka Color Label Position Left Y Minor Tic Mark Font Interval 5 l Background El Color J The Scale frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox To access the Column Options dialog page 253 click the Options button The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox modify the Display Unit and change the Label Position Change the font style and background color using the Font color box and Background color box respectively The Tic Marks frame allows you to set the Interval and Color of the column gradations Clicking on a Color box opens a palette to select from 9 2 2 Depth Point based Column The Depth Point based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various depths The data can be displayed using graphics text or both Water Level is an example of data that could be displayed using a Depth Point based column Water level information can be displayed through a combination of a symbol showing the level accompanied by a text label e g showing the date at which the displayed water level was recorded To create a Depth Point based column click the op Add icon Select Depth from the combo box that appears A new Depth column will be added to the designer window 256 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Expand the Depth node in the Designer tree and select DepthEntities H E Well Construction EE
378. m the Styles list and preview its properties 156 Chapter 5 Queries amp Auto format Inactive fields Sample DataCube X Y w 7 ro fal Classic 4 le Y m x1 2 Total X1 x2 Total Gradient 1 Ns 13 Gradient 2 Gradient 3 Gradient 4 Gradient 5 Gradient 6 Gradient 7 Modern 1 Modern 2 Modern 3 Modern 4 Modern 5 Multicolor Gradient 1 Multicolor Gradient 10 Multicolor Gradient 2 Multicolor Gradient 3 Multicolor Gradient 4 coca Once you have selected a template click Ok to apply the template to your crosstab report 5 8 3 Generating the Report Once the layout and style settings have been defined click the OK button in the DataCube Wizard dialog to generate the report A table will be generated with the query results as shown in the following screenshot Crops TAB reprot 4001 3434 2 0 0 inactiva felda y a come E At the top of the crosstab results table window there 1s a toolbar with several buttons that control options for editing printing exporting and modifying the display properties of the query Each button is described below Crosstab Queries 157 158 Use the fa button to save the crosstab report Use the button to print preview the report Use the button to define the page settings Use the button to set the printing options Use the button to print the crosstab report Use the button to export the report to an HTM
379. m_test_resultsO resulk gt 1000 X interpreted_qualifiers start_depth mid_depth EX end_depth A A A eo eee ee cele ee result_comment i sample_matrix_code xj e Source Mal io Saas SR Nao ee Project y Source x ye Conditions Advanced Grouping Options NOTE The Query Builder window is context sensitive The window will contain different settings depending on the selected Query type The Query Builder window contains the following items e Display Fields Select the display fields for the query e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to most of the functions in the Query Builder e Query Type Choose from a Station Group Query or a Data Query e Query List Select an existing query from the list e Available Fields Select fields for the query from the tables in the database e Conditions Displays the Query conditions e Source Conditions Select the source options for the query e Advanced Grouping Options Specify grouping and sorting options NOTE These options are available for Data Queries only Chapter 5 Queries 5 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar provides access to most functions of the Query Builder Toolbar buttons are context sensitive 1f there are no options available the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance xl Ed New button creates a new query Delete button deletes the selected query Save
380. me you can modify the visibility and font style of the descriptive text by selecting the Visible check box and Color box respectively 9 2 5 Well Construction Column The Well Construction column is the most comprehensive data column in the Borehole Log Plot It displays data from various sources in your database including e Drilling details e Lithology e Annular filling e Casing and screens e Water Level e Pump e Scale Information for the above items and in some cases the images for patterns are taken directly from the database To add a Well Construction column click the op Add icon and select Well Construction from the combo box provided Some of the entities have been selected for you When the new Well Construction column appears it will display Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Annular Filling and Scale data for the selected station if it has been entered into your database Other entities such as pump locations have to be entered manually To specify the desired entity expand the Well Construction node and locate the specific sub node Use the combo boxes provided to set the data table and fields Settings The Well Construction column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Well Constru
381. mensions to lower the resolution and decrease the loading time To accept the original grid size click Ok Otherwise click the Modify button to specify a new grid size The following dialog will be shown x Mew size Original size HC o Em HC ol 1000 NFiows 308 NFiows 1400 OF The Ncols and NRows fields represent the number of columns and number of rows for the surface file respectively These fields will contain recommended values for the new grid size However you can manually define a new grid size by entering the desired values for these fields Click Ok once the new grid size has been defined The surface layer will then be generated and added to the Layer Manager panel Load HGA Data This menu item provides options for loading Hydro GeoAnalyst data as a new map layer The data source may be a list of stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst Station Group or those resulting from a Data Query Upon clicking on this menu item the following dialog will appear Description of Menu Items 305 306 Load HGA Data x f Station Group E Date Due Ok Cancel H Help In this dialog select the data source type and choose from the appropriate combo box the desired Station Group or Data Query The data will be used to create a new Map Layer and the layer will be displayed in the Layer Manager as well as in the map window This option is available only if a map project is open The resulting shapefiles will
382. ment button at the top of the window to Generate the SQL string If the query string is invalid the violating rows will be highlighted red indicating error or yellow indicating warning e Press the Execute SQL Statement button at the top of the window to execute the query string e Select the SQL View Preview tab to see the results of the query e Click Close to exit the Query Builder and click Yes when prompted to save changes NOTE For Data Queries if aggregation options are selected then the same fields in the Display Fields must also appear in the Group By options 5 3 2 Station Group Query Example A Station Group query is used to segregate stations that meet specified criteria into a separate station group The stations groups that are generated using a query are called Dynamic because the station compliment of these groups may change as new data is entered for the stations The stations groups that are user defined are referred to as Static because they do not change unless the user makes the changes manually Follow the steps below to create a Station Group query e If the Query Builder is not yet loaded select the Query Builder option from the Tools menu e Select Station Group Query as the type e In the toolbar click on the New button 142 Chapter 5 Queries Creating Queries New Query d x Name Description OF Cancel E Help In the dialog that appears enter a N
383. mistry_S ample station name gt o E Chemisty Results ANONY 7 Name station toc sys_sample_code Calendar sample_date chemical_name EN May 2004 June 2004 result_value result_unit Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Sun_Mon Tae weed Teu is conc_ppm reporting_detection_li 23 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 rdi _ppm A 9 10 11 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Fase 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 5 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30 interpreted_qualifiers 20 31 start_depth g mid_depth ZD Today 7 1 2004 end_depth Cancel Help result_comment sample_matrix_code sample_type_code sampling_reason y Source Condition Project s z Advanced Close Help Field Mama cham Fima AN NAN an Select the appropriate date then click OK and the date will be added to the conditions NOTE To add the date to your query you can scroll through the calendar in increments of months If the date you desire is too far in the past it may be easier to type in the date manually in the format compliant with your regional settings Creating Queries 139 Advanced Data Query Options Data Queries may contain Advanced Grouping and Sorting options providing a more detailed search of the database To add grouping options press the Advanced button at the bottom of the Query Builder window and options will appear as shown below lol xi xa Station Group Query Data Query eee SQL View Preview l m Display Fields
384. n the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that is a string and contains the descriptive information on the casing type material e IDEntity select the field that contains the Casing ID e ParentID use this option if you want to display well casings nested within another casing or on their own You must select a field from the casing table that 1s field type double and contains values for the parent casing ID SortBy use this option if you want well casings to be ordered in a particular fashion on the BHLP You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and 266 Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter contains values for the well casing orders Screen Well Constructor e Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Wi aber level Reduc Appearanc Labe f Use Default Color E Visible Font Use Material Image Color E a J Position he Draw Border Color Right Justify Ail Ene ev only Help Apply OF Cancel Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well screen e Use Default color Use Material Image color use this option if your well screen materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color e Draw Border and e Fill Full 2D View only use this option to apply a solid color to the well screen Under the Label frame define the text settings for the s
385. n Group Quern Data Query Select a Query chart tvoc_ Description Geologic Description well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring E vent Design SOL View Preview sample_date SELECT t0 name 45 name t1 sample_date as sample_date t1 result_value as result_value FROM Station 4S t0 RIGHT JOIN SStation ON t0 1D SStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_results0 45 t1 ON t0 1d tl Station WHERE SStation ID 1 T a lt a M Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History the RR GE DE Source Condition Station Groups y Monitoring Wells gt 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 01 08 1996 02 12 1996 04 16 1996 08 09 1996 01 02 1996 m E 2000000000000 0O00O00oO0o0Oo Rows 115 Time 0 0 0 30 Close Help The query will return all records containing a sample date and result value in the Monitoring Wells station group In this example there are 115 records 5 samples collected from each of the 23 monitoring wells The Query Builder may now be closed Close Yes to save the query The next step 1s to execute the query in HGA and send this to the Report Editor Queries node in the project tree Right cl
386. n a surface whereby each line is connected by a set of points having equal values of a given data type Creating Isoline Maps To create a Isoline map click on the desired element in the Model tree and then right click on the element and select the Add Isolines map option from the pop up menu Alternately contour lines may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create contour map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window with a list of the available surfaces slices The contour map for the selected model element can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines Display Settings 415 416 m Select create slices l ioj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 422 below To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A contour map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Contour map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Isoline Map Display Settings Once the Isol
387. n and i Hide Navigation tools button on the toolbar 12 2 2 Vertical Exaggeration In Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer the vertical exaggeration factor can be changed at any time to obtain a more desirable vertical exaggeration of the project domain The vertical exaggeration factor is available to provide an improved 3 dimensional view when the scale of the X and Y axis far exceeds that of the Z axis When opening 3D Explorer the default value of exaggeration factor is set to 1 The Exaggeration factor can be changed in two locations e In the Display tree under the Project Name folder OR e In the toolbar top toolbar of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window as shown Working with 3D Explorer 395 below Exaggeration factor 0 Simply enter a new value in the field and press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard 12 2 3 3D Navigation Tools The Navigation Panel should appear on your screen as shown in the figure below Slider Buttons l Rotate Shit Light Position de Alo oo E pe Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side If the Navigation Panel does not appear on the screen click View Navigation tools from the top menu bar Alternately the Navigation Panel can be loaded by clicking the sg Hide Navigation Tools button located on the top toolbar The Navigation tools panel contains several tabs e The Rotate tab controls the rotation of the 3D ima
388. n the Server for valid SQL databases These databases will then appear in the combo box beside Database If there is an integrated login for the server check the box beside Windows NT Integrated Authorization If a unique password and ID are required de select this option and enter the Windows User Name and Password for the Server computer This will allow HGA to automatically log on to the Server each time you modify the database residing on the specified machine Note If you cannot see your local WHI instance of SQL Express when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to 14 7 Appendix G Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions Next select a Database on this Server Database combo box To create a new database select Create New Database from this list Enter a name for the database in the window shown below then click OK Database name E xl Name OF Cancel E Help Using the Project Manager 95 96 Next button in the lower right corner of the Project Wizard window to proceed HGA will then test the connection to the server and scan the database to see 1f the required tables exist in this file For new databases HGA will create the required tables Please be patient during this process NOTE When using SQL Express the database will be created in the default directory Program Files Microsoft SQL ServeiMSSQLSWHIDatal wi
389. nager allows you to create a database for your ad a Ae project on a SQL Server of your Windows Integrated Buthoreation choice through a four step Server In this first step select a SQL Server on which your project s database will be created and select create the database on that server geesosscsevessesesescosessscessessecsseeceseseccsoseey Recececesceseeescncecssosescsscesseseseetorsceoeseueneee Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist Security Info False nitial Catalog T est Data Source SRY q Next gt Cancel EJ Help Next to proceed Chapter 3 Project Manager HGA will then test the connection to the server If a database was selected in the Data Link Properties then HGA will scan and validate the database to see 1f the required tables exist If no database was selected then there will be a prompt to define a name for the new database as shown below gt Database name B x Hame DE Cancel E Help type Name of the new database OK For new databases HGA will create the required tables Please be patient during this process If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this 1s the case please select another server or database for your project or verify the connection to the selected s
390. nager also provides a link to groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW The true power of GIS is harnessed when it is used for spatial analysis of multiple data sets These spatial data sets can be combined to provide e Groundwater recharge flux maps e Aquifer yield capacity e Aquifer vulnerability e Contamination risk assessment e Geologic cross sections e Completion diagrams Contour Mapping In addition to creating and displaying selected data on a map the Map Manager also allows you to create contour maps and other thematic maps for any selected data from your database For example you can create and run a query that returns the maximum concentration of a given chemical over a certain period of time and transfer the result to the Map Manager Once the map with this data is created you can create and view contour maps depicting the distribution of the selected chemical concentration over the site area Thematic Mapping A Thematic Map of any type of data may be created and displayed on the map view Thematic maps include Pie and Bar charts with options to customize their appearance and style Cross Section Editor Many geologic and or hydrogeologic site investigations require a detailed analysis of the available lithological data and the drafting and interpretation of cross sections The Cross Section editor can be used to perform these tasks The Cross Section editor provides a set of easy to use tools to interpret
391. nal full extents Description of Menu Items 365 Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a section of the cross section that is defined by a rectangle drawn around the desired area Place the cursor on the cross section and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the cross section Click this menu item and the cross section window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is not already in a full extent mode Previous Extent Zooms the cross section window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the cross section window to the next window dimensions View 3D Allows you to view one or more cross sections in 3D with the 3D Explorer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Export to 3D Explorer j x Select Surfaces IV Select All Select CrossSections l Select All Cross Section Name Select Grid Name V relief Select wv E E Vv E E M O m Select Plumes IV Select All Select E Grid Name V 3dplume JV Include site map 3D name HG 43D OK Cancel Help 366 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Select the Cross sections to display from the dialog
392. nara 68 A ERE RN ty 68 General DES CAPO NA eben a act aaa E 68 DISC CMON rial 68 Creatine A TiS eerie peer mire cet Renee O A earn erent 69 Addie Lists Manual nyasa a bedaadas aban a tua a a ennete Oe uUniiada eae 70 Generitna Be BS bee A E entre eran te E Teer enc eee 71 BVO IN CiS a aiii 71 EnS a EAS aes to wick ssc Got vse ii 72 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager ccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 73 Material Specifications Editor ssscdssscessscssesecelscepessssstessstesesevseceussscsscansedsledanassseduessssadeeess 74 Creating a New Soil C lassification SCA tai 75 Modifying and Deleting a Soil Classification System ooooonnccnnnnncncnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononinnnnnnnnnnnos 76 Can sine SOl O io AAA A 76 Unit Converter analice 76 Major Components aiii 77 3 Project Management ssssessssccsscccsccccsccscssoocssccoscesoscscocseccssesossscese OO User Access Level Management sssssseccccccsssssceecocccssssccecocccssssssceccccosssssscecocssssssseeeesoo 83 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services o A SEE E IEA 83 SECU DOCTEC es ces yaar etcehnea a a bec dbeausuvoeneensee 84 Manasins Users and Groups a a A A essed aces hacee hats aweeadieenns 84 CrO PIOPIO MP CEA ER o o iat c steotea esas iasn uted cetaaaiacatcat tecteantaneseden tac 85 Application Level OD ES AA ROA 88 Project Leve OD Scissor 88 User Pr e OO 90 A E 91 Exporta PES Diare is doi 92 Using the Project Manatr siaren tue
393. nates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HGA in any projection system desired At the top of the window each tab represents a different database table containing one or more mapped fields Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the preview window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the Ti Accept button To reject the selected records click on the xl Reject button Finalizing the Import Once you have removed or verified the errors Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below Information x a O records were updated and 1 44 records were inserted To close the import routine and return to HGA OK button in the confirmation dialog then Close button at the bottom of the window MON Data This option allows for importing data from a MON file a format generated from datalogger monitoring software such as Diver Pocket LoggerDataManager Diver Office and e SENSE MON files consist of three sections Logger Settings Data Series and Data The Logger Settings section contains the current settings of the logger including the location sample method sample interval serial number and available channels The Data Series section contains information on when field measurements were taken The Data s
394. nces the two fields can be created as linked fields enhancing data integrity The Set Primary Key button is activated only when a table is active and receiving the focus It allows defining the primary key for the table If selected a separate dialog as shown below will be displayed where one or more fields can be selected to form the primary key for the table Set Primary Key xl PERS e SSS from a DO to_ ES E form_dezc E L soll type E E pattern E L consistency E Ll structure E L matgec E E calour E Ll odor E Ll formation_hame P formation unit moisture I eomment hd Delete duplicate records OF Cancel El Help About the Interface 435 Te The Apply Changes button allows you to save all changes made to the current user template JL The Move Down button moves any selected table or field one level down in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in Hydro GeoAnalyst in the order they are shown in the database browser T The Move Up button moves any selected table or field one level up in the Database Browser tree view Tables and fields will be displayed in Hydro GeoAnalyst in the order they are shown in the Database Browser 13 3 Working With the Template Manager 13 3 1 Modifying Tables and View Settings The Template Manager displays all user tables under their logical categories Information on categories as well as tables and fields can b
395. nding The same function is available by right mouse clicking on the project browser Refresh All Use the View Refresh item to refresh all nodes of the project browser as well as the active grid with data from the database It is useful to Refresh the view after making changes to the database template or modifying stations or station groups You can perform the same function by clicking the Refresh button in the toolbar or by right clicking in the browser window and selecting Refresh All 2 2 4 Record 52 The Record menu provides several options for performing activities which affect the records rows within a grid This includes stations in the Station List and rows in the Data Categories These menu items are context sensitive which means that the menu items will perform different functions depending on which grid is active NOTE The Record menu items are only available when a grid 1s active and the cursor 1s located within the grid A detailed description of each menu item is provided below Add The Add option adds a record to the last row of the active grid Records may be added to the grids in the various Data Categories in the Station Data tab or added as stations in the Station List tab You can perform the same function by pressing the le Add button in the toolbar or right clicking on the grid and choosing Add Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst If the record being added is a new station the new station wi
396. nformation Project Name Project No Client Location m Category Map Pumping rate Hitoy y Screen Diameter Construction y Water Level History y Borehole Diametr Construction y Elevation Description y required information Analyze Cancel Help In the first tab define the project units you would like to use for AquiferTest and populate the Pumping Test information Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst AquiferTest Settings Pumping Wels Pumping Rate Observation wells MData Source Wells Location and Construction pumping_rates ES Data map Required Data Match to Field Multiplier Name X _ X co ordinate Y co ordinate Screen Diameter Borehole Diameter Elevation y 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw 75 317293 2745 2705257 856 Pw required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Wells tab select the data query that contains the required fields for this module for your pumping test analysis Then in the grid below map the appropriate field to each required field If the unit for the field is defined in the database template then the unit will be automatically populated Otherwise this will be left blank If needed you can manually enter a conversion factor to convert the data from the HGA source to the AquiferTest project tar
397. ng and modifying a report please see Chapter 8 The Report Editor Saving and Exporting 197 198 Chapter 7 Plotting The Report Editor The SWS Report Editor included with the Hydro GeoAnalyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and 2D and 3D views you have generated for your projects This chapter presents information on how to transfer stations grids query results maps cross sections borehole log plots and 3D views into a printable report format which can be printed or exported for convenient transfer to your colleagues and or clients The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the report editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks NOTE This chapter provides a brief overview of the features that the Report Editor offers For more details refer to the Active Reports on line help file This file is named AR2Std CHM and is found in the report folder of the HGA installation folder The default is Program Files Common Files Data Dynamics Active Reports A R2Std chm Simply double click on the CHM file to load the help file 3 1 About the Interface The Report Edito
398. ngs 2 Graduated Color C Classification Selecta field that contains the classification Ea r Min 0 Mas 00 Number of Classifications le Color Value 01011995 17171995 H 03 01 1995 mi 0570171995 54141995 Ed 0770171995 72171995 09 01 1995 94141995 DN 1101195 1114199 E gt 01 01 1996 17171936 Lnn amna Ann In this dialog you may define the color scheme by selecting the Graduated Color radio button or the Classification radio button These options are most useful when displaying the charts on a map in order to see both the trends in the data over time at a single sample location and the spatial distribution trends of all sample locations Graduated Color This option allows for coloring bars from the same sample date the same color on all bar charts For example 1f your plot data contains sample data from three seasonal sampling rounds spring summer fall you will see 3 instances in the grid at the bottom A different color can be assigned to each sample date Upon clicking OK each bar in the bar chart will be colored with the specified color and all bar charts in the series will share the same color where the sample date exists 185 Classification This option allows for coloring the entire bar chart a certain color based on where it lies within a specified criteria For this you must provide a query that contains a field that will be used for the criteria id
399. nly if an object is selected a Delete Vertex feature 1s used for deleting a vertex from the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected Link Vertex feature is used for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines This feature is only available if an interpretation having at least two polygons or lines is activated and at least one of them is selected 356 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Tey D 4 About the Interface Remove Links feature is used for breaking the vertex link between two or more polygons or lines This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected For more information see Link Vertex on page 361 Zoom In option is used to zoom in on an area of the cross section defined by a rectangle Zoom Out option is used to zoom out from the current cross section view Pan button allows the user to pan the current view left right up or down Full Extent button restores the cross section view to the full extents of the Cross Section s coordinates Previous Extent button restores the cross section view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button switches the cross section view to the next zoom extent Information button displays information for the selected station Moving the mouse cur
400. ns Click the ap Add button to add a condition Next define the condition and specify the color scheme in the following fields e Fact Field select a data field from the list e Minimum define a value for the lower limit e Maximum define a value for the upper limit e Cell Style define the display properties for the condition including the BackColor Alignment Font Styles ForeColor Gradient Style GradientBack Color and Progress Bar Color When you have defined the settings press the 2 Apply Changes button To delete an existing condition simply select the appropriate row in the table and click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button Crosstab Queries 161 The values should then be colored accordingly in the crosstab report Edit Value Markers To edit a value marker simply double click on the desired item from the list of markers Now you may make changes to the cell style properties or the Min Max values Once the changes have been made click the Apply Changes button 5 8 4 Printing Crosstab Reports 162 Crosstab reports can be easily printed directly from the crosstab component Before printing you may want to first define the page and print settings These settings are described below Page Settings From the report window click the Page Setup button to open the page setup dialog shown below Paper Size Source Automatically Select M O
401. ns In order to use this feature the station layers on which the cross section are based e g Boreholes must be set to Visible in the Layer Control The cross section can then be created as follows e Select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the Main Menu or click on the Cross Section button Ah on the toolbar Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used for the cross section name Use Existing Polyline You can create a cross section line from an existing polyline layer To do so follow the steps below e Right click the desired line segment and select Convert to Cross Section Line from the pop up menu CrossSection Line Name ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e Specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line e Click Ok to accept the line settings The Select Station Layer dialog will display e Select the appropriate station layer from the dropdown list box and click Ok Select Station Layer E Select Station Layer OF Cancel e The following message will display 350 Chap
402. ns Location description_addins s QC_Monitoring_Wells Name Value Unit Description Boreholes_with_plot_data gt Station Hare GB 01 aa clay thicker than 2 m x 53621269 aa soil_borings_with_tce_exceeding_10_maq_kg Y 4814030 00 Station Data Elevation 323 50 m E Description Toc 324 50 m E Geologic Description Total Depth NJL ut 7 a ha Construction Depth een NULL m Soil Testing Soil Sampling E Monitoring Event S Mining Exploration S Geophysics Data Transfer System DTS If the project database is going to store numerous stations it may be more efficient to import the data using the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS allows for importing data from the following source types e Text CSV e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as MS Access Database MDB SQL Server etc The DTS can be loaded by selecting Import Data from Project menu the first DTS window is shown below Hydro GeoAnalyst Fundamental Concepts 31 Data Transfer System Import ia 5 x Step 1 Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer package Package name v DK Description Select data source Specify import file name O a oe Build a connection string Note The Data Transfer System DTS allows you q to import data from external sources such as ES II textiles excel spreadsheets MS Access and other databases through a thr
403. nt of the system code page ISO Uses the ISO equivalent of the system code page BIGS Uses the ANSI 950 code page also known as Big5 Chinese Taiwan HongKong SAR PRC SJIS Uses the ANSI 932 code page also known as Shift JIS Japanese EUC Uses the EUC ISO equivalent of the system code page Appendix E Map Manager ISO Codes 467 14 6 Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 468 U S Bureau of the Census http www esri com data download census2000_tigerline Data Census 2000 TIGER Line Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage United States Puerto Rico U S Virgin Islands Ameri can Samoa Guam The Commonweath of Northern Mariana Islands and the Midway Islands Datum NAD 83 Layer Roads Railroads Rivers Lakes Legal boundaries Census Statistical Boundaries etc NASA ftp eOsrpOlu ecs nasa gov srtm Data Shuffle Radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Raster SRTM Geographic Coverage Global SRTM1 30m for USA SRTM3 90m World Datum WGS84 NAVD88 Layer DEM Natural Resources Canada http geogratis cgdi gc ca download Data CGDI Warehouse Format Vector and Raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum Various Layer Landsat RADARSAT Canada Atlas Canadian Geographic Information Systems Land Use National Scale Frameworks Census Data Ontario Land use Cover Canadian Conversation Areas Database State of Canada s Ecosys tem CGIAR Consortium for Spatial Information CGIAR CSI http
404. nter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired Report Designer Window 207 208 location Multiline Allows you to set whether you want the text to move to the next line when it reaches the right border of the object Multiline True or if you want to force the text into a single line Multiline False Top Determines how far in pixels from the top edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Vertical Alignment Allows you to set how the text is aligned in the object vertically Top will start the text at the top of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text is stationary Bottom will start the text at the bottom of the object and the cursor will remain on the same line with every new line while the text moves upwards Middle will start at the vertical midpoint of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text will expand equally upwards and downwards Custom Allows you to change the object output format to General Number Currency Date Time Percentage and Custom It also allows you to specify the line border style CanGrow Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become larger if the entered text does not fit within the allotted frame CanShrink Allows you to set whether you want t
405. nterval Plot column you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the TopEntity select the from field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the BottomEntity select the to field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu Once you have entered all required information click the Refresh button to see the data on the plot column An example is shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample 3 oj x Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 536212 69 481 4030 00 323 50 324 50 ES Design E5 Lithology ES LithologyEntities ES Well Construction E gt Plot ES DepthPlotEntities Coarse Gravel gt i HF 2 o Name DataTable Gamma DepthEntity Gravel Caption Depth Description Depth DataField depth 3 WalueEntity 2 Caption Sample l Description l DataField gamma_mw E 3 Fine Sand 7 JV Live update cl Export Print Hel ose port rin elp Designing a Borehole Log Plot 287 9 3 4 Re order BHLP Columns If you have added several columns to your borehole
406. ntrol E Line style Sets the line style of the selected control H Border Sets the border style of the selected control General Tools To insert any of the items listed below into your report select the item from the toolbar and in the designer window draw a box in the position where you wish that object to appear ls Select Selects a control object on the Designer Art Label Allows you to put headings and labels in your report ab Field Insert it and link to a data field to display specific data from the project Field also allows you to put text in your report zj Check box Add a check boxes to a report can be used to create check lists in your report Chapter 8 The Report Editor a A ey db Image Add logos maps and other images to your report You can link it to a data field in your project or to an image file outside of the project Line Add simple lines in your report Shape Add shapes rectangle square circle to the report Rich Text Control Add a text box with a RTF text to your report Frame Add a frame in and or around the report Similar to the square Shape tool however the emphasis 1s on the border not fill Subreports Add any number of subreports to the report The subreport will be limited by the width of the control but the height will grow to accommodate the length of the subreport Page Break Add a page break in the report at a desired location OLE Object Add an OLE
407. nverted to the current projection system and units In addition CAD files may contain graphic features on different layers as such there are options to select the layer to import These options are explained below HINT If you are having difficulties importing your CAD drawing please try exploding Description of Menu Items 311 all blocks and re saving as a dxf file before attempting to import into HGA Selecting Layers When a CAD format is selected using the Layer Import menu navigate to the appropriate file and open it The following dialogue will load Import DXF Projection Projection Type UTM Coordinate System NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17M Limit meters OF Cancel The top portion of the dialogue lists the projection system properties of the current map project Below this frame is a Transform button This option is required only 1f you are not sure that the CAD file has the same projection system as the current map project In this case click Transform to georeference the CAD image Once you are done click OK to return to the Import DXF dialogue In this dialogue select which layers you wish to import into the map and click OK Transforming Coordinates The CAD file must contain the same units and projection system as the current map project in order for it to be displayed properly If there are differences then the CAD file can be Transformed to the map project s projection and coordinate sy
408. objects define the locations where color maps and contour maps can be plotted for concentration visualization To define the slice locations select Objects Surfaces from the top menu bar A Select create slices window will appear as shown in the following figure The Select create slices window displays a list of the available slices which have been previously defined The Select create slices window also has options to create additional slices or to modify delete existing slices 422 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer m Select create slices loj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Edi Delete Modify Select Cancel E 12 4 1 Creating a Vertical Slice To create a vertical slice through the project domain click the Vertical button to open the Slice Properties window as shown in the following figure A yellow outline of the vertical slice will appear in the Display Screen vd 481 4493 0 Te 481 4493 0 both sliders synchronized The Slice type options define the planar orientation of the slice e Vertical XZ refers to the plane along the X axis extending through the entire depth of the site e Vertical YZ refers to the plane along the Y axis extending through the entire depth of the site For a Vertical XZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the Y axis and the Y axis values are
409. observations are taken at specific locations in the map coordinate and elevation In HGA these sampling sites are known as Stations Station Types In HGA all data is saved and referenced to a Station A Station is a unique real world location at which data collection activities are performed Depending on the scope a project may contain single or multiple station types each with 1ts own attributes Typical examples of stations are explained below Boreholes A borehole is a hole drilled at a site for exploration of subsurface geologic structure soil and rock parameters and groundwater characteristics Station attributes for a borehole include Station ID Site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of layers soil and rock classification used types of sampling split spoon soil samples static GW level etc Pumping Wells A pumping well is installed in a borehole and may be used for water supply or aquifer test analysis Station attributes for a pumping well include Well ID site ID coordinates elevation depth date of drilling driller name method of drilling number of casing intervals maximum casing diameter and type minimum casing diameter and type number of screened intervals screen diameter and type type of pump average productivity pumping rate etc Observation Monitoring Wells An observation well may be used to monitor groundwater levels and groundwater c
410. odeed JA ogg stings Sample prod 50 ogg stings Sample method Y Charnelt entiation JUVE Charmelt Range E Chanel Maser a a m Channel 1 Altitude 10 El Motes Select one or more files for importing into the project database Support MOM files created by LOM Pocket Diver DiverO fice and e SENSE teo Cima ao Below the Select data source frame 1s the MON file Information table This table contains the datalogger information of the selected MON file MON Data on page 41 To remove a MON file from the list select the file and click the Delete button Click Next gt to proceed to Step 2 Data Mapping Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 43 Step 2 Data Mapping 210 x Data mapping Notes Select Section Field Select table field E Logger_settings 0 E Series_settings ee Turbidity Er Data E Water Level Data DateTime Screen_ID A Mapping 1 Left tree view lists contents of the MON file while that on the right side displays tables and fields in your database Temperature E Conductivity E depth_to_water level oe Flowman Dr indicator yes Mo e Comments 2 Map one or more components of your MOM file with one or more fields in your database by nodes and clicking on the Map button Source Fields Destination Fields 3 To remove mapping select the mapping in the table at the bottom and select the delete button at the bottom File Table Table E vae e
411. of Menu Items 333 Edit Layout Setting To edit the position of the callout box e Right mouse click on the map window and select Edit Layout from the pop up menu e Click once on any callout box to select it the box will become highlighted in a color outline indicating it has been selected e Left click on the callout box and using your mouse drag the box to the new location When you have done this the result could be similar to the example shown below Mup Project Sie map bk SON AOS KAA AF LISA p 2 d Eh E EJA yy de g A Twit Inam BS woe SEA LA Am oc ara aran 4 535 51 4 814 416 i 2 055 When you are finished with the position edits you must right mouse click on the map window and turn off the Edit Layout option to disable this feature To edit the remaining layout settings including fields violation conditions and display properties simply select Layer Display Data from the main menu then modify the settings as explained above 10 2 3 Edit 334 The Edit menu contains standard windows functions such as Cut Copy and Paste objects as well as other options for editing shapefiles NOTE Before editing a layer make sure that the Editable check box is selected After editing deselect the Editable check box on the Layer Manager Chapter 8 Map Manager Cut Cuts the selected object to clipboard only available 1f an object polygon rectangle circle line or text 1s selected
412. oject below for information on how to open the project in Hydro GeoAnalyst Downloading from the SWS FTP site To download the demo project from the SWS ftp site Ensure your computer is equipped with an internet connection Open your internet browser or preferred FTP client and navigate to the following ftp site ftp ftp flowpath com Software Hydro_GeoAnalyst 2010 1 Demo Project Download Demo_Project zip to a location on your computer Once the download is complete see Opening the Demo Project below for information on how to open the project in Hydro GeoAnalyst Opening the Demo Project Once the demo project has been downloaded to your computer extract the contents of the demo_project zip file to a location on your computer Ensure the USB dongle containing your HGA license is connected to your computer Launch Hydro GeoAnalyst by double clicking on the desktop short cut icon Select File gt Open from backup from the HGA main menu Specify the appropriate user credentials If the HGA User Access Controls have not yet been configured use Admin for the user name and leave the password field blank Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst e In the Restore Database As dialog box specify the SQL Server for which the demo project database will be attached e Beside the Project field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Se
413. oject Model Topography txt The Cross Section editor will generate the text files based on the vertex location of each model layer line in each cross section For example for model layer 1 Topography if cross section AA contains this model line with 5 vertices and cross section BB has the Same model line with 10 vertices then the text file should contain 15 rows if both cross sections AA and BB are selected The X Y location for each vertex corresponds to the X Y location on the cross section line the Cross Section editor also provides the option to save the well contacts using the station s X Y co ordinates and retrieve this info from the database For more details on this feature please see Interpretation on page 373 and see Querying Cross Section Interpretations on page 389 Export Image Provides options for exporting the current cross section to a Raster Image file Supported file types include bitmaps BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg and enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the desired export format and click OK An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file Scale Factor Quality Scale Symbolo 256 Colors Default f Half Tone O Web Safe 24Bit Color O Graps With System Colors No Symbology Scaled Line Symbology Mot Scaled Source Depth C All Symbology Scaled OK Cancel H Help There are several
414. oject related Soil Specification e information will be created under E bs al the provided Project Folder Description Select or create a client for the project Select a Soil Specification for the project The Soil Specification contains soil names NN and patterns which will be used Projection Type to visualize your lithology data in gt Projection borehole log plots and cross Geographic sections acs WGS 1984 y C UTM State Planar Units C Others Local Required Field Einish Cancel Help In the first line enter a project name This may be any combination of numbers and letters but should not contain spaces use _ or to substitute for spaces The project name will be used to define the project folder As the name is entered an identical folder name will be created and will appear in the Project Folder field You may modify the project directory by clicking the folder button al and the following dialog will appear Select Directory i E x Directory Hame D Program Files HG Analyst Directories Files D ACI whi gt F Fil CustLine_WLewvel dll ME em A CustPoly dl A CustPoly Shift dll Ey bhip CustRend dll data DBFOLL dil r we dbwhi al zl Eg Projects Drives E d new volume Cancel Help Select a new directory then click OK to continue The next step is to define the Client for the project Client info
415. ollect all of your previous data and reports and consolidate them into a powerful relational database system that can be queried and referenced with ease HGA operates as a desktop application based on Microsoft SQL Server technology The package supports multiple user levels for controlled data management with structured access privileges for setting up project data structures checking out data to working sub projects and submitting new or modified data Sample Applications Typical applications for HGA include e Regional water well management e Contaminant site inventory e Regulatory compliance e Geologic cross sections e Public access to information e Environmental site assessment e Monitored natural attenuation e Regional aquifer characterization and management e Cross boundary data sharing e Aquifer vulnerability mapping 1 1 What s New in Hydro GeoAnalyst The main interface for Hydro GeoAnalyst has much of the same user friendly look and feel as the previous version but with some significant improvements to features Some of the more significant upgrade features in the latest version of Hydro GeoAnalyst are described below New Features in 2010 1 Display gridded surface data on Cross Sections Gridded surface data can now be displayed on cross section interpretations Surface data can be used to show the relationship between interpretation layers and numerical model layers or for showing interpolated subsurface f
416. om the combo box The remaining settings can be left as is OK to return to the Report Designer When you are finished designing the chart s and other parts of your report you can generate a report preview E Report Preview button from the toolbar Please be patient during this process as 1t may require a few minutes to pass the data from HGA to the Report Preview the report contains approximately 25 pages Once this is complete you should see the preview window with the table of contents as shown below Report query report_0 New Report 01 01 01 01 1 Ar TWOC ugl 0 Mar May Jul 1 24 996 1 8 11 996 EERIE i bil Chapter 8 The Report Editor The report preview displays the first station W 01 by default Since there are no observed concentrations for this well the time series chart is not useful in this case Scroll ahead a few pages to see a station which contains data Or select a station from the table of contents on the left side of the window to see the respective time series chart W 12 from the table of contents The report preview will jump ahead to this station and display its respective data and time series chart If the report pages are cut off return to the designer window to re size the chart area or add a page break The Report can be saved now to be recalled later on fa Save button from the toolbar The report will appear in the HGA Project brow
417. omponents into a single program Components include Project Wizard Universal Data Transfer System Template Manager Materials Specification Editor Query Builder QA QC Reporter Map Manager Cross Section Editor HGA 3D Explorer Borehole Log Plotter and Report Editor The seamless integration of these tools provide the means for compiling and normalizing field data analyzing and reporting subsurface data mapping and assessing spatial information and reporting site data AquiferTest Pro AquiferTest Pro designed for graphical analysis and reporting of pumping test and slug test data offers the tools necessary to calculate an aquifer s hydraulic properties such as hydraulic conductivity transmissivity and storativity AquiferTest Pro is versatile enough to consider confined aquifers unconfined aquifers leaky aquifers and fractured rock aquifers conditions Analysis results are displayed in report format or may be exported into graphical formats for use in presentations AquiferTest Pro also provides the tools for trends corrections and graphical contouring water table drawdown around the pumping well AquaChem AquaChem is designed for the management analysis and reporting of water quality data AquaChem s analysis capabilities cover a wide range of functions and calculations frequently used for analyzing interpreting and comparing water quality data AquaChem includes a comprehensive selection of commonly used plotting techniques
418. on the interface These panels can either be docked on the left side of the interface or on the bottom of the interface Moving a Panel To move a panel to another location position the cursor over the title bar Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the panel by moving the cursor to another location then release the mouse button to drop the panel at the new location Floating Panels Once a panel has been moved from the docked position to a floating position a Title Bar will appear at the top of the panel and it will behave like a separate Window The Display Tree Panel has an option Stay on top When this is active the panel window will float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer interface as long as it is the active window When this is active this panel will always float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window Docking Panels Floating panels can be docked again by clicking the mouse pointer on the panel Title Bar and dragging it to the left or bottom edge of the 3D Explorer window A grey outline will appear when the mouse pointer is in the proper location and the panel is dockable Release the mouse button to dock the panel at the desired docking area Closing Panels The panels may be removed from the 3D Explorer interface by clicking the Close icon X The panels can be re opened using the View options from the top menu bar The panels can be toggled on off by clicking the E Hide project browser butto
419. on to add a new layout In the combo box that appears select either Tabular or Plot shown below Display Type x Please select a display type Tabular r Cancel Click on the E Delete button to delete the selected layout Use the F button to move the selected layout up Use the button to move the selected layout down Next you must define the settings for the layout Plots For a Plot display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear Chapter 8 Map Manager Data Settings x Plot Template Choose Data OK Cancel Help In the list choose from available plot templates that were created using the chart component For details on how to create plot templates please see Chapter 7 Saving Plot as Template In order to display the plot in the map the following requirements in the template must be met e Plot Grouping and Series Grouping must be done by station ID e The plot template must contain data for the selected stations The remaining settings for the plot are similar to those described in the sections Choose Data tab below Tabular For a tabular display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear Data Settings i x Fields Condition Choose Data Layer Fields Display Fields ID ELEVATION TOC OK Cancel H Help In the Data Settings dialog you select which Layer Fields from the layer should
420. on will cancel the data loading and display only those records that have were read from the database up to that point 1 6 2 Main Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to most of the features available in HGA see Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar on page 32 for more details 1 6 3 Toolbar The toolbars that appear beneath the menu bar are dynamic changing as you move from one window tab to another Some toolbar buttons become available only when certain tabs are in view For example the Add and Delete toolbar buttons are only available when the focus is on a grid Some toolbar buttons are available only in a particular context for example the Paste button is only available after the Copy or Cut command has been used The following tool buttons appear at the top of the HGA main window For a short description of an icon move the mouse pointer over the icon without clicking either mouse button New button loads the Project Manager to create a new project al Open button opens an existing HGA project cal Print button sends the data item that 1s currently active to the Report Manager This data item could be a list of stations data from any table or a query result This feature is available only if a grid is active About the Interface 17 18 BE E x Ty E Refresh button refreshes the current view by updating the project browser and all opened grids Copy button copies selected character s in a grid ce
421. onmental data These include e SWS s own Environmental Database Template designed for groundwater data management expands U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 standards e Ontario s Ministry of Environment s MOE Water Well Information System WWIS Template designed for management of water well records and e U S EPA Regions 2 amp 5 Environmental Data Models designed for environmental data management All templates are available in both metric and imperial length units In most cases one of these database structures should be adequate for your projects If not you may use the Create New Template option to create a new structure containing only the Stations table Then after the project is created you may use the Template Manager to create and define the required tables and fields for your project If you select to Create a new template a prompt will appear for a name for the new template 100 Chapter 3 Project Manager Template name a x Hame OF Cancel Help The template will be created and will contain only the required table for an HGA database This 1s the Station Table with the following fields e Name e ID e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate e Elevation e TOC Top of Casing If you select one of the existing Database structures you will see a list of the tables included with this template and the corresponding fields under the Database Structure Preview Take a few moments to review this data
422. onnection Ok Cancel Help OF Cancel Help e Select the Provider option For this example select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers this option allows you to choose from such sources as Text Excel or Access Click on the Connection tab once more to display the original dialog select the option Use Connection Appendices String e Click on the Build button and the following dialog will appear Select Data Source H ES File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources Z DSN Name Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that you wish to connect to You can Use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which ts installed on pour machine e In this dialog select from a list of data sources Since none are available click on the New button to create a new one The following dialog will then appear Create New Data Source x Select a driver for which pou want to set up a data source Dnwer da Microsoft para arquivos AE Yun Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excell xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft 4ccess T reiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf hdieroeokt AJA seo WER Crier 12 ARFI Advanced a 4 4 Back Cancel e Select the ODBC driver format In t
423. ons Label Properties Wisible Color Size ETitle Title Visible _ Text color Text size T ext frame ET ime Label itle Text size gt Text frame ElLegend Visible Title Text size Text color Frame Frame line color Frame fill color 5 0 Geology O 9 96 HGA3D5 E E 0 03 Date 5 15 2000 v E 10 04 Iv Geology 10 015 E lv O O files into existing 3D projects they may lie outside the 3D domain created based on the cross section extents Use this option to re size the 3D domain to include the plume Interpretation Type sets the cross section interpretation type currently in view Only one interpretation type may be viewed at one time Choose from Geology Hydrogeology or Model The default is Geology Station Label Properties e Visible shows hides station labels e Color sets color of station labels e Size sets size of the station labels Title e Title field allows for entering a project title e Visible shows hides the title e Text color sets the color of the Project title text The default is white e Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen Display Settings 405 406 size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame e Visible shows hides the text frame e Line Color sets the color of the text frame e Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Time Label these settings are appl
424. ont series color visible Controls the font color for the text in the legend Vertical Y Axis Plot Settings Pen width Controls the thickness of the axis line Visible Shows hides the axis on the plot Log scale Plots the axis values using a logarithmic scale Max value Controls the maximum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Min value Controls the minimum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Auto max value Restores the default automatic maximum value which is calculated from the selected data set Auto min value Restores the default automatic minimum value which is calculated from the selected data set Grid Visible Shows hides gridlines on the plot Style Controls the grid line style select from Solid Dash Dot DashDot or DashDotDot 189 Title Text Sets the title for the axis Visible Shows hides the axis title Angle Controls the angle for the axis title for the Y axis it may be useful to have the angle set at 90 degrees Font Controls the font for the axis title Tick Label Format Controls the decimal format for the labeled tics enter 00 to display 2 decimal places to display no decimal places simply enter 0 Angle Controls the angle for the tick labels for date labels it may be useful to select an angle of 45 or 90 degrees for improved display Font Controls the font for the tick labe
425. oon data oe Ta A E Marflepos E Feens Demo Version a n E AapiHamia o rea yi oar Explorer bomb Ta A dm Dad HET mi ee Hame ihera Teut ewe 5 ton O ee SPITS posed H sebbbi ni Alignment 0 ddTxLelt PageFoctes Borehole Field Ange a Esport i I MH HI 1 0000 0005000000 055000 Bm bil hor nse Caption Manr Clatssame Normal A i Fun Arial Layout prepa Designer HEH height 270 ri eo hy Window Gest Dene Verse NE qe a cc lucen 0 ene True JARA A el y e font weight bokk ba 75 ARA ee SE o E PageFocter Demo Version Verlical lignn ddTeTog a ittir HH HH HHH HHH THH HETH HTH HHH HHH H z ae Hibe True ves DvonstesDeavsrrefonnatse eeneres reriesaleresens eecsnea ecrssoc eses Fe Hl Pre pem pa RR E ES ES EE as alzan WordWrap True Fields PEA b The designer window contains the following items e Property Toolbox provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the Chapter 8 The Report Editor report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain e Toolbar provides multiple buttons for functions in the designer Explorer allows you to browse through the controls that are placed on the currently opened report It facilitates selecting a control for further editing e Layout window provides the interface for designing the report e Fields allows you to select one or more data fields for displaying data Simply drag and drop the
426. oooonnnnnncncnnnonononocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnos 123 Acceptine or Rejectins Errors W arilss ii 124 Acceptin Or Rejecting REcords sereni rancia EENE EATER 124 Enano The TMPO ae ii acia 124 Exporting Data using the DTS sccsccsssssssssssssssccccccccessssssscccccccsscccssssssscccssssseeees 125 Specify Data Sotree and Package said 126 ea LEIDEN E PON RE AAA lio y rn Sen ee erer nema n MEN eee otra rON nTeee Teer eT ertrreee 126 Mit CONV ETS IO Meer aha EROS 126 Station Related Secos mus dildo 127 Copyright Schlumberger Water Services SUCIOS sio lic co About the Interface 0d ol 129 Destriptioniol Toolbar Hen 131 A EVES sinini SivcaBacselaeviaceccceaucesaavvavicestecsensevtueencceenseuens 131 BD Aba WCC Sidi ca 131 Station Group USES aii dla 132 Crea QUES id dada 132 Data Query Ex ample nabo iaa 152 Adding a field which contains a Linked List ooooooonnncoonoooonnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 138 Advanced Data Query ODHONS a E iii 140 Station Group Query Example nas 142 Query Using SQL Commands Example cedido n 145 DE IECL CG Olan oeii aT A a a ena 145 Belete Command ata a a E E E E N 146 METETE QUCFICS osseous snoa oo EVNE Ea 147 A ag asaaeesanen ce etecensasecashecancn ceca ssdoiadiaaenaticctemaeseuesnaosmeaangrastaaeseaeeets 147 O 147 Recalling Queries in Hydro GeoAnNalysSt ssssssssccccccccssssssssccccccccccssssssssccccssssesees 147 Ate ty TAD o idos ic ddas 147 E
427. ore closing Reopen A list of recently accessed map projects will be displayed beside the Reopen item This is an alternate method of opening map project files instead of using the Open command Export Project Creates a copy of all layers in the current map project for use in other applications Export Map Project 7 E x Map Layers Surface M Select Al Map Layer Layer Type Export as Sample Map GA brmnp Raster Sample Map GA brmnp al alme bmp Raster alme bmp e intro db CAD intro dxf e contour Line contour m All Stations Point All Stations al CrossSectonLined Line CrossSechonLine5 al Boreholes Point Boreholes W AmPhoto_Eolor_gr bmp Raster AmPhoto_Color_gr bmp e Water Courses Line Water Courses al Airports 1 Point Airports 1 e Major Railroad Line Major Railroad al Urban Areas Polwgor Urban Areas W Trees Polwgor Trees W Grasslands Polwgor Grasslands al Croplands Polwgor Cropland a Destination Folder D stemp Ej e Export using current map project s coordinate system Export Cancel H Help In this dialog select the layers you with to export and define names for the layers the same can be done for Surfaces if any are available Finally specify the Destination Folder for the copy of the map files On exporting a map project selected shapefiles will be exported in the current projection system if selected by the user Raster images will use the projection system at the time the
428. ored in metres in the database can be exported in feet in the destination table Once the mapping is complete 126 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System Next to proceed to the next step in the DTS 4 2 3 Station Related Settings Similar to the import procedure if you export station data you must specify the projection type and projection for the stations in the exported file Data transfer system Export o 9 s meters el Once this 1s complete Export button and Close button to complete the process Exporting Data using the DTS 127 128 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System Queries This chapter provides a detailed description of the Query Builder and Crosstab queries Within a HGA project 1t may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering reporting and management A few examples of data queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 500 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet e Select boreholes where the overburden thickness exceeds 20 feet e Locate groundwater concentration exceedances for BTEX In the Query Builder window the query fields and conditions can be quickly defined Once the queries have been created they may be easily accessed from the Project Browser where each new query will appear as a new node Using the Query Builder it 1s possible to create two
429. oring Event 4 Mining Exploration Geophysics b W Well History Tree View E User Category Oo Settings Oo Window View settings e a Name Description Tables Fields w 42 eji Toolbar Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM Close Help Chapter 5 Template Manager The Template Manager window contains the following items e The Template Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect templates as a whole e The Database Templates Contains a list of the available database templates e The Tree View Contains a view of all data categories tables and fields for the selected template e The Settings Window Contains the interface for editing tables and fields e The Tables Fields Toolbar Contains toolbar buttons that affect the selected field or table 13 2 1 Description of Toolbar Items The Template Manager provides two groups of toolbar items e The Template Toolbar Upper Toolbar consists of buttons that affect database templates as a whole e The Tables Fields Toolbar Lower Toolbar consists of buttons that affect the selected field table in the selected template Template Toolbar Global Template Options The buttons on the upper toolbar located at the top of the window immediately beside the list of Database templates contains buttons that allow copying an existing template saving changes made to the current template exporting the current template as a database structure template and delet
430. ormation for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc e and much more using Data Tables and Query Results For more details please refer to Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Major Components 81 82 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Project Management Project Management is an essential component of any environmental project Hydro GeoAnalyst provides the tools you need to manage user access to your projects selecting database schemas and geographical details The first section of this chapter 3 1 User Access Level Management describes tools for managing how users access your projects The second section 3 2 Using the Project Manager describes the process of creating new projects and the options available 3 1 User Access Level Management 3 1 1 Introduction The User Access Level Management UALM component allows protecting both file based data e g model inputs outputs etc as well as database based data e g data stored in HGA The following features are available e Create and manage user groups 1 e create edit delete user groups e Manage users in user groups 1 e add remove
431. ort e select the ADO control by clicking on the appropriate icon on the toolbar e Display the Properties explorer window if it is not already visible e Select the Custom properties option by clicking on the button next to this item e A dialog will appear Provide or modify the desired options 8 3 Report Preview Window 216 The Viewer allows you to visualize the final report as it would be printed It can be considered a print preview of your reports Once your report arrives at the viewer it is ready to be printed saved in the native binary format of the Report Editor or exported to the various formats A report preview can be generated by clicking on the Preview button from the Designer window s toolbar A sample of the Report viewer window is shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes Chapter 8 The Report Editor je WHI Henni SNe Is a Ge frorrose loc a x A FEET EEE UFO TREE PUTA A le LLIT eshte BALA ae ae ae Oe Oe Oe Me Ae Ob ae Se De Mia Me a The Report Viewer contains three main components e Report Navigation Toolbar provides a number of toolbar icons that allow you to interact with the report described in detail below e Table of Contents can be displayed by clicking on the TOC icon EE on the toolbar The table of contents allows you to jump to any desired section in the report e Main Body of the Report Preview The main body of the report displ
432. orted The current supported language is T SQL SQL 92 standard other dialects such as SQL 99 PL SQL Watcom SQL are not supported Any existing database which satisfies a few basic requirements can be selected for your project These requirements mainly have to do with tables and or fields with reserved names For example selecting a database that has a table named Station will not be accepted by HGA unless this table satisfies the requirements of HGA s Station table Chapter 3 Project Manager The Station table must contain the following required fields each with a specific data type e ID e Name e X Coordinate e Y Coordinate and e Elevation ground surface If this table structure exists in the database and satisfies these requirements then 1t may be used to store the Station information Option 1 Select Server and Database If the Select Server and Database radio button is selected you will be prompted for a Server name and a Database name You must specify a server in order for a database to be created As mentioned earlier this may be any computer located on your network LAN which has a MS SQL Server 2005 Express installation or WHI SQL Express If you do not have a network connection only your computer name will appear in the list of servers e g Computer_Name WHI Choose a server from the Server list at the top of the dialog After the Server is selected HGA will automatically sca
433. ory can be renamed both in the database as well as in the template view settings Table Property Settings Information related to all user tables can be edited through the Template Manager The Template Manager allows all users to set the visibility status of any selected table To make a table visible or hidden check or un check the tick boxes that are provided in front of the table name in the Project Browser Adding Tables A table can be added by selecting a data category in which the table is to be created and then either by clicking on the oF Add button at the bottom of the window or by right mouse clicking and selecting the Add table pop up menu item Template Editor Demo N z oj x environmental_june30c n pai iA ay Fm I Use as project default Database structure Category Settings Descriptions iption T Database Settings Table name A gy IV from IV to IV Description V soil_type JV Pattern IV Consistency IV Structure V ASTM Descriptor V Color Y Odor V formation_name JV formation_unit JV moisture V comment H Hydrogeology H Modelling H V features V Well Construction V Soil Testing V Soil Sampling V Monitoring Event 4 Mining Exploration V Geophysics IM Well History View settings FT User Category ha i o Desai iS 7 ame eologic Description OX 2 QE ID H Last Change 06 30 2004 1 31 40 PM Ee
434. ot window Data Filter Set a data filter for the plot data this 1s useful when the plot contains a large number of data points and you want to filter out repetitive or unnecessary data or values where this is no significant change Active Use this option to enable disable the filter Value Set the filter value Any consecutive plotted data points with a value less than this specified filter value will be hidden from the plots when the filter is active Title Enter a Title for the plot Legend The following Legend settings are available Visible Show hide the legend Alignment Set the Legend position choose from the following options e Top e Bottom e Left e Right 188 Chapter 7 Plotting Style Controls what data elements or series appear in the Legend choose from the following options e Automatic e Series Names e Series Values e Last Values e Palette Vertical space Controls the amount of vertical space between each data element in the legend higher values will result in more space between each item in the legend Inverted Legend Use this property to reverse the order of items in the legend For example items in the order A B C will be inverted to the order C B A when this property is selected Check boxes visible Use this property to display a check box beside each item in the legend when active you can then use the Legend check boxes to show hide which data series are visible on the plot F
435. our data For more details see BackUp Database on page 62 To uninstall HGA e Locate the Add Remove Programs option in your Windows Control Panel e Select the HGA software as the program to be removed e Follow the on screen instructions e Once you are finished re boot your system to ensure all system files are updated 1 3 4 Starting Hydro GeoAnalyst To launch HGA double click on the desktop icon or by accessing Start gt Programs gt SWS Software from your Windows task bar Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst 9 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst Demo Project You can download and open the HGA demonstration project for exploring features and familiarizing yourself with the program The HGA demo project is currently hosted on the SWS website and FTP site Downloading from the SWS Website To download the demo project from the website Ensure your computer is equipped with an internet connection Open your internet browser and navigate to the following website http www swstechnology com software_product php ID 27 Right click on the Hydro GeoAnalyst Demo Project Download link and select Save Target As from the pop up menu In the Save As dialog select a destination folder on your computer and then click the Save button The demo project will begin to download to your computer Depending on your internet connection speed this may take several minutes Once the download is complete see Opening the Demo Pr
436. ow with a cross section loaded for demonstration purposes 354 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Active Menu Window Bar Map Project firstmap gt N zA Bi ioj x ile Edit View Tools Help Toolbar asl ZONA XALAPA ONE er a a 8 SecondLine C Model del 0 360 Topography uolgas sso15 Geology 340 Gravel Sandy Gravel Cross Sections amp Interpretations Layers control 320 Coarse Gravel Clay rich 300 Fine sandy gravel Silty Sand Elevation m 280 HydroGeology Cross Section Window 260 240 220 200 Site Map 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 533 931 4 813 102 Distance m 538 305 4 814 234 937 18 382 97 X Z coordinates Pag The Cross Section Editor window contains the following items e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Cross Section Editor e Layer Control Manages cross sections visibility and editability of interpretation layers Right click a layer to access additional options such as Move up Move down View 3D and Properties e Cross Section Window Contains the cross section view for the selected cross section line e Site Map Displays the selected cross section line as it appears in the map project
437. ple select gt e Enter a value in the second Expression field For this example type 320 Chapter 5 Queries Next add this field to the Display Fields To do so double click on the TOC field in the Project Tree and it will be added automatically as a new row in the Display Fields Or press the op Add button located below the Display Fields Then select the TOC field and drag this field into the blank field For each Display Field there are Aggregate sorting Functions Select from AVG COUNT MAX MIN STDEV STDDEVP SUM VAR VARP These functions are explained on page 141 Otherwise leave blank to apply no aggregate options For each Display Field Order options may be specified Select from ASC Ascending or DES Descending or none Once the fields have been added the Query Builder display should be similar to the one shown in the figure below loj x xaue C Station Group Quey Data Query A SOL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields TOC_Exceeds_320m Function Expression station id E Description FE 7 E Location station name name Station Name station toc TOC X J Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Conditions depth to bedrock i pre d J Operator description_addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling MM hd awitharina Ci seact P Source Cond
438. pped to the closest vertex Boundary Snapping Buffer The default Boundary Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a cross section boundary line either the left or right then the boundary line will become highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this boundary line the drawn line will be automatically snapped to this boundary line Vertex Snapping Buffer The default Vertex Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a vertex on a polygon is selected and the Link Vertex option is used and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a vertex on an adjacent polygon then the vertex will become highlighted with a red box Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor outline upon clicking the left mouse button on this vertex the vertex on the selected polygon will be automatically snapped to this newly selected vertex Polygon Vertex Snapping makes it easy to place polygons adjacent to one another for continuous cross section views Labels Provides options for modifying the label fonts for the interpretation layers Geology Hydrogeology and Model Simply click on the sample box beside the appropriate label and a Font options dialog will appear as shown below E Cancel Arial Black Fr Arial Narrow Tr AvantGarde Ek ET Tr AvantGarde Md BT Fr BankGothic Lt BT Fp BankGothic Md BT Effects Sample Strikeout TF Underline AaB bYyZz Color L Black Script wes
439. ptions is displayed in the figure below Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst HydroGeo Analyst Demo C Program Files HGAnalystProjectsi Demo_Projecti SS aan 5 x Project Edit view Record Settings Tools Help J ea27 Sh tXBRAaARBBHS BOS amp da ini M Station Groups a Station List El Data Query S Station Data JE Station Data Data Category Es Description Descih 7 Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m EE Geologic Description dad w 01 gt 535250 19 4814315 00 33210 331 80 A Well Construction Geologic Description E Soil Testing Well Construction E Soil Sampling Soil Testing Descrip ee escription Monitoring Event Soil Sampling P ES Mining Exploration oroma ven ES Geophysics ining E xploration i Geophysics E Well History Well Histor Queries D ff Crosstab Total Depth Station Type Observation Well Maps Depth to Bedrock NULL Cross Sections a Reports i H 3DView Borehole Logs Plots Loading options Load All Incremental 3 Flots Total 23 selected 0 i After a Data Category has been selected the appropriate tables and fields belonging to this category will be displayed in the Station Data tab The following is a complete list of the data categories provided in HGA along with some of the data entities that may be linked to each cat
440. puter The types of controls that are provided on the toolbar can be grouped as follows Data Access Controls ADO data control Provides access to the database using information provided to it Only one ADO control can be added to a given report This control can be added to the report by clicking on the Insert ADO Data control icon CHL on the toolbar Chapter 8 The Report Editor Data Display Controls Controls that can be used to display information that is either coming from the data source database or provided on the Report Designer The controls that fall into this category include e Label e Check box e RTF Text e Graphics Image Line Forms OLE objects Barcodes etc e Page break e Sub reports Adding Controls Except for ADO data control all controls can be added to the report in the desired section To add a control to a report e select the desired control by clicking on the icon on the toolbar e position the cursor at the desired location and click and drag to define the size of the control Depending on the selected control specific dialog boxes may be displayed requesting information Once the control is placed on the report its properties could be altered by activating the Properties Explorer window and modifying the desired property The position of the controls can be changed by selecting and moving the selection to the desired location Controls can be moved this way only within a given section Cut
441. r Now you are ready to print your report 8 1 Creating Reports Reports for your project can be created from the various modules within HGA including e Data Grids e Borehole Log Plots Hydro GeoLogger e Data Query e Map Manager e Cross Section Editor e 3D Explorer HGA comes with several prepared report templates for most database schemas The first two report types listed above can be created through HGA s main interface while the remaining types are created only while using the respective modules of HGA The following few sections present detailed descriptions on creating each report type 8 1 1 Creating Reports in HGA Main Window The main interface of HGA allows you to create reports in one of the following two ways Creating Reports 223 e From a Grid create a report with the data in the selected grid e From a selected Data Query create a report using the results of a query Creating Reports from a Data Grid Follow the directions below to create a report containing a data grid e Select the desired grid in HGA for example select the Stations List grid or select the desired table e Press the Print button from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the f Designer button from the toolbar This
442. r Data on page 166 for more details The following fields are not required but are helpful for easily identifying samples in the results page e Station Name located in the Station table e Sample Name this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Sample Date e Units e Unit conversion factors 6 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template To create a new lab quality analysis template click Tools gt Quality Control from the Main Menu then select the Manage Lab QC Templates option The Lab Quality window will open as shown in the following figure Lab Quality l x Lab Quality Templates Template Description zl Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than i Coefficient of variation less thar i Highlighting Font Background olor Border Ealar Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel Me To create a new template click the Add button and enter a name for the template The newly created template will then appear in the Lab Quality Templates list To configure your template click on the to expand the template tree As shown in the 168 Chapter 6 Quality Control following example screenshot the three Check types Duplicate Spikes and Blanks will be listed To activate a Check type click in the checkbox beside it Lab Quality l x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Y Fir
443. r Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Meta File EMP Properties The Map Project Properties dialog contains general settings for the map project This dialog is shown below x Description Geographic f UTM f State Planar Non Earth Projection Unit AMES NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N meters y Ok Cancel H Help 300 Chapter 8 Map Manager In this dialog there are options for editing the Projection System units and description e In the Name field a new name may be defined for the map project e In the Projection Type frame there will be a list of Projection Systems supported by Map Manager and stored in the Database For each Projection Type a Projection must be defined along with a corresponding Unit The default unit for each projection will be displayed If your HGA project uses a local coordinate system all map projects must also use the local coordinate system In this case this setting cannot be modified and will be disabled IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer 1f they have been created in a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude If you wish to display your cross section s in the 3D Explorer please be sure to create your map project using a projected coordinate system e g UTM e In the Description text box you may define a brief description of the project NOTE Projects in the Map Manager
444. r may be launched from HGA in several ways e Select Project Report or click on the Bl Report button in most HGA modular windows Map Editor Cross Section editor 3D Explorer or the main window When this option is selected 1f there are report templates available About the Interface 199 for this module there will be a prompt to Select a Report Template before proceeding e The Report Editor may be loaded from the Project Browser in the main window simply double click on an existing Report or Report template under the Reports node The report editor consists of two main windows e The Runtime Designer Designer and e The Viewer Each component of the Report Editor comes with 1ts own set of toolbars and icons that perform specific tasks related to the window The following few sections present a detailed description of the toolbar icons for each component 8 2 Report Designer Window 200 The Report Designer allows you to design the contents as well as looks of your reports All report designs can be saved and opened for editing and or generating the final report A sample of the designer view 1s shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes Property Toolbox J wrt Hepa PED ES Fs oe AE Ii AE Toolbar hma pe e AA AAA AAA LL Je eo eo eS Se eS a AAA ae ee Explores E AA AAA AA da
445. r settings Make sure the renderer you ve created has a check mark in the Visible column and click OK to apply the renderer Value Renderer The Value renderer function is very similar to the Graduated renderer The Value Renderer dialog is shown below 318 Chapter 8 Map Manager Yalue Renderer 3 X Mame Elevation Field Mame ELEVATION ES e Display Value Font Frequency for display value 3 E W Default Symbol Total 323 117 325 144 d2r 17 329 198 329 198 9 331 225 777757 E FXxazo EA 323 117 OF Cancel At the top of the dialog specify a Name for the renderer and select a Field Name for the renderer The Value Renderer dialog allows for detailed symbol and label rendering Use the Frequency for display value vertical scroll box to set the label display frequency You can manually specify value symbols and their corresponding labels by clicking in the desired symbol and label field Alternatively specify a default symbol and select the Default Symbol checkbox to apply the same symbol characteristics to each value Use the Ramp function to specify the color scheme and size for the symbols and click OK first to return to the Value renderer dialog click OK again to accept the settings Then also Make sure the Visible box 1s checked and click OK to apply the renderer Label Renderer This renderer allows you to display various labels for the se
446. rag the mouse cursor to the end point of the line e Toadd a vertex to the line click once with the left mouse button then continue drawing to the new location e As the line is drawn the distance from the start point to the end point 1 e the current mouse cursor location is displayed in a status bar at the bottom of the Map Manager window This is indicated in the sample image below Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WS 1984 Datum DES 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 30 ls eg 54 22m Line 520 06rn 535 986 4 073 623 11 5 564 e There will be two values displayed here The Seg value is the distance from the current cross hair to the previous vertex location 1 e the distance of the line segment The Line value is the total line distance from the start point including all segments e To finish the line and end the line measurement double click the left mouse button Define Cross Section Line Allows you to create a cross section line Make sure you are in one of the HGA data layers before drawing a cross section line Please see the section Defining a Cross Section Line on page 348 for more details Description of Menu Items 339 Create Cross Section Loads the cross section editor for the selected cross section line This menu item 1s activated only when a cross section line is selected highlighted There are two ways to highlight a cross section line e Choose the cross
447. raphic and Thematic Data Appendix F Online GIS Data Resources 471 472 Ministry of Energy Mines and Petroleum Resources BC http www em gov bc ca Mining Geolsurv MapPlace geoData htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage British Columbia Datum NAD83 and either BC Albers or Geographic Decimal Degrees Layer Geology Geochemistry Canadian Council on Geomatics http www geobase ca geobase en index html Data Geobase Format Shapefile and raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries DEM Geodetic Network Landsat National Road Network Ministry of Sustainable Resource Management BC http srmwww gov bc ca gis arcftp html Data Warehouse Format Coverage Raster Geographic Coverage British Columbia Layer Administrative Boundaries Hydrology Forest and more Alberta Geological Survey http www ags gov ab ca mapserver map236 download download_gis htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum Geographic NAD83 Layer Geology Alberta Community Development http www cd gov ab ca preserving parks lrm index asp Data Parks and Protected Areas Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum NAD83 Layer Parks and Protected Areas Appendices Department of Provincial Treasury http www gov pe ca gis index php3 number 77868 Data Warehouses Format Shapefile and MIF Mapinfo
448. rces ilil Cancel fo ca E gt Program Files 2 Common Files AEE E gt ODBC WA ead Onl E gt Data Sources z j List Files of Type Drives Excel Files sl Sc Network e From this dialog browse to the drive and directory that contains the source file Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing 455 e Click OK to select this file e A confirmation dialog will appear listing the Excel format and filename as shown below ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup EA ES Vata soume Hame escapo B Ose Euren me cta e Click OK to proceed Select Data Source Data Sources EE DataSourceName Passos NH e Select the DataSourceName that was created e Click OK to proceed 456 Appendices ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup RAEI Mata Source Hame Description Canes Database Help Version Workbook D 4 S ample_Stations xls Select Workbook Use Curent Directory me e Click OK again to proceed e The main Data Link Properties dialog will appear once more The connection string to the data source will now appear in the connection string field as shown below E Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Betesh Use connection string Connection string DEG D Pragram FilesiHydroGeoBasetSam Build
449. rd user credential login with the Admin user name then you must modify the Project Level Security Document PLSD to setup the desired access levels These options are available under Settings Manage User Access Levels NOTE If an administrator password is lost it cannot be retrieved You are recommended to keep the project administrator password in a safe place or to create multiple project administrators for multiple users as a backup Updating Old Projects 11 When you open a Map Project for the first time you may encounter the following error Error in getting information for project 1 The water level table is missing or doesn t meet the HGA specification This error occurs because water level and screen support has been added to the cross section editor and this table was not mapped in Templates from v 1 0 To fix this problem follow the steps below e In the main window load the Template Manager Settings Template Manager e Load the Profile Settings click on the Set Profile Settings button from the top toolbar e Select the Water Level tab e Select an appropriate table for the Water Level info default is water_level e Select an appropriate field for the Level type default is water_level_remark e Save and close the Template then re open the map project NOTE Schlumberger Water Services 1s not responsible for any direct or indirect damages however caused 1f project data has not been securely and independentl
450. reen Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If you have multiple well casings you must add an additional field e CasingID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings This allows to assign multiple screens to multiple well casings Filling Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex material Hydrogeology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING ex formation name Water Level Tables must have one fields with type DOUBLE depth_ and one field with type STRING ex comments In the Water Level tab you may also select the reference datum for measuring depth to water levels select Ground Surface Elevation or Top of Casing Pump Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ two time fields named start_ and end_ with type DATE TIME stamp one description field with type STRING ex comments NOTE The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths and not elevations As such the BHLP and Cross Section editor require that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark About the Interface 433 434 The Save as DB Template button allows you to save all changes made to a new user template A separate dialog will be displayed where the name for
451. rer provides a means of representing features of a map layer by drawing a symbol for each unique data value e The Label Renderer can be used to display labels on contour maps or to place labels on stations or any other object Select the desired type and click OK For each Renderer type there is a corresponding settings dialog which is launched automatically when you create a new renderer this can also be loaded by selecting the Edit button after selecting the renderer you wish to change 316 Chapter 8 Map Manager Graduated Renderer Graduated Renderer allows you to graphically display station data according to their specific interval of values You have the option of specifying the color scheme and or the symbol that represents the station To use the Graduated Renderer select Renderer from the Layer menu click the Add button and choose Graduated renderer from the available list The following dialogue will allow you to compose a set of symbols for different value intervals Graduated Renderer Name Enter renderer name here Field Name ELEVATION Classify hin 332 0000 Max 346 0000 J32 334 60 374 0 397 6 337 6 340 4 340 4 343 2 343 2 346 Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field based on the values from which you want to classify your data Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of v
452. return to the layout window From the Layout Setting dialog click on the Display Settings button in the Callout Box column and the following dialog will appear Callout Box Settings F f x Settings Fill Color Outline Color Transparent False gt Box Shape Round Rectan Y Tip Style Triangle gt Padding his Shadow Fase gt Shadow Color Difset X Jeo i Offset r 60 nal Ok Cancel H Help Description of Menu Items 331 332 In the Callout Box Settings dialog you can modify several display properties for the callout box The callout box is the box oval or bubble that contains the data for the selected station A preview is shown on the right side of the window in the image above The following display settings are available Fill Color set the fill color for the callout box Outline Color set the color for the outline of the callout box Transparent set the transparency select from True or False Box shape select the box shape choose from Rectangle Round Rectangle or Oval Tip style set the tip style choose from Triangle or Line Padding set the padding thickness The higher the padding value the larger the box shape will be around the tabular values in the layout Shadow display a shadow around the callout box select from True or False Shadow Color select the shadow color only used if Shadow has been set to True Offset X set the X Offset this parameter controls how far the
453. rientation gt Margins inches Left ft Right f Top hr Bottom fi C Portrait Landscape Cancel Printer Here you can define the paper size paper source page margins and page orientation Once these settings are defined click the Ok button to return to the report window Print Settings From the Report window toolbar click the Print Options button to open the Print Settings dialog shown below Chapter 5 Queries Print settings x Ignore colors Dimensions on every page T Field captions on every page J Title on every page Cancel The following options are available e Ignore Colors Show Hide report color scheme If selected the report will print in grey scale e Dimensions on every page Show Hide row and column headings on all pages after the first page e Field captions on every page Show Hide field captions on all pages after the first page e Title on every page Show Hide report title on all pages after the first page Click OK to save the settings and return to the report window Print Preview Finally you can preview the page settings for your crosstab report using Print Preview From the report window click the Print Preview button to the open the preview window shown below Crosstab Queries 163 EN Print preview 42 0088 8 TCE_and_BTEX_for_Year2000 12000 18000 25000 30000 33000 333 33333333 800 12
454. right of these controls you will find a scroll bar that is used to animate the selected display element When a color map is selected the scroll bar Position is used Working with 3D Explorer 399 to slide the color map along the selected plane through the project s site domain from one side to the other or in the case of an XY color map from the top to the bottom When an Isosurface is selected the scroll bar is used to span through different isosurface Values or shells The O percent value represents the lowest possible value for the isosurface based on the interpolated data set and will result in the largest isosurface The 100 percent value represents the highest possible value for the isosurface and will result in the smallest isosurface When you are satisfied with a view click on the Save Colormap button or Save Isosurface in the case of Isosurfaces to save this display element to the 3D Project under the Plumes node in the tree By doing so you will have access to more advanced options for the colormap or isosurface and this will enable displaying multiple colormaps and or isosurfaces Plume Browser Options Clicking the Options button will load the Plume Browser Options window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Plume Browser Humber of steps 20 Start value 5 jo Finish value 32 100 Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of steps value may be increas
455. riginal field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data 1s valid and representative of your site conditions HGA has integrated a Lab Quality Analysis component that allows users to e Define one or more lab quality assessment templates e Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples e Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples for more details see Check Duplicates Settings on page 169 e Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples for more details see Check Spiked Settings on page 170 e Compare Blank samples to method detection limits for more details see see Check Blanks Settings on page 171 e Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset e Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted e Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet This chapter is divided into the following sections to help you prepare your data and execute a QC Analysis e Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis on page 166 e Define A New Lab Quality Template on page 168 e Applying a Lab Quality Template on page 172 e Generate QC Results on page 173 165 6 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 1
456. rlapping interpretation layers When defining Geologic interpretation layers there is an option to snap the vertices of one polygon to adjacent polygons For instance if after drawing polygons and the cross section still contains gaps the gaps may be filled in by linking the vertices of the polygons using the Link Vertex option To use this option please refer to the Link Vertex section on page 361 in the Edit menu NOTE Moving a vertex of a selected polygon will also move the linked vertex of any polygons or lines that might have been linked through the Link Vertices operation Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 381 11 4 3 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing layers that define the hydrogeologic layers Aquiferl Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined Aquifer etc based on relevant data in the stations that are displayed in a cross section The hydrogelogic layers must be drawn using the polygon tool The procedure for drawing and editing these layers is identical to drawing geologic layers as explained above The position of the hydrogeologic interpretation layers may be defined based on the position of any Geological interpretations that may already be available This option is discussed below Translating Geologic Interpretations into Hydrogeologic Interpretations A hydrostratigraphic unit will generally include one or several geologic layers and the boundaries of a hydrostratigraphic
457. rmat bmp e BPW any bitmaps tagged with georeference details XSection The xsection folder contains all of the cross section information from your project In the xsection folder there 1s a subfolder for each cross section created in the project 1 e AA BB etc The subfolders contain all the shapefiles associated with the cross section X Inter The XInter subfolder contains the shapefiles from the map project for the cross section line BHLP The BHLP subfolder contains image files for any borehole log plots drawn on the cross section BHLP images are saved as EMF format Appendices 14 3 Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing The Microsoft Data Link Properties dialog appears throughout Hydro GeoAnalyst whenever an option to import data or entities or Build a connection string exists A few examples are e Importing lists in the List Editor e Importing tables in the Template Manager The following section describes briefly an example of how to Build a connection string and import an Excel file using the Data Link Properties For more details please refer to the context sensitive Help buttons in this module The example below applies to importing a list of fields in the template manager from an excel file To load the Data Link Properties window e Click on the Build Connection String button The following dialog will appear Es Data Link Properties Provider
458. rmation is not a required field for new projects The Client information is selected from a list saved in the current database to select a client from the list press the Edit button to load the Client List dialog Chapter 3 Project Manager General Business Address Contact Notes Waterloo Hydrogeologic Inc Mame prasts Hydrogeologic Inc Fhone Fax E 3 746 1798 E 3 609 5162 Logo x Xx la Es ES In this window define the client applicable to the project A list of clients may be defined in this window for use in future projects Follow the steps below Ss Add button in the lower left corner to add a new client For each Client name enter the Company name address and contact info A logo may also be defined for each client Once this is complete al Save button to save changes to a client OK to load the selected client into the project manager for this project Other functions in the Client window are summarized below e Use the El button to remove the selected client from the list e Usethe button to edit the selected client e Use the button to undo the edits for the selected client Under the Logo frame e Use the by button to load a new graphics for the logo e Use the L button to paste a file from the clipboard for the logo e Use the button to remove the selected logo file Once back in the Project Wizard the next step is to define the project location and
459. roject from the 3D View node e Through the Cross Section Editor select a cross section and choose the View 3D option from the View menu About the Interface 393 When the 3D Explorer window is loaded it should appear similar to the figure shown below Menu Display Window Bar y Hyiiredonn Amay Hi Feplorer gt FS Program Piles Anat Projects ema Sroject VADHGAJO ele x De dt View Getting Hele Toolbar pee ct RSA SES wwii JN E Son 7 EA Display Tree Display Settings Navigation Panel The 3D Explorer interface consists of the following components e Display Window Displays the 3D image of the selected elements e Menu bar Provides menu commands for most of the functions e Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for some functions e Display Tree A tree structured list of the available project elements e Display Settings Displays settings associated with each element e Navigation Panel Contains a set of navigation tools to control the position and orientation of the 3D image and adjust the light source location 12 2 Working with 3D Explorer 12 2 1 Positioning the Panels The Display Tree Panel and the Navigation Panel are both dockable panels which means they can be moved and or docked to another location on the interface or they 394 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer can be left as floating panels on your Windows desktop i e not docked to any location
460. rom a HGA project The Report Editor included with the HGA package is used to create professional reports containing data and or 2D and 3D views you have generated with your projects Reports can be printed or exported to conventional formats RTF PDF HTML etc The Report Editor provides the following features e Create and save Report Layout Templates e Create and Manage Reports e Import Reports e Design and Preview Reports e Save Export and Print Reports In addition the Report Editor e Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment e Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions e Provides Barcode control e Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks For more details please refer to Chapter 8 The Report Editor 9 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter provides the tools for designing borehole logs plots for your station data The number of columns and their order of display 1s flexible and can be modified in an existing borehole log Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst plot template or a brand new template can be created Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design template Once the design 1s acceptable a borehole log report can be generated through the use of the Report Editor for one or multiple boreholes Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology inf
461. rom the tree view as well as from the file 8 2 3 Saving a Report A report can be saved at any time by clicking on the Save icon on the runtime report designer An existing report will be saved using the same file name When saving new reports your will be prompted for a file name Saving a Report As To save a report with a different name and or as a report template click on PJ Save As icon on the Report Designer s toolbar You will be prompted for a file name and type The report or report template will be saved to the Reports sub folder of the folder storing your project related information The report or report template will also be saved in the project s database and will be made available in the appropriate node in the project browser The report or template can be deleted from the project browser if you choose not to store it in the database 8 2 4 Exporting generated reports Once a report has been generated 1t can be exported to various formats as well as being saved in the Report Editor s native format The native format stores reports with an 230 Chapter 8 The Report Editor RTF file extension To export a report click on the A Export Report icon on the toolbar A dialog similar to that shown in the figure below will be displayed Report Export Select the export file Format options Export Format Portable Document Format PDF Export Options Filename Acrobat Version fi
462. round color and page background color Under the series frame you can set the order of the plots to have one plot above below the other Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Settings xj E ES BHLP Plot Are ue Scale General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend E Well Construction Appearance ES Desc ES Grain Size Show Grid Lines Color J E ES Plot t 56 as Primary Secondary e Show Color F Auto Show Labels Font Min E38 Logarithm hian 1E38 Interval o Apply OF Cancel In the Horizontal Axis tab shown above you can modify the axis appearance and scale settings For both the Primary and Secondary Scales there are settings for Normal or Log as well as showing the gridlines and defining the color Finally you can define the axis range for each scale accept the default Auto option in which case the data min and max will be read and used as the min and max for the axis Or de select this option and enter user defined Min Max and Interval values BHLP Settings y x Plot Are General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearanc MT Show Grid Lines Color J Left Right W Show Color EI e Show Labels Font EI Label Direction Horizontal Apply OF Cancel In the Vertical Axis tab shown above you can modify the appearance settings of the vertical axis For both the Left and Right axis axis labels can be enabled disabled by sel
463. rpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real minimum value of interpolated data Real maximum value of interpolated data Minimum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Min Value option is not selected by the user Maximum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Max Value option is not selected by the user The Points per block along X Points per block along Y and Points per block along Z values allow the user to choose Block Kriging used for interpolation as compared to Point Kriging Block Kriging is based on the premise that since Kriging is a linear algorithm direct estimation of the block average is possible for user defined blocks The default values for these parameters are 1 and in this case the default method is Point Kriging If Block Kriging is being used the user needs to enter the Min points for block Kriging and Max points for block Kriging The Octant Search option is an exhaustive search option available to make sure that data are taken on all sides of the point being estimated and is especially recommended for 3D data If the user specifies Max points per octant to be greater than 0 an Octant Search is employed to find the neighborhood of points for interpolation Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 463 464 The Max radius and
464. rresponding thematic map will also be hidden The Bar Chart is created in much the similar way Choose Bar Chart from the Layer Create Thematic Map menu and choose which fields you wish to map The following dialogue will allow you to choose colors for the bars representing different fields as well as the max height and width of the bars ELEVATION Height TOC Paints 30 width 2d Points Preview Back OF Cancel Modify Thematic Map Provides options for modifying the properties of an existing Pie or Bar chart Thematic Map Ed se _ y W Bar Chart Delete Cancel Select the map you wish to edit by clicking on the check box beside the name you 322 Chapter 8 Map Manager entered for that map and click Modify The same Bar Chart dialogue will appear allowing you to go through the procedure again and change various aspects of the chart Create Contours Provides options for creating contours with data from a selected field from the selected points layer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Data to be Contoured Interpolator Settings Choose Field Interpolation Method Min Value 321 09 Data Min 321 09 Natural Neighbours ki Advanced Settings Max Value 340 49 Data Max 340 49 Contour Type V Contour Line Name Settings I Color Shade Name Setting i Zebra Name setma M Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Dom
465. rt digitizing the polygon in the desired direction e Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button e Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the following dialog will appear Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 379 Geology Layer Pattern o a Name Description Sand Pattern Ok Cancel 53 Help e In the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you may select it from the list instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown below Fill Patterns Please choose a pattern zm Dolomite OF Cancel e Select a pattern then click OK Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re
466. runtime Report Designer adjusts the scale that is associated with that specific view of your map project As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the project browser once it is saved 8 1 3 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section 228 Follow the directions below to create a report containing one cross section created in the Cross Section Editor e Start the Cross Section Editor and open a Cross Section e Show hide the desired interpretation layers in the cross section all visible layers will appear in the report e Press the Print button 4 from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu e The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The report editor allows you to either create a new report for the current cross section or add it to an existing one If you choose to add the current cross section to an existing report the report editor adds the new cross section to the report As such multiple cross sections can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current cross section to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each cross section 1s created with its associated legends and key map indicating the Chapter 8 The Report Editor cross section location in plan view The cross section can
467. rver from the Server list at the top of the dialog The list will display all computers on the LAN that Using the Project Manager 97 98 Ss ee Se have MS SQL Server 2005 Express support If the current machine is not networked then the list will display the name for the current computer provided the WHI SQL Express instance is installed 2 Enter information to log on to the server If the selected server requires security validation enter the windows login information user name and password 3 Select the database on the server If it is preferred to create a new database then leave this field blank 4 Press the Test Connection button in the lower corner of this dialog to ensure that a valid connection to this Server exists The additional tabs in the Data Link Properties window include Advanced includes default network settings All view and edit all OLE DB initialization properties available for the OLE DB provider Properties can vary depending on the selected OLE DB provider For more details press the Help button in the Data Link Properties dialog to view an on line help for this component ee Se Click OK once the Data Link settings have been defined to return to the Project Wizard The Connection String will now appear in the Database Environment window An example is shown below Project Wizard il E Step 1 Set Database Environment C Select Server and Database The Project Ma
468. ry_Results stale E epth Paint W Field Props Water Level Monitoring Point MV Screen_ID E Examination Event IV date IV time Table relationships Y depth_to_water_level IV Dry_indicator_Yes_No MV Comments IV Mining Exploration V Geophysics IV Well History User Category H A Primary key Foreign key screen_id station screen_id station station station pa settings ame ater Leve x40b 37 i AE Last Change 07 27 2004 2 04 42 PM E mE In this example the Water Level table is child to the screen and station tables NOTE The Template Manager does not allow changing the units for a primary key field If this is necessary you must first break the table relationship 13 3 2 Modifying Fields and View Settings For any selected table the Template Manager provides the necessary interface to specify the field properties An interface similar to that shown below is displayed whenever a field is selected in the database browser 442 Chapter 5 Template Manager Template Editor sample a E 10 x Environmental y x Tes ad m Use as project default Database structure Field Settings Description a Description a M Database Settings 3 Geologic Description W Lithology Field name IV from soil_type F Donot allow duplicat
469. s User Access Level Management 85 e Select Groups from the tree view in the main UALM window e Click on the Add button to add a new Group or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for a selected Group When there is no project loaded the Group Properties dialog for Application Level objects will appear Group Properties Name Test Description Enter description here Creation Date 2005 11 21 09 40 37 Privileges Database I Project User Access Level OF Cancel When a project is open the Group Properties dialog for Project Level objects will be displayed as shown below 86 Chapter 3 Project Manager Group Properties Mame Sample Description Creation Date 20054 1 21 11 06 50 Privileges ovess eeoue vine ooe reso atom fe E 30 View D D Backup Database Borehole Logs DO Charts D Cross Sections D Crosstab D Data Export Data Import Environmental List Editor Manual Data Entry Maps Maternal Specificatt Project Properties Quality Control Queres Reporte Restore Database Template Manager Saas one OF Cancel The Name and Description for the Group can be defined by the administrator the Creation Date is a read only field that is filled automatically by HGA the time stamp will be read from the computer s CPU at the time of creating the group The Privileges to the various HGA objects are described further below
470. s Queries Read Write Delete and Execute Quality Control 3D Explorer Read Write and Delete Borehole logs Time Series Plots Cross Sections Cross Tab Queries List Editor Map Manager Material Specifications Editor Reports Project Properties Read and Write When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the Group and close the dialog 3 1 5 User Properties The UALM allows the administrator to add and edit the properties for the various Users in the project To load these settings 90 Chapter 3 Project Manager e From the main UALM window select one user under the Users node in the tree view e Click on the P Add button to add a new User or e Click on the Edit button to edit the properties for the selected User The following User Properties dialog will appear User Mame First Hame Last Name Description E mail Phone Password Confirm Password Belonging to Groups C Restricted Users lv Administrators OF Cancel Define the User personal and contact information including User name First Name Last Name Description EMail Phone Password and Confirm Password Belonging to Groups Select the User groups to which the User should belong When you are finished click OK to save the settings for the user and close the dialog HINT Be sure to keep your password in a safe place as it will be needed each time the project is accessed Set Passwords The
471. s The Map node lists all map projects that are available created for the current HGA project Double clicking on a map project under this node loads the Map Manager 1f not already loaded and opens the selected map project into the Map Manager Cross Sections The Cross Sections node lists all cross sectional views created using the Cross Section Editor Double clicking on a cross section launches the Cross Section Editor and loads the selected cross section Reports The Reporting component included with HGA allows you to create as many reports as needed for your project and save the layouts for future report generation All the reports created for a selected project will be listed under the Reports node Double clicking on any of these report layouts will open a report template or a saved report By default the report will be displayed in print preview mode however it is a simple task to activate the report designer in order to modify the report layout See Chapter 11 for more details 3D Views The 3D Views node contains a list of available 3D views that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a 3D view loads the selected view into the HGA 3D Explorer Borehole Logs The Borehole Logs node contains a list of all Borehole Log Plot BHLP templates that have been created and saved for your project Double clicking on a Borehole Log loads the selected template into the borehole log plotter Plots The P
472. s 131 Data Query Tab 15 147 Data to Display 269 Database Build Connection String 96 Server Login 94 Template 100 DataField 208 DateStamp 443 DateTimeStamp 443 Depth Interval 438 Depth Interval Time 438 Depth Point 438 Depth Point Time 439 DepthEntities 257 Detection Limit 184 Display Data 327 Display on Map 54 Double 443 Duplex 221 E Expand All 52 Export Data Data Transfer System DTS 125 Export Depth 360 Export Time Series Plot 196 F Filter by Value 53 Find 50 Fit width to page 252 Foreground Color 369 Frames per second 401 G Geologic Layer Interpretations 379 Georeference point 308 Georeferencing 307 Geotransformation 104 Global 438 Global Time 438 Graduated Color 185 Graduated Renderer 316 317 Graphical User Interface 13 Graticule 347 Grid columns 222 Grid rows 222 Gridded Data Create 326 Group Control 293 Group Layers 294 H Highlighting 171 Horizontal slices 422 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations 382 i IAH 104 IDEntity 266 2 Image 443 Image Entity 257 Import Data Transfer System DTS 109 Import Data Connection String 114 Data Requirements 116 Data Source 112 Data Transfer Package DTP 111 Data Validation 123 Field Mapping 115 Projection Settings 121 Unit Conversion 119 Installation 8 Interpolation Settings 323 Interpretation Results table 390 Intersecting Layers 370 Invert Selection 54 Isoline Maps 415 Isolines 409 Isosurfaces 411 L Lab Quality Analysis
473. s 367 Display Settings 410 Index Post 53 Primary Key 435 Print Scale Factor 253 Printer Settings 221 Profile Settings 432 Project Open 33 Project Browser 20 51 Project Level Security Document PLSD Export 92 General 84 Project Management 83 Project Properties 101 Pumping Test Analysis 63 Q Quality Codes 166 Quality Control General 165 Queries Advanced Options 140 Editing 147 Examples 132 Export 149 General 129 Group By 141 Print 149 Save 147 Types 131 Query Builder Interface Description 129 R Raster Image Import 307 Record Add 52 Delete 53 Duplicate 53 Refresh All 52 Report Editor General 199 Interface 199 Preview Window 216 Printing Limitations 222 Save 219 Toolbar 201 Report Explorer 212 Report Properties Toolbox 213 Report Settings 220 Report Template 232 Reports Import 233 Restore Database 62 Restrict Within Domain 324 Rotating 396 S Scale Factor 300 359 Scale Symbology 300 360 ScaleEntities 255 Scene configuration 425 Select All 54 Select Map Region 309 Semitransparent 408 Series Grouping 183 Set Features 362 Set Field Precision 306 320 Shapefile 302 Shapefiles Import 307 Show All 54 Snapping Vertices 386 Soil Classification Settings 103 Sort Column Ascending 34 Descending 54 Standard 184 Station Data Tab 15 Station Group Queries 132 Station Groups General 26 Station Types 24 Boreholes 24 Observation Monitoring Wells 24 Pumping Wells 24 Surface Water Observation Point 25
474. s as needed Creating a Group Layer To create a Layer Group follow the steps below e Right click anywhere within the Layer Manager panel e From the pop up menu select Create Layer Group New Layer Group X Please enter the name for new layer group Cancel e Enter a name for the layer group e Click Ok The new layer group will now appear in the Layer Manager panel Chapter 8 Map Manager Adding Layers to a Group To add a layer to a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer onto the layer group Removing Layers from a Group To remove a layer from a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer out of the layer group Removing Layer Groups To remove a layer group follow the steps below e Right click on the desired layer group e From the pop up menu select Delete e The component layers will ungroup and return to the root of the layer list All layer types including layer groups can be moved up and down within the Layer Manager panel by simply dragging and dropping the layer into a new position 10 1 1 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar in the Map Manager provides access to most of the same features available in the Main Menu Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance Ne
475. s created based on a selected database template a copy of the database template will be added to the database for use as a user template As such the first time 13 4 2 Creating a copy of the current template the Template Manager is opened it will only display this one user template Managing Templates As discussed earlier in this chapter multiple user templates can be created from this copy All users have the ability to make a copy of this template modify and save view settings in this newly created user template To create a copy of the current template select the E Copy Template As button at the top of the window A dialog will appear prompting for a template name and description Once a name is provided for the new template all changes will be saved to this template 13 4 3 Saving a template as default template Saving a template as the default template makes that user template the default for all users When Hydro GeoAnalyst opens your project 1t will utilize this default template for view settings To set the template as default select the Use as Project Default option at the top of the window 13 4 4 Exporting the current template as a Database template 446 Any user template can also be exported to a database template This feature allows you to modify the database schema and save it for future use To export the selected user template to a database template click on the Save as a database template
476. s it appears on the screen by a factor displayed in the Current width drop down menu Using this factor you can make the wells thinner or thicker on the cross sectional display Change Vertical Axis This option allows you to extend the vertical range of the elevation axis When this option is selected the following dialog will display 364 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor Set Vertical Axis i X Please set vertical axis Bottorn 216 0036 m DK Cancel H Help Specify a Top value and a Bottom value Click Ok to accept the new values Change Vertical Exaggeration This option allows you to change the vertical exaggeration of the current cross section The vertical exaggeration is simply the ratio of the vertical scale to the horizontal scale Set Yertical Exaggeration X Pleaze input the vertical exaggeration r OK Cancel H Help Specify a new vertical exaggeration and click the Ok button The cross section will then be regenerated to reflect the new vertical exaggeration Copy Window Provides an option for copying the current cross section window to the Windows clipboard The window may then be pasted into a supporting application such as a document or image editor or slide presentation 11 2 3 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Cross Section Window Full Extent This menu item will result in zooming out the cross section window to its origi
477. se display elements contains further settings as described below IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer 1f they have been created in a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude In order to display cross sections in 3D Explorer they must be created in a map project that uses a projected coordinate system e g UTM 420 Chapter 10 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Cross Section Settings The Cross Section contains the name as defined in the 8 Cross Section Editor The entire cross section may be set to TIE Taek Visible or hidden from view oE Aris al A Site maps The Label Properties allow you to modify the following Fon a E Surfaces settings E E1 Cross Sections Data ff Stations e Visible turns cross section labels on off a pe eae e Text Color changes text color ie E e Text Size changes text size e Box Visible turns the outline box on off AA Mame ES E i E W Box Depth changes the thickness of the label Late a e Box Color changes the label background color r mn E E ac E 2 06 E Bow Color U E ee Sets the lahel attributes Stations Display Settings Under the Stations node there will be a list of the Hydro x GeoAnalyst stations which are involved in the selected cross SEs F section Individual stations may be selected and set to EAE Stations Visible or hidden a g Station label properties can be modified in the
478. select the desired coordinate units from the Units combo box Note If Local is selected the project coordinate system cannot be changed once the project is created Furthermore all imported spatial data must already be expressed in local coordinates as HGA does support conversions from projected geographic coordinates systems to local systems Depending on the projection type that you select you may also be required to select an appropriate Geotransformation for your project If required the following dialog will display 104 Chapter 3 Project Manager Please select area a l _ Of x Configure Geotransformation A geotransformation will oca between the following coordinate systems NAD_1 927 _UTM_Zone_17N 6cs_WGs_1 984 Please select the area that best describes the data extent Grand Cayman Jamaica Turks Islands Alberta British Columbia Manitoba Newfoundland Nova Scotia Quebec New Brunswick Simply select the area that best represents the spatial extent of your geographic data from the list and then click the Ok button Note You will not be able to create the project until you have selected an area For more details on defining geotransformation settings please refer to Appendix H Configuring Geotransformation Settings on page 476 Once you have specified the required settings you will see that the Finish button at the bottom of the window will become active This indicates that you have ent
479. selected the dialog shown below will appear Description of Menu Items 367 368 Options m Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Snapping Butte Well Snapping Buffer fio Pixels Boundary Snapping Buffer 5 Pixels Vertex Snapping Buffer E El Pixels Cancel E Help Editor Tab In this tab there are options for specifying the snapping buffers for the selected cross section and its elements The Snapping Buffers are specified in pixels The buffer values determine the distance to which lines and vertices will snap i e join to the nearest line or vertex If a low value for the Snapping Buffer is specified the mouse cursor must be very close to a vertex or line in order for snapping to occur If a high value for the Snapping Buffer is specified then snapping will occur at a distance further away from the destination vertex or line Snapping allows for exact placement of vertices and eliminates the need for repetitive use of zooming in to specific locations If the snapping is used the vertices will be connected but not linked at the desired locations Well Snapping Buffer The default Well Snapping Buffer is 10 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 10 pixels of another well borehole then the borehole will be highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this station s lithologic interval the line will be automatically sna
480. ser under the Reports Queries node Feel free to modify additional properties of the chart by returning to the Report Designer right clicking on the chart control and selecting the Properties option from the menu In the Chart properties you may modify axis symbol and line properties in addition to numerous other features An example is shown below with some of the chart properties enhanced An example of the modified chart is displayed below Report query report_0 E laj x 603212 m1 JAS 00 A OE 1 oo oe x ENE Contents TVOC Concentrations at Monitoring Wells name sample date 2500 w23 nse o 20 4 TVOC ugh Mar 1996 May 1996 Jul 1996 Creating Reports with Charts 245 This concludes Chapter 11 246 Chapter 8 The Report Editor Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation e Description of the geologic formation e The depth and or elevation of each layer e Well construction details casing screens annular fill e Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In
481. sing e Screen e Filling e Hydrogeology e Water Levels e Pump For each category provide the table and the field that stores the patterns to be used in all the graphical displays For example in the Lithology tab select a table which contains the Lithology information for your project then select a field from this table which contains the Soil Description information The information provided in this window will be used when displaying profile diagrams in Hydro GeoAnalyst The Chapter 5 Template Manager geological data and the corresponding patterns will also be displayed in the cross section editor and in the 3D Explorer Only tables with the following parameters can be displayed in this dialog Lithology Tables must have two fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ and one field with type STRING soil_type Drilling Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING method Casing Tables must have three fields with type DOUBLE from_ to_ diam_ and one field with type STRING ex material If it s desired to have multiple well casings or nested piezometers you must also define two additional fields e Casing ID field type LONG used to distinguish different well casings e Parent ID field type LONG required only if a well casing exists within a parent casing if so for the selected well casing set the ParentID equal to the CasingID of the parent casing Sc
482. sor overtop of a station will display the information View 3D button loads selected cross section s into 3D Explorer View BHLP button loads a BHLP for the selected station 357 11 2 Description of Menu Items 11 2 1 File Save This menu item will save all current edits for the cross section to the current cross section project file V CP Close Closes the currently open cross section Export Model Layers This option allows you to export the model layer lines for all cross sections to XYZ text file format These files can in turn be used to define layer elevations in groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW When this option is selected the following dialog will appear Export Model Layers 3 x Select Model Layers Name Export as Topography Topography Top L2 Top L2 Top L3 Top L3 Top L4 Top L4 Top L5 Top L5 Bot L6 Bot L6 OOOO Select Cross Sections Select All Cross Section Cancel EJ Help In this dialog select the model layers you wish to import Each model layer will be exported as a separate file for each file you may define the name under the Export As column Next select which cross sections should be considered in the export Click the Create 358 Chapter 9 Cross Section Editor button to generate the files The files will be generated in the Model sub folder of the Project folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Pr
483. sources e Text CSV TXT ASC TAB e MS Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or e Any OLE DB compliant database such as a MS Access Database MDB For more details on how to import data using the DTS please refer to Chapter 6 The Data Transfer System Station Data This option allows for importing data from an LAS Log ASCII Standard file a standard format introduced by the Canadian Well Logging Society in 1989 The LAS file contains two types of sections e Well Information Section data related to the station location driller etc e Parameter Curve Information Sections descriptive and or measured data for one or more downhole parameters When importing the LAS file in HGA the following options are available Hydro GeoAnalyst Main Menu Bar 35 36 e Import the Well Sections and Parameter Curve sections use this option if you want to import a new station and one or more measured parameters for this station A new station will be added to the database using station details name co ordinates etc in the LAS file If the station already exists in HGA you will be prompted to overwrite the details using those in the LAS source In addition data from one or more parameters Parameter Sections may be imported to one or more tables in your database e Import only Parameter sections use this option if this station already exists in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find
484. splay on Map menu option To load the Data Query results grid into the Report Manager see section 5 7 on page 149 below The data displayed in the grid may be exported to an external file or to the Report Manager Right mouse click on the grid and select Export Grid or use the menu command Project Export Grid and the following dialog will appear Save As EJ EI Save in E Borehole gt c File name eholes_G eologic_ Description _ Hydrogeology Cancel Select the appropriate file format and enter a file name then press Save 5 7 Printing Query Results Using the SWS Report Editor you may insert Query results into a report template for fast and easy printing To send the query results to the report editor e Select Project Report from the main menu or e Click on the print button y on the toolbar In the Reporting component the query may be saved or printed Exporting Query Results 149 For more information please refer to Chapter 8 The Report Editor 150 Chapter 5 Queries 5 8 Crosstab Queries 5 8 1 Introduction Crosstab queries are special types of queries that allow you to store your data in a normalized manner in your database but generate and display pivoted denormalized outputs from that data In other words crosstab queries let you format existing data queries by rotating rows to columns to see different summaries of the source data for easier analysis and reporting Suppose
485. st characters are sorted from A to Z while numbers are sorted from to 9 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function Sort Descending If chosen this option will sort records in the selected column from highest to lowest characters are sorted from Z to A while numbers are sorted from 9 to 1 The 4 button in the toolbar performs the same function Display on Map This menu item allows you to create a GIS map layer for the data that is being displayed in a grid This data could be a list of stations in the Station List grid or the result of a well formed query that contains sufficient information If a GIS layer is created using selected stations from any station group elevation and top of casings will be added to the layer Any query that has an ID station id x and y coordinates for the stations in addition to any number of columns displaying desired data can be displayed on a map Such queries should be created using the Query Builder with the Map Ready option selected Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst The GIS layer will be created with the same name as the station group or the query If there 1s an existing layer with the same name you will be prompted to overwrite the existing layer with the new data refresh the layer or cancel the operation When displaying stations from the Stations List grid you have the option of selecting one or more stations to be displayed on the map If no records are selected
486. st Test Relative Percent Difference lt 20 Check Duplicates Coefficient of Yariation lt 10 CJ Check Spikes la O Check Blanks Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than z0 Coefficient of variation less than 10 Highlighting Font i UU _ Background Color _ Background Color Border Color Color Add Remove Help Apply OF Cancel re The Template Description field is filled in by default with a verbal description of the Settings used for the template You can modify the Template Description with any text you would like to use by simply typing over the existing text Each Check type has its own Settings which can be adjusted by clicking on the Check type to highlight it The Settings will then appear to the right Settings for each Check type are described in the following sections 6 2 1 Check Duplicates Settings A field duplicate is a QC sample which is used to determine the precision associated with all or part of the sample collection and measurement process Field duplicates are two independent samples which are collected as nearly as possible from the same point in space and time The two field duplicate samples are collected from the same source using the same type of sampling equipment Ideally analyte concentrations in the duplicate sample should be identical or very close to the original sample to which it is being compared The following settings are available
487. st column enter a Name for the list item If necessary define a Picture for the list item Click in the Picture column and a dialog will appear with options to load the desired graphics for the list item Click in the Check box under the Include column in order to make this list item available to HGA List items can be turned on off as desired in order to Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst limit the amount of items displayed in HGA For example a list of chemical names only certain groups of chemicals may be needed at times In those circumstances the list can be shortened by turning off all unnecessary groups of chemicals e Enter a Description for the list item if necessary e Repeat these steps to add additional list items until the desired list is created e Click the button to save the list e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 for more details Generating Lists List items may also be generated using existing data The data could be an existing value in the current database for the selected field or could be a list from an external source To extract all existing unique entries from the current database for the selected field e Using the procedure described above load the List Editor and select the appropriate table and field for the list e Click on the B
488. stem From the Import DXF dialog click on the Transform button This will launch the Map Georeference window as shown below 312 Chapter 8 Map Manager Georeference CAD Georeferz e a UN _ aj xj al k Georeference Paint 1 10 000 m 1 10 000 m Se 1000 000 m 2 1000 000 m Distance Between Points f 414 214 rn Map Layer Extent 1 121 637 m TT 851 455 m 21112743 mi Ye 155 279 im X Cancel Transformation 1s performed using two points on the DXF file with known coordinates The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid transformations Follow the procedure below to import a DXF file and use the coordinate Transformation option To set the georeference point click the Georeference button e Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y1 world coordinates of the selected location a 5351 22 7 481 2839 lt p 220 Yp 393 OF Cancel e Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click the Georeference button again Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Description of Menu Items 313 e Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point e Click OK The coordinates will be entered into the corresponding Georeference fields on the right hand side of the window Once this is complete click OK to continue an
489. stem for the source a This step allows you to specify Projector Type Projection the coordinate system used for e es the station in the date source f UTM Stabe planar MAD 1983 UTH Zone 17H Select the appropriate Geographic C Others Unik hleter projection type Select the appropriate projection dabun After import all coordinates wall be converted to WaS 1984 for intemal use Next gt Cancel H Help If the data to be imported contains the Well Section then some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table Projection Settings Define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HGA project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HGA is provided in Chapter 4 See Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location on page 101 NOTE It is important to know and select the correct projection system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates The LAS file allows to specify a place holder for NULL values common examples are 999 0000 Wherever this value is detected in the source HGA will insert NULL in the destination according to the field
490. subsurface data Geological and hydrogeological interpretations as well as interpretations geared About Hydro GeoAnalyst 5 towards creating model layers can be created using the cross section module All model interpretations can be exported for use as modeling layers in groundwater modeling software packages including Schlumberger Water Services Visual MODFLOW The Cross Section editor is seamlessly integrated with the HGA 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram view 3D Subsurface Visualization with 3D Explorer Once cross sectional views of the data are created and preliminary interpretations made 3D Explorer can be used to create fence diagrams containing one or more of those cross sections The 3D Explorer provides a unique perspective of the entire site through its ability to display multiple cross sections simultaneously this perspective 1s not possible when viewing individual 2D cross sections The 3D Explorer in addition to displaying fence diagrams can also be used to display surfaces for each layer involved in the interpretation For example a surface depicting static groundwater elevations over the site can be created and displayed in the 3D Explorer Use the 3D Explorer to import basemaps or shapefiles containing any type of data and relate this to the cross section interpretations For example a contour map or DXF site map may be draped or overlain on top of mult
491. t e Select the General list option from the Get values from list combo box e Click on the Edit List button This will display the List Editor The List Editor provides the tools for populating a list of potential values for the selected field For more details please see Chapter 2 List Editor e Select the Allow values only from list option to strictly limit the values for the selected field to those in the list If this option 1s not selected then 1t will be possible to either pick a value from a list or manually enter a new one for this field NOTE Recall that if a field is defined as a foreign key a pick list will automatically be created for it based on values in the primary key in the parent table As such any list created following the steps outlined in this section will be overridden Linked Fields The Properties of linked fields can be modified through an interface provided in the Template Manager Clicking any of the fields in the Linked Fields set activates an interface similar to the one shown in the following figure 444 Chapter 5 Template Manager As with other standard fields there 1s a number of view settings that can be modified by all users These settings include Template Editor sample Environmental ha Database structure H Description a Geologic Description B V Lithology V from V to Y Description V soil_type IV Pattern IV Consistency IV Structur
492. t can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain This window can be accessed by clicking on the Properties icon on the toolbar Report Designer Window 213 214 Property Toolbox EXESTR_ MUNICIPIO T alH Custom Mame Alignment BackColor Backstyle Cangrow CanShrink ClassMame DataField Font Fore Color height HyperLink left MultiLine EXESTR_ MUNICIPIO 0 ddT LePt 0 ddBkTranspare True False Normal STR_MUNICIPIOC Arial _ 205 z5 True OutputPorrmat Style Summary Distir SumimaryFunc O ddSFSurn Summary Grou SummaryRunr 0 dd5R Mone SummaryType 0 ddSMNone Tag text STR_MUNICIPIOC top T5 E E Custom This window serves to access the properties of the controls that are present on the report and it contains an orderly list with the names and values of the properties of the objects in the report presented in the first and second column respectively A combo box with the list of objects whose properties can be edited is provided in the upper part of the window Additional information for the selected property 1s provided at the bottom of this window Designer Advanced Controls and Settings Types of Controls The runtime Report Designer allows you to add several types of controls to your reports These controls range from those that are currently shown on the toolbar to all controls that are present on your com
493. t uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Display one or more water quality standard values as a line or symbol for quick detection of samples that exceed the standards Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 177 7 1 About the Interface Once you have created and selected a data query you may create a plot with the data set The plot component may be launched from HGA in several ways e To create a new Plot Page Design right click on the Plots node on the Project Browser and select New from the pop up menu e Existing plots can be opened from the Plots node in the Project Browser by either double clicking on the desired plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option NOTE A data query containing the required fields see below must be selected in order to launch the plots mode from the HGA main interface A typical plot window 1s shown in the following figure Plot P
494. t name appears in the print spooler and can be used to easily identify the report MaxPages Sets or returns the maximum number of pages ActiveReports will process Once the number of maximum pages is reached ActiveReports will stop processing the report This property can be used to limit the number of output pages when running large reports and distributing the results over a slow connection WaterMark Adds a specified image to the report s background The watermark image can be positioned sized aligned and placed on specified pages by using the other watermark properties Report Designer Window 211 8 2 3 Using the Report Designer 212 Report Explorer The Report Explorer as shown in the figure below allows you to browse through the controls of the active report and facilitates selecting controls for further editing The Report Explorer windows can be accessed by clicking on the Explorer icon f on the toolbar dy Station ID B Detail ood deRptData The explorer provides quick access for selection of controls on the report Selecting a control in the Report Explorer activates the corresponding control on the report This makes the control ready to be formatted or moved to another location The explorer lists at least three nodes under the MainReport node namely e PageHeader refers to the page header for the current report e Detail refers to the section that hosts the details of the report e PageFooter r
495. t the desired file Click Open Click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step Build a Connection String To build a connection string select the radio button beside the Build Connection String option then click on the bl Build Connection String button to load the following dialog E Data Link Properties E x Prowider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE OB Providerfs ESRI GeoDatabase OLE DB Provider Microsoft SAM 1 1 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DE Provider Microsoft OLE OB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Jee OLE LE io f r Internet AS Hrs OLE DE z for OLA ps Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE DB Provider MSDataShape OLE DE Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS OF Cancel Help 114 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System The Data Link Properties dialog box is the standard Windows system interface for configuring connection strings to data sources This dialog box exposes all of the properties that the selected OLE DB provider supports The Data Link Properties dialog box contains four tabs Provider Connection Advanced and All The settings available on the latter three ta
496. ta source o Specify import file name Ch Note Build a connection string The Data Transfer System DTS allows you a to import data from external sources such as Z ze LS ear i ase eee i AAA z 3 text files excel spreadsheets MS Access 3 and other databases through a three to Data source details four step process In this first step Create or select a DTS package Select modify the data source either by specifying a file name or building a connection string 4 DTS package stores all the steps followed during the data transfer and can be used for subsequent operations Next Cancel i In most cases the DTS Import procedure will include four steps e Data Source Specify the source file and package options e Data Mapping Map source fields to destination fields e Station Related Settings Specify projection system and units for the new stations being imported e Data Validation Validate the source data and provides an error analysis report Each step will appear in a new window After specifying the required settings in each step click the Next gt button in the bottom corner to proceed The Next gt button is activated only after the required information has been defined in the current window The following few sections present a detailed description of each window of the DTS 110 Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System 4 1 Importing Data using the DTS The DTS allows importing
497. tabase Fonts Charset Default ANSI Reports Comment Module Text JV Strip sourcecode typedecls handler prefixes Options V Convert MSGraph Chart Controls JV Use ADO For Data Control instead of DAO Convert Finish Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Click on the Next button to start converting the report to the Report Editor s native format A dialog will appear displaying the progress of the report conversion Once conversion is completed the dialog displays the summary report as shown in the following figure 234 Chapter 8 The Report Editor la Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Start eK Starting conversion Hee Conversion complete The Following report were converted from database JosimarlVisual Pocos Sistemas Visual Pocos ProjectXSectionsample mdb to WHI Report gt Relationships For CrosSection Finish Click the Finish button and the converted report will be displayed in the runtime designer Once all desired modifications are done to the report it can be saved using the procedure discussed earlier The final report can be visualized by clicking on the Report Preview on the toolbar 8 5 Creating Reports with Charts Various types of charts can be added to your report using the chart control To add a chart to a report click on the Chart icon on the toolbar and place
498. tabase MS Access SQL Server For more details please refer to Chapter 4 The Data Transfer System 4 Query Builder The Query Builder provides the tools for creating and managing station groups and simple or advanced data queries Within a HGA project 1t may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering management and creating customized charts maps cross sections and reports The Query Builder provides the tools for such tasks A few examples of queries are provided below e Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 e Select wells with discharge over 250 gpm e Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet and penetrating a sandy gravel layer e Select boreholes with the overburden thickness more than 10 m The Query Builder is capable of creating two types of queries e Station Group Queries Used to sort HGA stations into logical groups e Data Queries Used for creating specialized reports or map layers 78 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst For more details please refer to Chapter 5 Queries 5 Map Manager The Map Manager is an easy to use GIS tool for mapping HGA station data The mapping component associated with HGA 1s designed to provide a tool for overlaying and displaying site maps so that station data may be related to surficial base map features The Map Manager allows site maps to be imported from various formats including DXF BMP JPF GIF and ESRI Shape SHP
499. table and fields e g required fields ID X Y Elevation etc may not be deleted The Add Linked Fields button is activated whenever a field is selected in the Database Browser If this option is selected the dialog shown below will be displayed requesting the user to provide the fields that should be linked Chapter 5 Template Manager Select desired set of fields E X f Complete set of fields Short set of fields Consists of three required fields Name Value Unit field OF Cancel EJ Help The concept of linked fields 1s introduced in Hydro GeoAnalyst in order to enhance data integrity If two or three fields are linked together Hydro GeoAnalyst tracks changes made to values under one field and makes appropriate changes to all other linked fields as appropriate Currently a maximum of three fields can be linked together Linking three fields may be useful in storing data such as chemistry results e g chemical names result values and result units If such fields are linked you may change the result unit for any record and automatically see the result converted to the new unit This avoids the problem of changing result units without converting the result values to the appropriate unit At times 1t may be necessary to link only two fields For example when storing depth related data with variable units an additional field to store the unit for each record is required In those circumsta
500. tated as OW 1 Similarly if data for all stations except OW 1 are to be imported the criteria should be provided as lt gt OW 1 or OW 1 NOTE For the equals operator you must enter a double equal sign with no spaces ie The DTS understands the syntax described in the following table Bere pow CS Rules Spaces are allowed before and after the operators For example lt 10 Importing Data using the DTS 119 gt 10 10 note that the equal sign is two equal signs together with no spaces in between However spaces between operators is not allowed For example lt 10 is correct lt 10 1s not correct 40 is not correct there is a space between the two signs Those records not satisfying the import criterion will be highlighted in yellow under the preview window and a warning message will be shown at the top In order to filter these records select the corresponding warning and click on the Reject button just below the control that lists warnings and errors See section 4 1 4 on page 123 for details 4 1 3 Station Related Settings If the data to be imported contains information for new stations some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The Station Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed 1f data is imported to the Stations table Data Transfer System Import i J iol x Step 3 Station Re
501. te dropdown list box Selecting Printer Default for any of the printing options will assign the default setting of the selected printer for that particular print option Report Settings M Show Grid Align Controls to Grid Grid columns Grid rows Ruler Units i Inches ie Centimeters The Grid Settings section allows you to modify the grid appearance of the designer Report Settings 221 window You can set the visibility of the grid by enabling disabling the Show Grid checkbox Selecting the Align Controls to Grid checkbox will automatically snap controls to the nearest grid column Set the number of Grid columns and Grid rows by using the appropriate vertical scroll boxes You can change the units of the ruler that appears above the designer window by clicking on either the Inches or Centimeters radio button Report Settings ge Normal Heading Headings Headings Heading4 Her Delete ForeColor Horizontal Alignment Lett Vertical Alignment Top Cancel The Styles section allows you to create remove and modify text styles which can then be selected from the Text Style dropdown box and applied to your text controls Text styles are useful for applying many text characteristics font size bold italic underline etc to your text in just one simple task Click the New and Delete button to create a new style and delete a current style respectively The Font Color and Misc settings in th
502. ted States Environmental Protection Agency http www epa gov O WO W watershed landcover ulcmap html Data Land Cover Digital Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage USA Statewide Layer Satellite Land Cover National Atlas USA http www atlas usgs gove atlasftp html Data National Atlas Map Warehouse Format Shapefile Geotiff DBF Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Agriculture Biology Boundaries Climate Environment Geology History Map Reference People Transportation Water United States Department of Agriculture http datagateway nrcs usda gov Data Natural Resources Data Warehouse Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Orthoimagery Soils Common Land Units Cultural and Demographics Governmental Units and Place names Elevation Hydrography Cadastral Transportation Roads Digital Raster Graphic DRG Scanned USGS quads Land Cover Vegetation Plants Watershed boundaries 10 12 digit hydrologic units Wetlands and Floodplain Easements Climate Precipitation and Temper ature Flood hazards USDA Office Information Profile OIP Applied Conser vation Practices Water Control Infrastructure National Inventory of Dams Grand River Conservation Authority http www grandriver ca index document cfm Sec 6348ub1 164sub2 0 Data GRCA data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage Grand River Watershed Datum NAD83 Layer Airphoto Topog
503. ted under the Description category 1t may be useful to create a field named County or Municipality in order to organize stations wells Often stations for the project lie within a specific county or municipality It is easier to create this list that may be expanded as desired and link it to the County or Municipality field Then when it is necessary to enter data for the stations the County may be selected from a list contained within a combo box this eliminates the task of continually re typing the same values 2 In the Geologic Description category Lithology table it may be convenient to define a Linked List for the Soil Color field The list may contain generic soil colors ex light brown dark brown black grey etc When the time comes to enter data for this field the color may be selected from this linked list contained within a combo box instead of re entering the same values If the selected field contains a linked list then a combo box arrow will appear on the right side of the field Click on this arrow to view the available list items for the field 2 4 1 Creating a List List Editor Lists lookup tables can be created using the List Editor which can be launched by selecting the List Editor menu option from the Settings menu or simply by clicking on the List Editor button on the toolbar The List Editor can also be loaded from the Template Manager as described under the
504. ter Define the desired font settings then click OK to return to the Options dialog Rulers Tab Controls the appearance settings for the axis of the cross section plot For each ruler vertical and horizontal you may define e Foreground Color e Background Color e Marker Width e Min Tic Pixels e Tic Numbers e Font Vertical Exaggeration Define the vertical exaggeration scaling factor for new cross sections There are two options Default value or User defined Specific If the default option is selected the map manager will automatically calculate and assign the most appropriate vertical Description of Menu Items 369 exaggeration factor NOTE Please see Change Vertical Exaggeration on page 363 for information on how to change the vertical exaggeration once a cross section has been created Screen Water Levels Controls the appearance settings for how screens and water levels are displayed on the cross section These options are shown below Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Screen Symba Water Level Symbo Gap between Wells fa H pe 4 and Screen Pixel Eaj Size 12 al Fill Color Color P Fill Pattern A Has Outline Yes o Outline Color i Outline Width f al E Cancel H Help In this dialog there are options for the view settings color style etc for both the screen and the water levels The Gap between Well and Screen
505. ter 8 Map Manager Confirm a x 2 e Click Yes to open the cross section in the Cross Section editor This will load the cross section editor For more details on creating cross sections you may refer to Chapter 11 Cross Section Editor Modify Buffer Distance To modify the buffer distance of a cross section line e Select the cross section layer from the Layer Manager panel e Select a cross section line e Right click and select Update Buffer from the pop up menu CrossSection Line Ea Name ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e From the CrossSection Line dialog specify a new buffer distance e Click Ok Map Manager will now regenerate the cross section line using the new buffer distance Note Buffer distances for cross sections generated in past versions of HGA cannot be modified Defining a Cross Section Line 351 352 Chapter 8 Map Manager 11 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor is designed with easy to use tools for interpreting geological and hydrogeological data as well as interpreting data for groundwater flow models Generating model layers for use as modeling layer elevations in groundwater modeling packages such as Visual MODFLOW Pro has never been easier In addition the Cross Section Editor is seamlessly integrated with the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram
506. th the file extension mdf Be cautious when un installing SQL Express as this may result in the loss of your data If the server connection and database are valid the next window in the Project Wizard will be displayed Otherwise there will be a warning notification regarding the server or database If this 1s the case please select another server or database for your project or verify whether the connection exists Option 2 Build Connection String If the Build Connection String radio button is selected in the Database Environment window there will be an option to locate an MS SQL Server and build a connection to a database on a network server Build Connection String radio button from the Database Environment window dl Build connection string button located in the lower right corner and the following Data Link Properties dialog will appear Chapter 3 Project Manager Ea Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Specify the following to connect to SQL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name oOo Refresh 2 Enter information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password Heer Cane CO Password l Blank password D Slow saving password 3 6 Select the database on the server F Attach a database file as a database name o Usima the tilername Test Connection Cancel Help The
507. the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than other wise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Appendix D Advanced Interpolation Settings 459 Num_Neighbors Number of nearest data points to use when calculating inter polated value for each grid node Z_Only Allows the user to select between outputting the original X and Y values plus the interpolated value x y f x y or the interpolated value only f x y Note This has no effect on the actual contour output and can be ignored 14 4 2 Natural Neighbor 460 The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target for the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen pol
508. the main HGA window The new station group query will now appear as a new node under the Station Group node in the Project Browser The stations group query dynamic station group can be distinguished from a user defined station group static station group by a modified unid icon sa NOTE There are no options to modify the list of Display Fields for Station Group queries The default display fields are ID Name X Y Elevation and TOC In addition there are no advanced options for Station Group queries 144 Chapter 5 Queries 5 3 3 Query Using SQL Commands Example If you are familiar with Structured Query Language syntax commands you can retrieve manage and manipulate your data through the SQL View Preview tab using SQL statements For example two commands that are commonly used include the Select command and the Delete command Both of these commands are described below Select Command The Select Command retrieves data from tables in a database and 1s usually followed by a where clause For example if you want to create a query to show all chemistry results where the chemical name is benzene you would enter the following SQL statement into the SQL View Preview tab SELECT FROM parameter_result WHERE chemical_name Benzene e Next click the Execute Query button to display the query results shown below Xf a f Station Group Query ff Data Query Design SOL ViewPreview
509. the polygon or line whose vertex will be linked with another vertex e Click the Link Vertex option from the Edit menu or click the button from the toolbar Click on the desired vertex source vertex that will be linked with another one the color of the vertex changes to green to indicate it has been selected e Move the mouse cursor to the desired destination vertex to which the previously selected vertex will be linked The mouse cursor will change to a red square outline when a vertex is identified Click on this red square and the vertices will be linked e The Linked Vertex will turn orange to indicate that the vertex is linked and shared by two or more polygons or lines NOTE Link Vertices option is activated only if there are at least two objects on the layer Once two vertices are linked they behave as a single vertex Remove Links The Remove Links option allows for separating previously linked vertices Description of Menu Items 361 To use this option e Select the interpretation layer containing at least two polygons or lines whose one or more vertices are linked e Make this layer editable e Click the Remove Links option from the Edit menu or click the E button from the toolbar e Click on one of the linked vertices in the selected polygon linked vertices are colored orange e Upon clicking on a linked vertex the vertex will change back to blue color to indicate that the link has been successfully r
510. the template will be provided Use as Project Default The Use as Project Default option allows you to set this template as the default when the project is opened Tables and Fields Toolbar A second toolbar is provided below the Database Browser Tree View The items on this toolbar allow manipulating the database through the Database Browser A description of each of the items on this toolbar is given below The Add button allows adding tables and fields to the database depending on which node in the Database Browser is currently selected For example if a data category is active at the time this button is selected a table will be added in that data category Similarly if a table 1s active when the Add button is selected then another table will be added to the same category A field will be added if this button is pressed while any field in the desired table is active Both tables and fields are added at the end of the list By default the Template Manager names the new table field as type_ tld_ where HH stands for a number generated for the added item When a new table is created press the Add button again while the table is receiving the focus to add the first field to the table The Delete button allows deleting the selected node This button is activated when either a table or a field is currently selected Data categories as well as some required tables e g the Station
511. ticular system configuration please make sure that you followed the installation instructions precisely If the problem is still Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst 7 unresolved contact your hardware experts Finally if you are still having trouble see the section in Preface for more information on how to contact SWS 1 3 2 Installation Please refer to the Dongle_Install_Guide pdf for details on the installation of HGA This file can be found on your installation DVD ROM or can be downloaded from the FTP site The following is a brief excerpt HGA must be installed on your hard disk before you can start to use the software Please read the section on system requirements at the beginning of this section to ensure that your system meets the requirements before you start installing the software Place the DVD into your DVD ROM drive and the initial installation screen should load automatically Once loaded an installation interface with several different tabs will be presented Please take the time to explore the installation interface as there is information concerning other Schlumberger Water Services products our worldwide distributors technical support consulting training and how to contact us From the Installation tab you may choose from the following two buttons e HGA User s Manual e HGA Installation The User s Manual button will display a PDF copy of the manual which requires the Adobe Reader to view If you do not hav
512. ties of each table field e Group tables under logical data categories e Edit table designs define primary keys relationships between tables etc e Save user templates e Export user templates to a stand alone XML file e Create and edit linked fields e Set any selected user template as the default template for all new users e Set visibility of tables and or fields e Setting user level table and or field names display units where applicable and data formats where applicable 13 1 Understanding the Template Manager Hydro GeoAnalyst comes with a number of standard environmental database structure templates that are currently in use around the world When creating a new database for your project you have the option of either using one of these database templates or creating your own If the latter is selected the template manager can be used to create the new database structure from scratch All database structure templates that come with HG Analyst also come with their respective report and borehole log plot BHLP templates As such if one of the existing database templates is selected during the project creation these templates will be copied to your project by default You can later edit them or even remove them from your project if desired The Template Manager allows you to modify the current user view as well as create an Understanding the Template Manager 429 unlimited number of additional user views For example a
513. tion The volume estimation value will be in the length units for the X Y co ordinates specified in the database For example 1f you use UTM and X and Y are entered in meters then the volume estimation value will be in cubic meters Color Maps The Color maps elements allows you to create a color shaded map for the concentration data that will plot distributed colors A color legend for the Color map will also appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen Creating a Color Map To create a color map click on the desired element in the Model tree to highlight it Display Settings 413 then right click on the element and select the Add color map option from the pop up menu y Alternately color maps may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create color map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window shown below with a list of the available surfaces slices The color map can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections on page 422 below m Select create slices Ioj xj Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice no 1 Horizontal slice no 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal
514. tion DIN 4023 bs al Description Demo Database based on the data from a Visual Groundwater Project x Required Field Cancel Help 106 Chapter 3 Project Manager If the projection system is changed existing station coordinates will be converted into the new projection system If the Soil Classifications System is changed existing cross sections with defined geology will be impacted It may be necessary to reassign geological soil types with the new soil classification system and recreate the cross sections Using the Project Manager 107 108 Chapter 3 Project Manager The Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS 1s a flexible tool used for importing and exporting data into and out of a HGA project When starting a new project it may be necessary to import data from other sources into the HGA database Data may exist in such sources as Text Files MS Excel or other spreadsheets MS Access SQL servers or Oracle databases The DTS is designed to import data from such sources into the HGA database In addition data may be exchanged import and or export between the HGA database and various other data sources during the lifetime of a project Such imports exports in most cases will involve the HGA database and other sources such as spreadsheets delimited text files and other database formats such as MS Access The DTS is designed to 1 Import data into the database from such sources as
515. tion NOTE A station group containing at least one borehole needs to be selected in order to launch the BHLP from the HGA main interface The BHLP can also be launched from the Map Manager and Cross Section editors by e Clicking on the View BHLP button in the toolbar or View gt BHLP from the menu and clicking on a station to select it You may also view a BHLP in the HGA main window by selecting View gt Well Profile from the menu and clicking on the desired station in the station list The BHLP will load and display a borehole log plot of the selected station using one of the available BHLP templates A typical BHLP window is shown in the following figure Please note that a BHLP opened through the Map Manager Cross Section editor will not have as many options Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter Viewer Available Stations Window srebole Log Designers ew P ua A Ej a el Labor Dn Yi Elevation fii TOC rm HEE ea e ra ii 500 27 00 Designer Tree Designer Toolbar Settings Live Update Output Options The Borehole Log Designer dialog contains the following items e A list of all Available Stations Select the station for the BHLP e Designer Tree Contains the columns and related entities for the BHLP design e Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the BHLP design e Settings Contains the settings for the selected entity e Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the
516. tion and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e Station ID located in the Station table e Sample ID also referred to as the Sys_sample_code this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Batch Identifiers Samples that are prepared and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel using the same lot s of reagents within a specified time period should be assigned the same Batch ID Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch number which relates the samples to each other e Detection Limit Method detection limit typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table e Parameter Name contains the parameter being analyzed typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry table with the results e Parameter Identification Information contains meta data about the parameter typically found in the same table as the parameter name e Parameter Values The measured or observed value for the selected chemical or parameter Typically found in the Chemistry_Results or Soil_Chemistry Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis 167 table e Quality Code Identifiers Used to identify the sample type Typically found with the Sample ID in the Monitoring Event gt Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table see Defining Quality Codes fo
517. tion data Line measurement tool allows for measuring the distance between two points on the map project 291 10 1 About the Interface 292 Map projects are created and modified within the Map Manager application linked to Hydro GeoAnalyst The Map Manager can view and modify one map project at a time In addition the map projects should be modified by only one user at a time A map project may have an unlimited number of map layers The Map Manager may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways e Select Tools Map Manager from the Main Menu of Hydro GeoAnalyst e Select Record Display on Map and the selected Hydro GeoAnalyst records will be loaded onto a Map project In the Hydro GeoAnalyst toolbar click on the ai Map button e From the Hydro GeoAnalyst Project Browser select a map project branch from the Map node Once the Map Manager window is loaded the display should be similar to the one shown below Active Window Menu Protect Laver Edk Tooke Vee elect Settings Hep Bar aos ii smes AO xl rear lA Toolbar DO uomi Layer fe E TERN seen Manager AS Map Window Layer Coord HAD 1963 LITA Zorra 17H Datum E Meat daran 1500 Informations Projection System Coordinates Scale Chapter 8 Map Manager The Map Manager window contains the following elements e Menu Bar Contains program menu commands e Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used featur
518. tions Add Plot will prompt you to select a template to be used Add Default Plot will create a new plot using the default plot template x Delete button deletes the selected plot or line series E Refresh button refreshes the design with new settings or data po Zoom in button allows you to zoom into the selected plot page to zoom in on selected plot data within an individual plot refer to the section Zoom on page 180 below a Zoom out button returns to the original zoom view EH Fit to Page button fits all plots to the current viewer window size At the bottom of the window you will find the following buttons aA gt gt The function of these buttons from left to right is Previous Page scroll to the previous page in the plot design Next Page scroll to the next page in the plot design About the Interface 179 Zoom To zoom in on plot data in an individual plot use the mouse cursor to draw box around the desired data a sample is shown in the screen shot below ai m mf we To zoom out to the original extents right mouse click on the plot area and select Zoom Out from the menu 7 1 2 Viewer Window Settings Under the Settings tab you can define the settings for the plot page design Settings Data Source Name ate Number of Columns 2 Number of Rows 2 Spacing Width 10 Spacing Height 10 aterquality_multipleplot Name controls the name of the selected plot s
519. tisfy the specified criteria The Find window is shown below Find Find what Eind Hest Cancel Look In id Match ny Part of Field a Search Down Match Case H Help When the Find window is loaded the value in the current grid cell receiving the focus will be identified in the Find What field Beside Look In select from one of the columns in the current grid All columns which appear in the current grid will be available for selection Beside Match select from one of the following options Any Part of Field Find will attempt to locate any part of the search term in the existing records Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst Whole Field Find will locate records which match the whole field only Start of Field Find will locate records that match the start of the field The More Less button can be used to create a simple or Advanced find The Advanced find provides additional Search options Beside Search select from Up Down or All The Match Case option will match the case records with the defined option To execute a Find e Enter a word or number in the Find What field e Select a grid column from the Look In combo box e Select a Match option e Specify a Search option default is Down e Click Find Next The first record matching this criteria will be selected and highlighted in the grid The Find button in the toolbar performs the same function 2 2 3 View Th
520. to Appendix C e Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog to close e Click on the Refresh button to refresh the dialog with information from the selected data source A list of tables 1f any are available will appear in the Tables combo box e Select the Table that contains the list to be imported e Select the Field column in this table which contains the Values for the list e Select the Field column that contains the Description if necessary e The list items for this field will appear in the preview frame in the lower half of the window e Once satisfied with the content of the list click on the OK button to start importing the list e In the List Editor window press the Save button to save the list items e Once the list has been created use the Template Manager to link this list to the selected field See the section Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager in Chapter 13 for more details 2 4 2 Editing a List The following editing options are available in the List Editor e Delete a list item by selecting it and pressing the x Delete button e Move the list item by selecting it and dragging it up or down to a new position in the list 72 Chapter 2 Using Hydro GeoAnalyst e Edit the list item by selecting it and making necessary changes e Once the editing is complete click the Save button to save changes 2 4 3 Launching the List Editor from the Template Manager
521. to WHIReports designer for further modifications Press the Next button to start Cancel Clicking on the Next button displays the second dialog requesting the MS Access database name that will be used as a source for the reports to be imported Provide the database name by clicking on the Open Database button to the right of the text box or alternately type in the name including the full path 1z Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Source Database B Projects Demo_Project Report SampleReport mdb Cancel lt Back Next gt Import Reports from MS Access 233 Click on the Next button to display the next dialog listing all reports that are available in the selected database Select the desired report and click on the Next button to proceed B Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Start Database Employee Sales by Country Invoice Products by Category Reports Sales by Category Sales by Category Subreport Sales by Year Sales by Year Subreport Sales Totals by Amount Summary of Sales by Quarter Summary of Sales by Year Options Convert Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish The dialog shown below will be displayed It allows you to specify some settings that will alter the converted report The default values are fine unless a change is desired E Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports E Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Da
522. try of Environment Water Well Information System MOE WWIS Metric Units e Ontario s Ministry of Environment Water Well Information System MOE About Hydro GeoAnalyst 3 WWIS Imperial Units e US E P A Region 2 Metric e US E P A Region 2 Imperial e US E P A Region 5 Metric e US E P A Region 5 Imperial These templates also include commonly used and customizable data queries and report templates Template Manager If your database needs cannot be satisfied through one of the database templates that are provided with HGA you may use the Template Manager to create and customize your own database structure The Template Manager is provided to handle such tasks as creating editing and importing database schemas for your project databases It provides a set of categories that allows organizing your database tables Existing database structures can also be imported using the Template Manager Customizable Lists and Standards HGA comes with a List Editor tool that allows users to create and customize lists for any field allowing for rapid data entry Common examples of lists include e List of over 150 standard Soil Classifications with descriptions and patterns e List of common chemical names with their CAS numbers e Lab analysis test methods e Well drilling methods construction and casing materials e County and State Codes e Applicable standards for various purposes regions and agencies A List in HG
523. ts 2 8 3DView Borehole Logs Plots gt Loading options Load All Incremental fi 000 ME 9 wo_stations I Data Loading Options When working with environmental data it is common that you can be dealing with hundreds or thousands of stations Likewise for an individual station there may be hundreds or thousands of records common examples are geophysical logs downhole data or water levels recorded in a data logger Reading this data from the database can be a time consuming task In the lower left corner of the HGA main window below the Project Browser you will see the following settings Loading option f Load All amp Incremental 1000 E 3 low 2 ID 2 Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst With the Data Loading Options it is possible to load station groups and data in individual tables in smaller increments The following options are available e If the Load All option is selected then all stations will be loaded in the station group e If the Incremental option is selected and a value is defined default 1000 then only the first 1000 stations in the station group will be loaded Click on the Refresh fe onon to load the subsequent increment of stations load an additional 1000 stations etc Currently this feature is implemented only for the station list For tables other than the station list you can use x Stop button to stop the data loading pressing this butt
524. ts Adding Control Points You can validate the accuracy of the georeferenced raster using Control Points Control points are simply locations on the raster image of which real world coordinates are known Real world coordinates can be derived from geographic sources such as topographical maps or GPS units By comparing the georeferenced raster coordinates with their corresponding real world coordinates you can determine if the raster has been georeferenced accurately To add a control point e Click the 4 button from the toolbar e Click a location on the raster image where the real world coordinates are known A dialog similar to the one shown below will display 2 536997 2879747 Ya 481 3771 400565 P 485 p 303 e Coordinates shown in the above dialog X2 Y2 represent the interpolated coordinates derived from the two or three specified georeference points for that particular location on the image You can validate the accuracy of these coordinates by comparing them to the real world coordinates of that location Note To improve precision you may want to Zoom In directly on the location before adding the control point e Click Ok to accept the Control point You can add additional control points by simply clicking on a different location on the raster image All control points are stored in a table shown below which can be accessed by clicking Edit Control Points from the menu bar 310 Chapter 8 Map Manager
525. ts for the groundwater professionals all designed to increase your efficiency and enhance your technical capability including e Visual MODFLOW Premium e Visual MODFLOW 3D Builder e Hydro GeoAnalyst e Aquifer Test Pro e AquaChem e GW Contour e UnSat Suite Plus Visual HELP Visual PEST ASP e Visual Groundwater Visual MODFLOW Premium Visual MODFLOW Premium is a three dimensional groundwater flow and contaminant transport modeling application that integrates MODFLOW 2000 SEAWAT MODPATH MT3DMS MT3D99 RT3D VMOD 3D Explorer WinPEST Stream Routing Package Zone Budget MGO SAMG and PHT3D Applications include well head capture zone delineation pumping well optimization aquifer storage and recovery groundwater remediation design simulating natural attenuation and saltwater intrusion Visual MODFLOW 3D Builder Visual MODFLOW 3D Builder is the new generation in dynamic conceptual model building Featuring a powerful multi format object data import tool and tested to work within the latest version of the Visual MODFLOW modeling environment Visual MODFLOW 3D Builder enables you to build impressive representations of your groundwater system within a single modeling environment This means you save hours when building your numerical model Hydro GeoAnalyst Hydro GeoAnalyst is an information management system for managing groundwater and environmental data Hydro GeoAnalyst combines numerous pre and post processing c
526. ty settings can be redefined in the dialog shown below Set Connectivity 1 2 i xi Select Server and Database This dialog displays the server and Server siy T database hosting your data EE Although the dialog allows all J Windows NT Integrated Authorization power users to modify the Ise Nana connectivity settings great care de sa must be taken as any improper 5 i setting may corrupted your project asswore Modify these settings only if the Database demo_vow y database is moved to another server is renamed or user access rights are changed Build Connection String Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security sspi Persist Security Info F alse Initial Catalog demo_vgw Data Source srv Use Procedure for Prepare 1 Auto Translate T rue Packet Size 4096Workstation ID aschalew Use Encryption for Data False T ag with column collation when possible False Miscellaneous Settings This dialog provides access to project coordinates and soil classification system Miscellaneous x Project Location m Projection Type s Projection Specify the project location and C Geographic coordinate related settings jogi NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N e UTM i The Soil Specification contains HEA Units soil names and patterns m are y which will be used Others to visualize your lithology data in borehole log plots and crass sections Project Location waterloo Ontario Soil Specifica
527. ual HELP is based on the US E P A HELP model Hydrologic Evaluation of Landfill Performance and has been integrated into a 32 Bit Windows application It combines the International Weather Generator Landfill Profile Designer and Report Editor Applications include designing landfill profiles predicting leachate mounding and evaluating potential leachate seepage to the groundwater Visual PEST ASP Visual PEST ASP combines the powerful parameter estimation capabilities of PEST ASP with the graphical processing and display features of WinPEST Visual PEST ASP can be used to assist in data interpretation model calibration and predictive analysis by optimizing model parameters to fit a set of observations This popular estimation package achieves model independence through its capacity to communicate with a model through its input and output files Visual Groundwater Visual Groundwater is a visualization software package that delivers high quality three dimensional representations of subsurface characterization data and groundwater modeling results Combining graphical tools for three dimensional visualization and animation Visual Groundwater also features a data management system specifically designed for borehole investigation data The graphical display features allow the user to display site maps discrete data contours isosurfaces and cross sectional views of the data Groundwater Instrumentation Diver NETZ Diver NETZ is an all in
528. uery shown below Caption Sets or returns the string expression to be used as a prompt for the query parameter Select a station in the query shown below Value Sets or Returns the string expression to be substituted in the query Name in the query shown below For example the bolded expression in the following parameter query forces the report component to display a dialog as shown below 226 Chapter 8 The Report Editor SELECT Station name as name chem_test_resultsO chemical_name chem_test_resultsO sample_date chem_test_resultsO result_value chem_test_results0 result_unit chem_test_results0 repORtINg_detection_limit FROM Station RIGHT JOIN PStation ON Station ID PStation SID LEFT JOIN chem_test_resultsO ON Station 1d chem_test_resultsO Station WHERE Name lt station namelSelect a station ISelect DISTINCT Name as Name from station gt and chem_test_resultsO chemical_name Benzene and PStation ID 1 An example of a Parameter Query Report is available in the Demo project the report name is Conditional Report When you launch this report the dialog mentioned above will appear prompting you to select a station ie Report Parameters i x Enter the values of parameters Select 4 station Select one of the stations that satisfies this query in this case it is one of the Monitoring Wells W 05 for example and click OK The report window will then appear as shown in the screens
529. unless a template 1s specified 8 3 1 Creating A Report Template The Report Editor allows you to save the active report s design as a report template for future use Once you are satisfied with the design of the currently opened report s layout click H Save As button to save it as a report template In the dialog that is displayed provide the name for the template check the box beside Save as template and click on Save The template saves the header the footer as well as the background for the detail section of the current report The detail section may have background watermarks such as DRAFT CONFIDENTIAL etc at desired angles and locations The header and footer may contain relevant information for your company and or client including logo name Address Telephone Fax e mail and web site address The user can also configure properties such as font alignment etc for the template Once a report template is created it will be listed under the Reports node in the Project Browser of HGA 8 3 2 Opening a Report Template Report templates can be opened by double clicking on them in the Project Browser of HGA A template can also be opened using the report editor directly by selecting the Open button from the Designer window s toolbar and setting the file filter to WTP Once a report template is opened it can be edited and saved 8 3 3 Deleting a Report Template In HGA right click on
530. ure including the required fields colored in blue Selecting any one of the sample tables and clicking on the Save button at the bottom creates the table with all the required fields After a table is added as many fields as desired can be added to the table In addition all settings such as defining or refining the primary key and relationship to other tables can be undertaken Importing Tables A new table can also be created based on a table structure read from any OLE DB supported database To import a table source structure right click on a data category select the Import table structure option from the pop up menu and the following window will appear Working With the Template Manager 439 1S Copying Table Structure to Databaze Source Connection String Table Station ID Data Exampl sl sl Total Records e Click on the 7 button to build a connection string to an existing database or file The Data Link properties dialog will be displayed For assistance on using the Data Link Properties please see Appendix C Using the Data Link Properties for Importing e Once the data source is selected click on the Refresh button e Select the Table from this database and the field which should be used as the StationID from the respective picklists A preview will appear in the lower half of the window e Click OK to begin the import The Template Manager creates the new table by
531. ve defined the settings press the Ca Add button to add the mapped fields the values should then be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window To delete an existing 3D Plume simply click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button HGA will create a 3D plume file in the Plumes sub directory for your project with the file name provided and the extension nc For example TVOC nc in the directory D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Plumes To display the plume please proceed to the instructions in Chapter 11 View 3D In addition HGA will save the gridded 3D results to a TXT file using the same file name and in the same Plume sub directory NOTE Currently there is no method of opening plume projects in the Interpolation tool to make modifications Therefore it is suggested that you save the data query so the 3D project can be quickly re created Crosstab Report This menu item loads the Crosstab query component where you can generate crosstab query reports from your existing data queries Ensure that you have a valid data query selected in the Queries node in the HGA browser before selecting this option For more details please see Chapter 5 Crosstab Queries Quality Control This menu item loads the Quality Control component with these tools you can manage Lab Quality Control templates and perform a quality control assessment For more details pleas
532. verse Distance The Inverse Distance Squared method is a very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to a bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other methods of interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended The Interpolator Options for the Inverse Distance Squared method is described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X_Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation pro cess and details in
533. vertices or add more vertices To move a vertex e Select the Mm Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once on the desired model layer line to activate e Click on the vertices to be moved e Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex Drawing Cross Section Interpretations 387 e Select the Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the line to activate the line e Select the 4 Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location on the line the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Adding Multiple Vertices To insert multiple vertices along a model line follow the steps below e From the layer manager panel enable edit mode for the Model interpretation layers e Select a model interpretation line from the cross section e Right click the line and select Insert Vertices along Line The following dialog will display Insert ertices i x Insert Werticez along the Lin EE m i By distance m DK Cancel 53 Help You can insert multiple vertices in one of the following two ways e By number inserts a specified number of vertices along the model line at regularly spaced intervals e By distance inserts a vertex at a specified distance interval e g every 50 metres along the entire model line Select the desired method specify a value and click Ok to insert the verti
534. w e Visible Column Options Border Line Wisibilit Outline Appearance Description Genera M Wisible width 10 Heightf10 4 Image Symbol Image Settings Symbol Setting E Draw Mode Tied y Symbol Line Color Symbol Fill Color The Depth frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking on the Options button see page 253 Use the Outline checkbox to show hide the column border line The Appearance tab allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox You can also select from the available Draw Modes change the Width and Height of the images or modify the appearance of symbols Chapter 9 Borehole Log Plotter BHLP Settings x e visible Column Options Border Line Wisibilit FF Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using Iw Visible Feet L Alignmen Horizontal Right Z Vertical Center Help Apply Cancel The Description tab consists of two subtabs Appearance and Using The Appearance subtab allows you to show hide the text label change its Font and change the position of the label by using the horizontal and vertical Alignment dropdown boxes BHLP Settings l x Jw Visible Colum Options Border Line Wisibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using w Using as Numerico Data Format EEEE Decimal places
535. w button creates a new map project Open button opens an existing map project Save button saves the current map project Print button sends the current map view to the report editor Selection Pointer button allows objects in the active layer to be selected h 7 51005 Draw Polygon button allows a polygon to be drawn in the active layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable About the Interface 295 296 o Draw Rectangle button allows a rectangle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is visible and set to be editable Draw Circle button allows a circle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw Line button allows a line to be drawn in the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a line shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw a Point button allows a point to be inserted in the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a point shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Insert Text button allows for text to be inserted on the selected layer This feature 1s active only when a text file layer is selected and set to be editable Information button allows the information for the selected station or any other object such as contour lines to be viewed Measure button allows the
536. w project The Project Manager allows the user to select a server for the database select or create a database for the new project provide project related information name location soil classification settings etc and select a database structure 1f a new database is to be created The New button in the toolbar performs the same function When creating a new project there will be a prompt to enter the User name and password in a dialog as shown in the example below User Credentials xX User Name Fassword You must enter a valid user name and password for a user that has privileges for creating new projects HGA will then check these credentials in the security document to confirm that this user has these privileges For more details on assigning user access controls please see Chapter 3 Application Level Objects Note On Windows Vista operating systems User Account Control UAC must be disabled before you can successfully create a new project For information on how to disable UAC please refer to the installation instructions in your licensing guide The process of creating a new project is further explained in Chapter 3 Using the Project Manager The Open menu item is used to open existing HGA projects Only projects with the extension VBH may be opened in HGA The VBH file contains basic information for the project including a connection string to the HGA database The 41 Open button in the toolbar
537. will allow you to make any desired modifications The fields in the selected grid will be added to the report designer and the ADO data control is automatically created An example is shown below for the Lithology table HALTERE TIEM as Jf A JA SRP ES BPR EFF AA Ee at a a Cat O BeBe as ODRehs Jar e hajra AAN alo GOO EA oso The layout of the report can then be modified and unwanted fields can be removed from the design If the fields do not immediately show up in the Design window press the Refresh button in the Fields frame as circled above To see the ADO Data control for the report click on the button ADO button in the Detail section of the Report body design also circled above Then right click and select Properties A dialog similar to the one shown below will appear 224 Chapter 8 The Report Editor Properties oe x Provider Po DataSource ame Po UserlD FO Password FO ConnectionString Frovider SGLOLEDE 1 Integrated Security sspi Build Source SOL SELECT FROM lithology WHERE Station 27 ORDER BY Station Cancel Apply In the ADO properties under Source SQL you can see that the SQL string has been automatically created for you based on the table selected in HGA In this example the SQL string basically states Select all fields from the Lithology table where the Station ID is 27 and order by Station If you are familiar with the form
538. window as shown in the following figure Display Settings 411 412 e Isosurface properties ioj xj Isosurface name Plume_4 blinimum value 0 Masinunn value 32721 lsosurface value fi 7092 lzosurace color FF Show borders Color from palette This window is used to set the display settings of the isosurface as described below Isosurface name defines the name of the isosurface as it will appear in the Model Tree under the selected element Minimum value is the calculated minimum value from the interpolated data set Maximum value is the calculated maximum value from the interpolated data set Isosurface value is the element value for which the isosurface will be created Isosurface color is the user specified color of the isosurface double click the color box to customize the color Show borders will display a color map of the element values on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain Color from palette will use the element color palette to automatically color the isosurface according to the specified isosurface value Once the isosurface is created the display settings can be accessed from the tree view These are shown below Setting Value Name leosurface_1 Visible e Color LI P Semitransparent Iw Isozurface value 35000 0 0 Max value 38034625 Color from palette Iw Show borders Iw Volume estimatation 99153 Visi
539. wish to place a vertex beyond the extent of the current map view click and hold the right mouse button to pan across the map Also you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out while defining the cross section line e At the end point of the line double click the left mouse button to finish This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line Hame ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here OF Cancel e For each cross section line specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click OK to accept the Line attributes e If necessary selected stations can be deselected by clicking on each of them while holding down the lt Ctrl gt key If necessary extra stations may be added to the selection by clicking on one or more stations while holding down lt Ctrl gt key NOTE Once a cross section line has been created stations can still be added to or removed from the line by selecting the line then right clicking and choosing the Add Remove Stations option Stations can then be added removed by clicking on the Defining a Cross Section Line 349 desired statio
540. wser To see the results of the selected query right click on the query and select Execute Query option The query results will then be displayed in the Data Query tab as described below 5 5 1 Data Query Tab The Data Query tab in the HGA main window provides an interface for executing the Managing Queries 147 queries and searches HirdroGeo Analyst Deno E Program Files HGAnalbyst Projects Danma Project Predect Edt Wew Fecord Setii Took Help CE TEE ee Fa a Re e 400 E E li Eaton Groups BH Siston Dista ETE Ous l apies pumpin Squdetest pumpergles water leyedi all Steion Lit TH Data Quay 71 Stason Data Staton Group Ostebate Tables in Hip name das chee concert rel ur avg wateke par iate 7 ZSA ASMA GETS TUUSA BEX 14 191 eres cdon nippraballcr 425755105 401430575 66 14 12 10 2000 BTEX 15 wat crots_tech n_ model intereetationd PREAS AAA AA ASAN ETES a ugi caca lalo erangi SSS 481405 3 68 19 OSTAU ETEX 3 ug i eera daa 425785105 401430579 GOA 0625 2000 BTEX 11 ugi Flee teil ci SEES AAA AA MAPAN ETES 13 ugi SHS 4S GE A ALS 3 ug 4755766 401490259 G A 12102000 BTEX 10 ugi peo eucons 10 mg per hg and depth gannad SSME AAA ELO ETE E ugi Plume data ETA ASME GE AOL TEX E ug qalab anak 50 53606619 4014655 09 GO 1022000 BTEX 23 ugi Sb alert for_deletion ASE ASEAN GAS TAAN ETES 25 ag tod chem exceedances SR AE Gear OS 200L ETEX 14 at pails 50 53606619
541. y backed up You are strongly encouraged to frequently back up your HGA project folder and the SQL Server database 1 5 Learning to use Hydro GeoAnalyst There are several ways of getting acquainted with HGA including using the Demo Guide located on your installation DVD ROM the Getting Started tutorial and the On Line Help User s Manual Please contact Schlumberger Water Services 1f you require further training on HGA for yourself or your company or on other software that is developed and distributed by Schlumberger Water Services 1 5 1 Hydro GeoAnalyst On Line Help 12 This manual is supplied to you in two forms as a printed book and as an On line Help file To view the On Line help version of this manual select Help gt Contents Some HGA windows and dialogs contain Help buttons which load the appropriate help section for the current active component The HGA Help window is divided into three main areas e A Navigation Frame on the left displays the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs e A Toolbar across the top displays a set of buttons to help navigate through the HGA Help system Chapter 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst e A Topic Frame on the right displays the actual Help topics included in the On Line Help The tabs in the Navigation Frame provide the core navigational features as described below Contents The Contents tab displays the headings in the Table of Contents in the form of an
542. y Layer Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquifer gt Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer e Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquifer AS P xXx 2 Save Cancel 53 Help o II In the Model Layers dialog there are four columns e Order Layer order from top to bottom read only e Name Defines the layer name e Description Defines layer description e Pattern Defines line properties for the model layer In this dialog specify the total number of model layers and the properties for each layer Layers will be ordered from top to bottom the first layer will always be Top of Layer 1 i e Ground surface followed by Bottom of Layer 1 Bottom of Layer 2 and so forth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer excluding the top layer Additional model layers may be inserted at any location at any time Press the h Add button to add a new model layer The new layer will be added ABOVE the currently selected layer e Press the Y Delete button to remove the selected model layer e To edit an existing layer press the Edit button or double click on the row containing this layer Description of Menu Items 375 Each model layer does not need to appear in all cross sections NOTE The Model Layers options are not available when the Model Lay
543. ygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut rubber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peaks and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that the user can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has the gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surfac
544. you want to display a pivoted view of your chemistry results whereby each row represents a different sample at each station and each column represents results for each analyte Another common example within the environmental industry is to show analyte names reporting units and regulatory limits along the left column while sample names date and or depth ranges are shown along the top row and result values and qualifiers shown in the intersecting cells Storing your data in such a way in a table would break the first normal form which disallows repeating groups Crosstab queries provide a solution to this problem HGA uses a state of the art crosstab component that is easy to use to produce dynamic crosstab queries and reports The data in your crosstab reports can be highlighted with the format you specify allowing you to flag values that are outside user defined range values for example above guideline levels Once you are satisfied with the crosstab query you created you may save the query for later use send it to a printer or export it to either an Excel spreadsheet PDF or an HTML format All formatting details will also be printed and or exported 5 8 2 Creating a Crosstab Query The crosstab query starts with a data query which can be designed using the Query Builder See Data Query Example on page 132 for more details The data query should contain the desired data set along with the desired fields you want to display in
545. yy E SSE SESS lv Text color O Text size 17 31625 B Decimals 3 gt Box labels Box depth 3 46325 Box color You may modify the isoline properties intervals and label settings Line properties e Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type e Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Display Settings 409 e Width is the contour line width e Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals e View shows hides the automatic lines e Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted e Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted e Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Labels The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels e Visible shows or hides the labels e Text color controls the color of the label e Text size controls the size of the labels e Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value e Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line e Distance sets the distance value between each label smal

Hydro GeoAnalyst User`s Manual - swstechnology.com archive

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents